The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB13-0477 REV2 Issue E Project Manual Corrected GERALD R. FORD AMPHITHEATER 530 S. FRONTAGE ROAD VAI L, COLORADO PROJECT NO. 20132266.00 9 -?r PROJECT MANUAL ISSUE E - FOR CONSTRUCTION NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SANTA BARBARA Z E H R C N V A I L -A'Lull O ibi S 1 ;970)34 3-C25'=.A.'rrE;a 9-1 1ao ..n-:e—. .•x=�+� —D— AND ASSOCIATES,INC. - . = n . I .. ARC'TTTTr.C.TT-Rr•Pl.ANNTN�"TNVTT.RT0R S GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PROJECT MANUAL INDEX ORIGINAL ISSUE: OCTOBER 16, 2013 *Asterisk and italics indicate information to be issued at a later date. Bold indicates new information from Final CD's. DIVISION 0—STANDARD FORMS 000001 ASBESTOS TESTING RESULTS (OCTOBER 22, 2012) 000002 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION PROGRAM AND GEOTECH RECOMMENDATIONS (DECEMBER 30, 2011) 000003 LIGHTING COMCHECK DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012100 ALLOWANCES 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFCATION PROCEEDURES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013222 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOATA 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02300 EARTHWORK 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Project Manual Index Issue E—November 6,2013 Pagel of 4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02580 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02620 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 07252 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02753 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02922 TOPSOIL DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033543 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS DIVISION 4-MASONRY 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 044313.16 ADHERED STONEMASONRY VENEER DIVISION 5—METALS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061600 SHEATHING 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 079200 BUILDING JOIN SEALANTS Project Manual Index Issue E—November 6,2013 Page 2 of 4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE DIVISION 9—FINISHES 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES NOT USED DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS 123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14—CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 22—PLUMBING 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING Project Manual Index Issue E—November 6,2013 Page 3 of 4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 220548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220700 PLUMBING ISULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES 221316 SANITARY WASTE&VENT PIPING 221319 SANITARY WAST PIPING SPECIALTIES 220001 PLUMBING FIXTURES SCHEDULES DIVISION 23—MECHANICAL NOT USED DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260526 GROUNDING 260529 SUPPORTING DEVICES 260533 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS 260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 262416 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 32—SITE IMPROVMENTS 321443 POUROUS UNIT PAVING 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION 329200 TURF AND GRASSES 329300 PLANTS END OF PROJECT MANUAL INDEX Project Manual Index Issue E—November 6,2013 Page 4 of 4 Environmental Development and Training ACM LLC. 2100 W. Littleton Blvd Suite 225 Littleton, Colorado 80120 Phone 303-638-3778, Email: ktwilson79 @hotmail.com October 22, 2012 Attention: Dennis Ward Superintendant 51 Eagle Road#2 P.O. Drawer 5400 Avon, Colorado 81620 dward @ranelson.com 970-445-0176 Fax 970-949-4397 RE: Additional Sample Results for Limited Asbestos Survey PLM bulk Sampling for Suspect Asbestos Containing Materials observed at the Vail Ticket Arena Restrooms, wall and ceiling areas and Arena Basement Structure Beam Fire Proofing in Vail Colorado for planned construction area. Executive Summary A limited, client delineated survey was conducted in the Main Level restrooms wall and ceiling materials which included Drywall Tape and Mud, and filled CMU block respectively. In addition, a small potential patch area of restroom exterior wall was also sampled. The Main building basement structural beam fireproofing was sampled to facilitate a small planned addition of mechanical system material. No asbestos was detected in any of the sampled materials, please find Lab data attached to final report. Field Work On October 18, 2012, the limited, client area delineated, asbestos survey was be completed by an Environmental Protection Agency(EPA) accredited AHERA and Colorado State certified asbestos building inspector. The inspector performed the physical assessment of suspect materials,plan and organize the building inspection; identified and mapped homogeneous areas and functional spaces; assessed the condition and potential for future damage to friable materials, if any, and the location of non-friable materials. 1 In general and in most cases, a minimum of three samples were be collected from each readily visible and accessible homogeneous area, in accordance with EPA National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA)regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101. Sampling techniques generally followed the 3-5-7 rule under AHERA, specifying the collection o£ • 3 samples of surfacing materials less than 3,000 square feet in size. • 5 samples of surfacing materials between 1,000 and 5,000 square feet in size; and • 7 samples of surfacing materials greater than 5,000 square feet in size. Additional samples may still need to be collected during demolition or remodeling, if hidden areas are revealed and materials are encountered that was not sampled earlier. The samples were submitted to Reservoirs Environmental, Inc.,under proper chain-of-custody procedures, for analysis of asbestos content on a Rush same Day standard turn-around. Reservoir Environmental is an American Industrial Hygiene Association(AIHA) accredited laboratory and participates in the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). A minimum of three samples of a material is needed to categorize that material as non-asbestos- containing. Conclusions A limited, client delineated survey was conducted in the Main Level restrooms wall and ceiling materials which included Drywall Tape and Mud, and filled CMU block respectively. In addition, a small potential patch area of restroom exterior wall was also sampled. The Main building basement structural beam fireproofing was sampled to facilitate a small planned addition of mechanical system material.No asbestos was detected in any of the sampled materials. This survey was limited to the specified suspect asbestos materials only, in specific locations. Prior to disturbance of any other identified suspected asbestos containing materials, they must be Assumed asbestos containing or sampled and proven otherwise. Under current EPA, Colorado Regulation 8 and OSHA provisions abatement and repair of any Assumed or unsampled materials is limited to those adequately trained and certified to handle such asbestos materials. Additional specific awareness training may be required for custodial and vendor sub-contractors in activities that may impact the identified or assumed materials condition or repair. These 2 activities should be managed and tracked as part of an Asbestos Operations and Maintenance plan per EPA AHERA and Colorado Regulation Number 8 part B prior to demolition. Please contact me if you have any question related to this project. K44 T41114f W14 � Kris Thomas Wilson State Certified Inspector 4663 Environmental Development and Training ACMLLC. 2100 W. Littleton Blvd Suite 225 Littleton, Colorado 80120 Phone 303-638-3778, Email: ktwilson79 @hotmail.com 3 Limitations Environmental Development and Training ACM LLC prepared this report, for the exclusive and present use of Client, and its contractors and subcontractors, if applicable. This report addresses certain physical characteristics of the site with regards to the release or presence of asbestos in limited, client determined areas only. These services were performed in a manner consistent with practices common in the environmental health profession. The information and conclusions provided herein are valid only with respect to the specific locations and analytes investigated at the time this report was prepared. The findings, conclusions, and recommendations presented here are based on information available at the time the site was evaluated. In the event of any reuse or publication of any portion of this report, Environmental Development and Training ACM LLC shall not be liable for damages arising out or such reuse of publication. Any reuse a third party makes of this report, or any reliance on or decisions made are the responsibility of such third party. Environmental Development and Training ACM LLC accepts no responsibility for damages, if any, suffered by any third party as the result of decisions made or actions taken based on this report. 4 Subsurface Exploration Program and Geotechnical Recommendations Ford Amphitheater Improvements Vail, Colorado f ' - � y Prepared for: Vail Valley Foundation P.O. Box 309 Vail, Colorado 81658 Attention: Mr. Ceil Folz Job Number 11-6029 December 30, 2011 CROUI1tD ENGINEERING CONSULTRNTS INC. 379 Indian Road,Grand Junction,Colorado Phone(970)242-4300 Pas(970)242.4301 %xim.groundeng.com 0SIce Locations: Englewood Conutierce City Loveland Granby Gypsum Grand Junction Casper Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Purpose and Scope of Study ....................................................................................... 1 ProposedConstruction ................................................................................................ 1 SiteConditions ............................................................................................................ 1 Regional and Project Site Geology and Potential Hazards .......................................... 2 Seismic Classification .................................................................................................. 3 SubsurfaceExploration ................................................................................................ 3 LaboratoryTesting ...................................................................................................... 4 Subsurface Conditions ................................................................................................ 4 Geotechnical Considerations for Design: Proposed Canopy, South Entrance................ 5 Canopy Foundation Systems ....................................................................................... 7 Geotechnical Considerations for Design: Proposed Restrooms, East Entrance......... 11 Restroom Foundation Systems .................................................................................. 11 RestroomFloor System ............................................................................................. 12 Lateral Earth Pressures ............................................................................................. 15 Utility Lateral Installation ............................................................................................ 16 Water-Soluble Sulfates ............................................................................................. 19 SoilCorrosivity .......................................................................................................... 19 ProjectEarthwork ...................................................................................................... 22 Excavation Considerations ........................................................................................ 26 ExteriorFlatwork...........................................................................................................26 Closure ..................................................................................................................... 30 Location of Test Holes ..................................................................................... Figure 1 Logsof Test Holes ........................................................................................... Figure 2 Legend and Notes ............................................................................................ Figure 3 Swell-Consolidation Test Results..............................................................Figures 4 and 5 Summary of Laboratory Test Results ..................................................... Tables 1 and 2 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 560 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF STUDY This report presents the results of a subsurface exploration program performed by GROUND Engineering Consultants, Inc., (GROUND) for construction of restroom facilities and an entrance canopy for the Ford Amphitheater located at 580 South Frontage Road East in Vail, Colorado. Our study was conducted in general accordance with GROUND's Proposal No. 1111-1712, dated November 14, 2011. A field exploration program was conducted to obtain information on the subsurface conditions. Material samples obtained during the subsurface exploration were tested in the laboratory to provide data on the classification and engineering characteristics of the on-site soils. The results of the field exploration and laboratory testing are presented herein. This report has been prepared to summarize the data obtained and to present our conclusions and recommendations based on the proposed construction and the subsurface conditions encountered. Design parameters and a discussion of geotechnical engineering considerations related to the construction of the proposed restroom facilities and entrance canopy are included herein. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION We understand that proposed construction will include restroom facilities at the east entrance and a canopy at the south entrance. We understand the restroom facilities will be two small, plumbed, lightly loaded structures, located north and south of the east entrance gate. We understand that the canopy will need to be secured to the subsurface to resist wind loads. Grading plans were unavailable at the time of this report preparation. Based on the existing topography, material cuts and fills up to 4 feet may be necessary to facilitate proposed restroom construction. If the proposed construction differs significantly from that described above, GROUND should be notified to re-evaluate the recommendations contained herein. SITE CONDITIONS At the time of our field exploration, the project site existed as a recreation and outdoor concert facility. The existing facility consists of tiered bench and open lawn seating Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 1 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado areas, a stage area with the existing building a one story structure over a walkout basement. The surrounding area was landscaped with exotic vegetation consisting of flowers, grass and bushes. Pine trees approximately 40 to 50 feet tall surround the facilities. South of the facilities, Gore Creek runs from east to west. Underground utilities run through the property. The general topography across the site was gently to moderately sloping with slopes from 5 to 15 percent generally descending toward the southwest. Steeper slopes were associated with river banks south of the project site which cut down to Gore Creek. REGIONAL AND PROJECT SITE GEOLOGY AND POTENTIAL HAZARDS The project area is located near the northern tip of the north-trending Sawatch Range anticlinal uplift, a geologic structure that developed during the Laramide orogeny (about 40 to 80 million years ago), and east of the Colorado evaporate region and Burns Syncline. Surficial deposits at the project site are mapped as outwash gravels associated with the Pinedale Glaciation which overlie the Pennsylvanian Age Minturn Formation. Outwash from Pinedale glacial recession occurred between 15,000 to 12,000 years ago. The closest geologically young faults exhibiting movement in the last 15,000 years that are considered capable of generating large earthquakes are located in the northern section of the Williams Fork Mountains fault zone, about 20 miles north of the project site. We understand that the existing facilities lie stratigraphically higher than the 100-year flood plain, however the flooding potential of Gore Creek should be considered a potential hazard to the proposed facilities during periods of snowmelt and heavy rainfall. In our opinion, the likelihood of a flooding event impacting the Ford Amphitheater Facilities is low. Drainage should slope away from the building and construction should incorporate draining gravels to keep water away from foundations. Although rockfall, landslide, and avalanche hazards are present in the area, in our opinion, we consider the possibility of such a geologic hazard affecting the project site to be low compared to areas closer to surrounding hillsides. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 2 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado SEISMIC CLASSIFICATION Utilizing the USGS's Earthquake Ground Motion Tool v.5.1.0 and the approximate site latitude/longitude coordinates the project site is indicated to be subject to an SDs value of 0.2848 and an SD1 value of 0.068g. Compared with other regions of the Western United States, recorded earthquake frequency in the project vicinity is relatively low. In the absence of actual shear wave velocity testing/analysis or deep drilling, GROUND estimates that a Seismic Site Class D according to the 2006/2009 IBC classification (Table 1613.5.2) is applicable to the site. In the event that the owner desires to utilize Site Class C for design, according to the 2006/2009 IBC, actual downhole seismic shear wave velocity testing and/or exploration to subsurface depths of at least 100 feet, should be performed. Based on available data, we consider the likelihood of realizing a Site Class C to be low. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION The subsurface exploration for the project was conducted on November 28, 2011. A total of two (2) test holes were drilled at the project area; one at the south entrance for the proposed canopy (Test Hole 1), and one at the east entrance for the proposed restroom facilities (Test Hole 2). The test holes were drilled to depths ranging from approximately 16'/ to 50 feet below existing grades. The test holes were drilled with a track- mounted, continuous flight power auger rig to evaluate the subsurface 4 conditions as well as to retrieve soil 7. samples for laboratory testing and — - --" analysis. A GROUND engineer directed the subsurface exploration, Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 3 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado logged the test holes in the field, and prepared the soil and bedrock samples for transport to our laboratory. Samples of the subsurface materials were taken with 2-inch I.D. California-type liner sampler. The sampler was driven into the substrata with blows from a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches. This procedure is similar to the Standard Penetration Test described by ASTM Method D1586. Penetration resistance values (blows per distance driven, typically 12 inches), when properly evaluated, indicate the relative density or consistency of soils. Depths at which the samples were taken and associated penetration resistance values are shown on the test hole logs. It should be noted that it is not possible to characterize coarse gravel-, cobble- and boulder-sized materials in small diameter test holes. Therefore, those relying on this report should anticipate that coarser materials than recognized herein may be present in the soils at this site. The approximate locations of the test holes are shown on Figure 1. Logs of the exploratory test holes are presented on Figure 2. Explanatory notes and a legend are provided on Figure 3. Results from the laboratory-testing program are summarized on Table 1 and Figures 4 and 5. LABORATORY TESTING Samples retrieved from our test holes were examined and visually classified in the laboratory by the project engineer. Laboratory testing of soil samples obtained from the subject site included standard property tests, such as natural moisture contents, dry unit weights, grain size analyses, liquid and plastic limits, water-soluble sulfate contents, soil corrosivity, and swell/consolidation potentials. Laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with applicable ASTM protocols. Results from the laboratory-testing program are summarized in Tables 1 and 2. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The subsurface conditions encountered at Test Hole 1 generally consisted of approximately 9 feet of sandy gravel fill, underlain by stratified layers of sands and gravels, with scattered cobbles below 15 feet. Drilling conditions became very dense Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 4 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado below 15 feet at Test Hole 1 and practical drilling refusal occurred at a depth of 16'/2 feet. The subsurface conditions encountered at Test Hole 2 generally consisted of approximately 4 feet of sandy gravel fill, underlain by stratified layers of silty sands and sandy gravels. Scattered cobbles were encountered at Test Hole 2 between 8'/ and 17 feet, below which soft silty sands were encountered to the depth explored, approximately 50 feet. Fill The fill soils encountered consisted of fine to coarse sands with gravel, silt and scattered cobbles and possible boulders. Fill material was medium dense to very dense, moist to wet, and dark brown in color. Existing fill extents, depths, and full characterization was beyond the scope of this exploration. Variability in fill should be anticipated and may impact recommendations made in this report. Sand and Gravel Stratified layers of silty sand to sandy gravels with cobbles and possible boulders. Soils generally consisted of fine to coarse sand fractions, angular to sub-angular gravels, non-plastic, loose to very dense, moist to wet, and light brown in color. Groundwater was encountered in Test Hole 2 at 15 feet from surface grade after drilling, and 22 feet when checked 7 days later. Groundwater levels can be expected to fluctuate in response to annual and longer-term cycles of precipitation, surface drainage, land use, and the development of transient, perched water conditions. Swell-consolidation testing indicated a low potential for collapse in the on-site materials. A potential for consolidation of approximately 0.5 percent was measured against various surcharge pressures. Swell-consolidation test results are presented on Figures 4 and 5, and Table 1. GEOTECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR DESIGN: PROPOSED CANOPY SOUTH ENTRANCE (TEST HOLE 1) Various quantitative and semi-quantitative methods are used by geotechnical engineers in the Colorado Western Slope area to estimate post-construction settlement of structures, pavements, etc., as a step toward development of recommendations for Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 5 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado foundations, remedial earthworks, etc. Those typically used are based on practical engineering experience and judgment using measured values of engineering properties of the soils. The recommendations and criteria provided in this report were based on the data presented herein, and our experience in the general project area with similar structures, and our engineering judgment with regard to the applicability of the data and methods of forecasting future performance. Several engineering parameters were considered as indicators of potential future soil movements. Our recommendations were based on our judgment of "likely movement potentials," (i.e., the amount of movement likely to be realized if site drainage is generally effective, estimated to a reasonable degree of engineering certainty) as well as our assumptions about the owner's willingness to accept geotechnical risk. "Maximum possible" movement estimates necessarily will be larger than those presented herein. They also have a significantly lower likelihood of being realized in our opinion, and generally require more expensive measures to address. We encourage the owner and future prospective owners, upon receipt of this report, however, to discuss these risks and the geotechnical alternatives with us. Natural soils below approximately 9 feet of undocumented fill consisted of gravelly sand with gravels and cobbles encountered below 15 feet from surface grade. Groundwater is likely at 12 feet or shallower. Uplift from wind loads, ect., will likely be controlling, rather than bearing and we assume bearing loads will be light. If shallow foundations are to be used on existing fill material, we estimate that likely settlements up to 1'/2 inches may occur. Therefore, we recommend supporting the canopy on drilled caissons bearing in the native soils beneath the fill. Parameters for caissons are discussed below. Test Hole 1 hit refusal at 16'/2 feet below surface grade, presumably on coarse cobbles or boulders. Very dense material, such as that encountered below 15 feet, can be difficult for installation of caissons, screw-piles, and helical piers. We understand that micro-piles may be the most cost-efficient deep foundation system. Therefore, apparent settlements upon imposition of structural loads on a micro-pile system may be up to 1 inch. This system is designed and installed by a specialty supplier / contractor. We anticipate that the subsurface information provided in this report is sufficient for designs of a micro-pile system to be developed. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 6 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado CANOPY FOUNDATION SYSTEMS Shallow Caisson Foundation System Markedly varying foundation conditions were encountered in the Test Hole 1. Due to the variable, loose soils, GROUND recommends foundation supports for the proposed canopy be founded on straight-shaft piers drilled into the dense sands, gravels, cobbles. Drilled pier foundations, although possible, will be complicated due to the presence of wet, caving soils, and cobbles and boulders near the penetration zone. They may require casing, the use of slurry, and rock bits and/or coring in order to achieve penetration depths, and therefore will be time and labor intensive to construct. We anticipate, therefore, that they may not be economical for this project. Geotechnical parameters for drilled pier foundations are provided below, however. If straight-shaft caisson foundations are selected for canopy support, the following geotechnical parameters may be used for drilled pier design and installation. The construction details should be considered when preparing project documents. 1. Caissons bearing in the sands and gravels may be designed for an allowable end bearing pressure of 14,000 psf. 2. A skin friction of 450 psf should be used for the portion of the caisson below a depth of 3 feet. 3. Piers should have a minimum length of 16 feet. The sands and gravels contain numerous cobbles and likely boulders. Refusal was met by our test holes at depths typically only a few feet into the sands and gravels. Therefore, the contractor should anticipate that a rock bit may be necessary to advance the caisson holes to the necessary depths. Coring of large boulders also should be anticipated locally. Actual caisson lengths should be based on the design loads, the requirement for minimum dead load pressure, etc., as determined by the Structural Engineer, and the actual conditions encountered in the field at each caisson location during installation. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 7 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado GROUND suggests that caissons should maintain a maximum 25 to 1 length to diameter ratio. In addition, a minimum caisson diameter of 12 inches is recommended to facilitate proper cleaning and observation of the pier hole. However, the structural engineer should determine actual pier diameters, length to diameter ratios, ect. Larger diameter caisson holes may be easier to advance into the sands and gravels. 4. Caissons may be designed to resist lateral loads assuming a lateral horizontal modulus of subgrade reaction (Kh) of 83 pci in the overburden and fill soils. Skin friction and lateral resistance shallower than 3 feet should be ignored. Pier loads should include a down-drag load of 18.5 psf based on the surface area of the pier above the sands and gravels. 5. Caissons should be spaced apart at least 3 caisson diameters from center to center. At this spacing or greater, no reduction in axial capacities or horizontal soil modulus values is required. Caisson grouped more closely than 3 diameters on-center should be studied on an individual basis to determine the appropriate reductions in lateral and axial capacities 6. Groundwater was encountered at a depth of approximately 12 feet below surface grade and likely will be shallower seasonally. The sands and gravels are highly permeable and will yield large volumes of water into drilled pier excavations. Therefore, casing will be required in the pier holes to reduce water infiltration and caving. Zones of caving should not be included in load calculations and the pier length should be increased an amount equal to the vertical extent of caved material. 7. Caissons should be reinforced adequately as determined by the structural engineer. 8. Caissons holes should be properly cleaned prior to placement of concrete. 9. Based on our previous experience in the area, the installation procedure of drilled caissons can be a concern during design and construction due to the presence of groundwater and the potential for the sands and gravels to cave. Normally in these conditions, the drilling contractor utilizes casing and slurry during Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 8 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado excavation of the shaft, which may adversely affect the axial and/or lateral capacities of the completed piers. Therefore, we recommend that the drilling contractor submit a written procedure addressing the use of casing, slurry, and concrete placement prior to the commencement of construction of the drilled piers. It is important that during concrete placement the contractor maintains sufficient head on the concrete within the casing to resist lateral forces within the sidewalls of the pier excavation. A test caisson using the proposed method should be installed prior to construction. The test pier should be observed during the excavation and concrete placement and sonic echo testing should be performed to allow an evaluation of pier size uniformity and concrete consistency. 10. Concrete utilized in the piers should be a fluid mix with sufficient slump so that it will fill the void between reinforcing steel and the pier hole wall. We recommend the concrete have a minimum slump in the range of 5 to 7 inches. Concrete should be placed by an approved tremie method or other method to reduce mix segregation for caissons more than 12 inches in diameter. 11. Where water or slurry is present in the caissons' hole, including outside of a casing that will be withdrawn from the hole, the concrete placed for the pier should have sufficient slump and be placed with sufficient head maintained above groundwater levels so that the concrete is not displaced in the body of the pier by water, soil, slurry, etc., leading to effective voids in the pier. In no case should concrete be placed in more than 3 inches of water, unless placed through an approved tremie method. We recommend that the proposed tremie method be discussed during the pre-construction meeting with the project team. 12. Concrete should be placed in caissons the same day they are drilled. Failure to place concrete the day of drilling will normally result in a requirement for additional bedrock penetration. The presence of groundwater or caving soils may require that concrete be placed immediately after the pier hole drilling is completed. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 9 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado 13. The sands and gravels beneath the site is dense to very dense and relatively resistant. The pier drilling Contractor should mobilize equipment of sufficient size and operating capability to achieve the required penetration into the bedrock. If refusal is encountered in these materials, a geotechnical engineer should evaluate the conditions to establish that true refusal has been met with adequate drilling equipment. As noted above, boulders may be encountered below approximately 16 feet and may be encountered elsewhere. The drilling Contractor should be prepared to core isolated boulders. 14. Because of the complex pier installation conditions at this site, we recommend that contractors demonstrate experience with installing piers in similar conditions. Micro-pile Foundations 'Micro-piles' consist of a relatively small diameter steel casing (up to 8 inches in diameter) that is advanced into a hole made by an air-percussion drilling rig. The casing is advanced with the hole and some or all of it is left in place, so caving or water intrusion typically is not a concern. A piece of reinforcing steel then is placed in the hole and grouted into place. Typically, 50+ kips of bearing capacity can be achieved per 'micro-pile.' It may be necessary to advance micro-piles 10 feet into dense sandy gravels and cobbles to achieve capacities. 'Micro-piles' are proprietary foundation systems designed and installed by a specified contractor such as Hayward Baker of Broomfield, Colorado, based on the geotechnical data in this report. We suggest contacting Hayward Baker (303 1 469 - 1136) regarding a 'micro-pile' foundation for this project. GEOTECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR DESIGN: PROPOSED RESTROOMS, EAST ENTRANCE (TEST HOLE 2) Based upon the proposed construction and the subsurface conditions encountered in Test Hole 2, it is GROUND'S opinion that the native granular on-site materials are suitable to support the proposed restroom structures on a shallow foundation system such as spread footings or a mat foundation. Natural soils below approximately 3'/ feet of undocumented fill consisted of sand with scattered gravels. The test hole was located at the northern restroom structure, fill depths at the southern structure may vary. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 10 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado RESTROOM FOUNDATION SYSTEMS The following recommendations should be followed for a shallow foundation system: 1) Footings bearing on native sands and gravels can be designed for an allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf for footings up to 4 feet in width. Based on this allowable bearing capacity, we anticipate post-construction settlements to be on the order of 1 inch. Based on the conditions encountered in the test hole, footings likely will bear at depths of 4 to 5 feet below surface levels. 2) All existing fill should be removed from below footers and footing grade lowered to bear on native sands and gravels. Footing grade can be re-established by excavating the existing fill and replacing with properly compacted on-site soils. If a deeper section of fill is encountered, the owner may prefer a higher risk alternative to flip / scarify 12 inches under footings. Footings bearing on 12 inches of properly compacted on-site soils can be designed for an allowable soil bearing pressure of 1,500 psf for footings up to 4 feet in width, with associated post- construction settlements on the order of 1 to 1'/ inches. 3) Foundation excavation bottoms may expose loose, organic, or otherwise deleterious materials, including debris. Firm materials may be disturbed by the excavation process. All such unsuitable materials should be excavated and replaced with properly compacted fill. 4) The recommended allowable bearing pressure was based on an assumption of drained conditions. If foundation materials are subjected to fluctuations in moisture content, the effective bearing capacity may be reduced, and larger post- construction movements than those estimated above may result. 5) Spread footings should have a minimum footing dimension of 16 inches for continuous footings and 24 inches for isolated pads. Actual footing dimensions, however, should be determined by the structural engineer, based on the design loads. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 11 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado 6) The shallow foundation of the structure should be provided with a minimum of 4 feet of soil cover above the footing bearing elevation or the bottom of turn-down edge for frost protection. 7) Continuous footings should be reinforced top and bottom to span an unsupported length of at least 10 feet. 8) Lateral resistance of the foundations placed on the properly compacted on-site materials will be a combination of the sliding resistance on the foundation materials and passive earth pressure against the sides of the foundation. Sliding friction at the bottom of the foundation may be taken as 0.35 times the vertical dead load. 9) Compacted fill placed against the sides of the footings should be compacted in accordance with the recommendations in the Project Earthwork section of this report. 10) All footing areas should be compacted with a vibratory plate prior to placement of concrete. 11) Care should be taken when excavating to avoid disturbing the supporting materials. Hand excavation or careful backhoe soil removal may be required in excavating the last few inches. RESTROOM FLOOR SYSTEM The fill soils underlying the site commonly were loose and vulnerable to settlement. If the Owner is willing to assume the risk of slab-on-grade construction, the recommendations below are provided to reduce damage, which results from movement of the slab subgrade materials. Slab movements are directly related to the increases in moisture contents and likely will occur, although the actual amounts of movement are difficult to quantify. If slab-on-grade construction is used in accordance with the following criteria, potential for slab movement will not be eliminated, but may tend to make movements more uniform, and will reduce damage if movement does occur. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 12 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado 1) In order to reduce post-construction slab movements, GROUND recommends that the existing fill soils be excavated in their entirety from beneath the building and to at least 4 feet laterally beyond the building footprint, and the material replaced as properly moisture conditioned and compacted fill. We anticipate post construction settlement to be up to 1 inch with '/2 inch of differential settlement across the building. The owner may prefer a higher risk alternative to excavate / scarify and re- compact 12 inches under the slab. Slab settlement may be greater than 1 inch with differential settlement up to 1 inch across the structure. In general, the site soils are suitable for placement as compacted fill beneath the buildings. The fill should be placed in accordance with the recommendations in the Project Earthwork section of this report. The contractor should take care to construct a fill section of uniform depth and composition to reduce differential post-construction building, slab and flatwork movements. A differential fill beneath the building will tend to increase differential movements. 2) Exposed organics, loose, soft or otherwise unsuitable materials should be excavated and replaced with properly compacted fill. 3) Concrete slabs-on-grade should be constructed and cured in accordance with applicable industry standards and slab design specifications. 4) An allowable vertical modulus of subgrade reaction (K„) of 45 tcf may be used for design of concrete slabs bearing on a properly prepared structural fill section. 5) Floor slabs should be separated from all bearing walls and columns with expansion joints which allow unrestrained vertical movement. Joints should be observed periodically, particularly during the first several years after construction. Slab movement can cause previously free-slipping joints to bind. Measures should be taken to assure that slab isolation is maintained in order to reduce the likelihood of damage to walls and other interior improvements. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 13 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado 6) Interior partitions resting on floor slabs should be provided with slip joints so that if the slabs move, the movement cannot be transmitted to the upper structure. This detail is also important for wallboards and door frames. A slip joint which will allow at least 2 or more inches of vertical movement is recommended. If slip joints are placed at the tops of walls, in the event that the floor slabs move, it is likely that the wall will show signs of distress, especially where the floors meet the exterior wall. 7) Floor slabs should be adequately reinforced. Recommendations based on structural considerations for slab thickness, jointing, and steel reinforcement in floor slabs should be developed by the Structural Engineer. 8) Concrete slab-on-grade floors should be provided with properly designed and constructed control joints. ACI, AASHTO and other industry groups provide guidelines for proper design and construction of concrete slabs-on-grade, and associated jointing. The design and construction of such joints should account for cracking resulting from concrete shrinkage, curling, tension and applied loads, as well as other factors related to the proposed slab use. Joint layout based on slab design may require more frequent, additional or deeper joints than typical industry minimums, and should reflect the configuration and proposed use of the slab. Particular attention in slab joint design should be given to areas where slabs exhibit interior corners or curves, e.g., at column block-outs or reentrant corners, and slabs with high length to width ratios, significant slopes, thickness transitions, high traffic loads, or other unique features. The improper placement or construction of control joints will increase the potential for slab cracking. 9) All plumbing lines should be carefully tested before operation. Where plumbing lines enter through the floor, a positive bond break should be provided. Flexible connections allowing 2 or more inches of vertical movement or more should be provided for slab-bearing mechanical equipment. 10) GROUND recommends placement of a properly compacted layer of free-draining gravel, 4 or more inches in thickness, beneath the slabs. This layer will help distribute floor slab loadings, ease construction, reduce capillary moisture rise and aid in drainage. The free-draining gravel should contain less than 5 percent Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 14 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado material passing the No. 200 Sieve and more than 50 percent retained on the No. 4 Sieve. The capillary break and the drainage space provided by the gravel layer also may reduce the potential for excessive water vapor fluxes from the slab after construction as mix water is released from the concrete. We understand, however, that professional experience and opinion differ with regard to inclusion of a free-draining gravel layer beneath slab-on-grade floors. If these issues are understood by the owner and appropriate measures are implemented to address potential concerns including slab curling and moisture fluxes, then the gravel layer may be deleted. 11) Moisture can be introduced into the slab subgrade during construction and additional moisture will be released from the slab concrete as it cures. The capillary break and the drainage space provided by the gravel layer also may reduce the potential for excessive water vapor fluxes from the slab after construction as mix water is released from the concrete. Uneven moisture release can result in slab curling. Elevated vapor fluxes can be detrimental to the adhesion and performance of many floor coverings and may exceed various flooring manufacturers' usage criteria. The Owner and the Architect and/or Flooring Contractor should consider the performance of the slab, as well as proposed flooring products, in light of possible water vapor fluxes from the concrete slab. The influence of a moisture barrier placed beneath the slab and/or the elimination of the gravel layer could result in early distress to the slab or floor covering system. Slab movements are directly related to the increases in moisture contents to the underlying soils after construction is completed. The precautions and recommendations itemized above will not prevent the movement of floor slabs if the underlying materials are subjected to excessive moisture. However, these steps will reduce the damage if such movement occurs. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 15 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 680 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES We understand that present plans do not call for foundation walls or other earth retaining structures, however, lateral loads are requested for proposed canopy construction at the south entrance for possible wind loading. Preliminarily, we suggest that foundations can be expected to undergo only a limited amount of deflection, i.e., an "at-rest' condition, be designed to resist lateral earth pressures computed taking an equivalent fluid unit weight of 67 pcf to be characteristic of the on-site materials used as backfill. For preliminary design of cantilevered structures designed to deflect sufficiently to mobilize the full, active earth pressure condition, an equivalent fluid unit weight of 45 pcf may be taken as characteristic of the on-site materials. The 'at rest' and 'active' loads recommended above are for well-drained conditions with a horizontal upper backfill surface. The additional loading of an upward sloping backfill, hydrostatic loads if sufficient drainage is not provided, as well as loads from traffic, stockpiled materials, etc., should be included in wall design. To resist lateral loads, preliminary design may be based on sliding friction at the bottom of footings calculated as 0.35 times the vertical dead load. An allowable passive soil pressure of 330 psf per foot of embedment may be taken, as characteristic of the site soils, to a maximum of 3,300 psf. Passive resistance should be neglected in the upper 1 foot of embedment. UTILITY LATERAL INSTALLATION Pipe Support We assume water and sanitation utility lines will be included in restroom facility construction. The bearing capacity of the site soils and bedrock appeared adequate, in general, for support of the proposed utility lines. The pipe + water are less dense than the soils which will be displaced for installation. Therefore, GROUND anticipates no significant pipe settlements in these materials where properly bedded. Excavation bottoms may expose soft, loose or otherwise deleterious materials, including debris. Firm materials may be disturbed by the excavation process. All such unsuitable materials should be excavated and replaced with properly compacted fill. Areas allowed Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 16 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado to pond water will require excavation and replacement with properly compacted fill. The contractor should take particular care to ensure adequate support near pipe joints which are less tolerant of extensional strains. Where thrust blocks are needed, they may be designed for an allowable passive soil pressure of 330 psf per foot of embedment may be used, to a maximum of 3,300 psf. Sliding friction at the bottom of thrust blocks may be taken as 0.35 times the vertical dead load. Trench Backfilling Some settlement of compacted soil trench backfill materials should be anticipated, even where all the backfill is placed and compacted correctly. Typical settlements are on the order of 1 to 2 percent of fill thickness. However, the need to compact to the lowest portion of the backfill must be balanced against the need to protect the pipe from damage from the compaction process. Some thickness of backfill may need to be placed at compaction levels lower than recommended or specified (or smaller compaction equipment used together with thinner lifts) to avoid damaging the pipe. Protecting the pipe in this manner can result in somewhat greater surface settlements. Therefore, although other alternatives may be available as well, we offer the recommendations below to reduce surface settlements. Controlled Low Strength Material Because of these limitations, we recommend backfilling the entire depth of the trench (both bedding and common backfill zones) with "controlled low strength material" (CLSM), i.e., a lean, sand-cement slurry, "flowable fill," or similar material along all trench alignment reaches with low tolerances for surface settlements. We recommend that CLSM used as pipe bedding and trench backfill exhibit a 28-day unconfined compressive strength between 50 to 200 psi so that re-excavation is not unusually difficult. Placement of the CLSM in several lifts or other measures likely will be necessary to avoid 'floating' the pipe. Measures also should be taken to maintain pipe alignment during CLSM placement. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 17 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado Compacted Soil Backfillinp Where compacted soil backfilling is employed, using the site soils or similar materials as backfill, the risk of backfill settlements entailed in the selection of this higher risk alternative must be anticipated and accepted by the owner. We anticipate that the on-site soils excavated from trenches will be suitable, in general, for use as common trench backfill within the above-described limitations. Backfill soils should be free of vegetation, organic debris and other deleterious materials. Fragments of rock, cobbles, and inert construction debris (e.g., concrete or asphalt) coarser than 6 inches in maximum dimension should not be incorporated into trench backfills. Refer to the Project Earthwork section of this report should a proposed import material be required. Soils placed for compaction as trench backfill should be conditioned to a relatively uniform moisture content, placed and compacted in accordance with the recommendations in the Project Earthwork section of this report within the project boundaries. Any utility backfill testing within the municipal jurisdiction should be performed in accordance with the latest construction standards for that municipality. Pipe Bedding Pipe bedding materials, placement and compaction should meet the specifications of the pipe manufacturer and applicable municipal standards. Bedding should be brought up uniformly on both sides of the pipe to reduce differential loadings. As discussed above, we recommend the use of CLSM or similar material in lieu of granular bedding and compacted soil backfill where the tolerance for surface settlement is low. (Placement of CLSM as bedding to at least 12 inches above the pipe can protect the pipe and assist construction of a well-compacted conventional backfill, although possibly at an increased cost relative to the use of conventional bedding.) If a granular bedding material is specified, GROUND recommends that with regard to potential migration of fines into the pipe bedding, design and installation follow ASTM D2321. If the granular bedding does not meet filter criteria for the enclosing soils, then non-woven filter fabric (e.g., Mirafi® 140N, or the equivalent) should be placed around the bedding to reduce migration of fines into the bedding which can result in severe, local surface settlements. Where this protection is not provided, settlements can develop/continue several months or years after completion of the project. In addition, clay or concrete cut-off walls should be installed to interrupt the granular bedding section Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 18 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado to reduce the rates and volumes of water transmitted along the sewer alignment which can contribute to migration of fines. If granular bedding is specified, the contractor should not anticipate that significant volumes of on-site soils will be suitable for that use. Materials proposed for use as pipe bedding should be tested by a geotechnical engineer for suitability prior to use. Imported materials should be tested and approved by a geotechnical engineer prior to transport to the site. WATER-SOLUBLE SULFATES The concentrations of water-soluble sulfates measured in selected a soil sample obtained from the test holes was approximately 0.01 to 0.02 percent. (See Table 2.) Such concentrations of water-soluble sulfates represent a negligible degree of sulfate attack on concrete exposed to these materials. Degrees of attack are based on the scale of negligible, moderate, severe, and very severe as described in the "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures," published by the Portland Cement Association (PCA). Based on these data, GROUND makes no recommendation for use of a special sulfate- resistant cement in project concrete. SOIL CORROSIVITY The degree of risk for corrosion of metals in contact with soils commonly is considered to be in two categories: corrosion in undisturbed soils and corrosion in disturbed soils. The potential for corrosion in undisturbed soil is generally low, regardless of soil types and conditions, because it is limited by the amount of oxygen that is available to create an electrolytic cell. In disturbed soils, the potential for corrosion typically is higher, but is strongly affected by soil conditions for a variety of reasons but primarily soil chemistry. A corrosivity analysis was performed to provide a general assessment of the potential for corrosion of ferrous metals installed in contact with earth materials at the site, based on the conditions encountered at the time of GROUND's evaluation. Soil chemistry and physical property data including pH, oxidation-reduction (redox) potential, sulfides, and moisture content were obtained. Test results are summarized on Table 2. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 19 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado Reduction-Oxidation testing indicated red-ox potentials of -14 to -29 millivolts. A low potential typically creates a more corrosive environment. Sulfide Reactivity testing indicated results of "positive" in the soils tested. The presence of sulfides in the alignment soils suggests a more corrosive environment. Soil Resistivity In order to assess the "worst case" for mitigation planning, samples of materials retrieved from the test holes were tested after being saturated with water, rather than in the field. Resistivity also varies inversely with temperature. Therefore, the laboratory measurements were made at a controlled temperature. Measurements of electrical resistivity indicated a value of 7,969 and 8,679 ohm- centimeters in samples of retrieved soil. pH Where pH is less than 4.0, soil serves as an electrolyte; the pH range of about 6.5 to 7.5 indicates soil conditions that are optimum for sulfate reduction. In the pH range above 8.5, soils are generally high in dissolved salts, yielding a low soil resistivity. Test results indicated a pH value of approximately 7.2 to 7.6. The American Water Works Association (AWWA) has developed a point system scale used to predict corrosivity. The scale is intended for protection of ductile iron pipe but is valuable for project steel selection. When the scale equals 10 points or higher, protective measures for ductile iron pipe are recommended. The AWWA scale is presented below. The soil characteristics refer to the conditions at and above pipe installation depth. Table A.1 Soil-Test Evaluation Soil Characteristic/Value Points Resistivity <1,500 ohm-cm ............................................................................................. 10 1,500 to 1,800 ohm-cm ................................................................................ 8 1,800 to 2,100 ohm-cm ................................................................................. 5 2,100 to 2,500 ohm-cm .................................................................................. 2 2,500 to 3,000 ohm-cm .................................................................................. 1 >3,000 ohm-cm ................................................................................... 0 Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 20 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado pH 0 to 2.0 ............................................................................................................ 5 2.0 to 4.0 ......................................................................................................... 3 4.0 to 6.5 ......................................................................................................... 0 6.5 to 7.5 ......................................................................................................... 0 ' 7.5 to 8.5 ......................................................................................................... 0 >8.5 .......................................................................................................... 3 Redox Potential < 0 (negative values) ....................................................................................... 5 0 to +50 mV .................................................................................................... 4 +50 to +100 mV ............................................................................................... 3Y: > +100 mV ............................................................................................... 0 Sulfide Content Positive ............................................................................................................ 3'/z Trace ................................................................................................................ 2 Negative ........................................................................................................... 0 Moisture Poor drainage, continuously wet ...................................................................... 2 Fair drainage, generally moist ....................................................................... 1 Good drainage, generally dry ........................................................................ 0 If sulfides are present and low or negative redox-potential results (< 50 mV) are obtained, add three points for this range. We anticipate that drainage at the site after construction will be good. Even with effective drainage, based on the values obtained for the soil parameters (11'/2 points), the site soils appear to comprise a high risk environment for metals with regard to corrosion. Corrosive conditions can be addressed by use of materials not vulnerable to corrosion, heavier gauge materials with longer design lives, polyethylene encasement, or cathodic protection systems. If additional information or recommendations are needed regarding soil corrosivity, GROUND recommends contacting the American Water Works Association or a corrosion engineer. It should be noted, however, that changes to the site conditions during construction, such as the import of other soils, or the intended or unintended introduction of off-site water, may alter corrosion potentials significantly. Job No, 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 21 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado PROJECT EARTHWORK The following information is for private improvements; public roadways or utilities should be constructed in accordance with applicable municipal / agency standards. General Considerations Site grading should be performed as early as possible in the construction sequence to allow settlement of fills and surcharged ground to be realized to the greatest extent prior to subsequent construction. Prior to earthwork construction, toposil, vegetation and other deleterious materials should be removed and disposed of off-site. Relic underground utilities should be abandoned in accordance with applicable regulations, removed as necessary, and properly capped. Topsoil present on-site should not be incorporated into ordinary fills. Instead, topsoil should be stockpiled during initial grading operations for placement in areas to be landscaped or for other approved uses. Existing Fill Soils In general, fill material consisted of sandy gravels with scattered cobbles. Actual contents and composition of the fill materials are not known; therefore, some of the excavated man-made fill materials may not be suitable for replacement as backfill. A geotechnical engineer should be retained during site excavations to observe the excavated fill materials and provide recommendations for its suitability for reuse. Use of Existing Native Soils Overburden soils that are free of trash, organic material, construction debris, and other deleterious materials are suitable, in general, for placement as compacted fill. Organic materials should not be incorporated into project fills. Fragments of rock, cobbles, and inert construction debris (e.g., concrete or asphalt) larger than 3 inches in maximum dimension will require special handling and/or placement to be incorporated into project fills. In general, such materials should be placed as deeply as possible in the project fills. A Geotechnical Engineer should be consulted regarding appropriate recommendations for usage of such materials on a case-by-case basis when such materials have been identified during earthwork. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 22 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 560 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado Standard recommendations that likely will be generally applicable can be found in Section 203 of the current CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Imported Fill Materials If it is necessary to import material to the site, the imported soils should be free of organic material, and other deleterious materials. Imported material should consist of relatively impervious soils that have less than 40 percent passing the No. 200 Sieve and should have a plasticity index of less than 10. Representative samples of the materials proposed for import should be tested and approved prior to transport to the site. Fill Platform Preparation Prior to filling, the top 8 to 12 inches of in-place materials on which fill soils will be placed should be scarified, moisture conditioned and properly compacted in accordance with the recommendations below to provide a uniform base for fill placement. Where over-excavation is performed, these measures for subgrade preparation apply to the subgrade surface at the base of the subgrade depth. If surfaces to receive fill expose loose, wet, soft or otherwise deleterious material, additional material should be excavated, or other measures taken to establish a firm platform for filling. The surfaces to receive fill must be effectively stable prior to placement of fill. Fill Placement Fill materials should be thoroughly mixed to achieve a uniform moisture content, placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness, and properly compacted. Soils that classify as GP, GW, GM, GC, SP, SW, SM, or SC in accordance with the USCS classification system (granular materials) should be compacted to 95 or more percent of the maximum modified Proctor dry density at moisture contents within 2 percent of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557. Soils that classify as ML, MH, CL or CH should be compacted to 100 percent or more of the maximum dry density at moisture contents within 2 percent of the optimum as determined by ASTM D698, the "standard Proctor." Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 23 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado No fill materials should be placed, worked, rolled while they are frozen, thawing, or during poor/inclement weather conditions. Care should be taken with regard to achieving and maintaining proper moisture contents during placement and compaction. Materials that are not properly moisture conditioned may exhibit significant pumping, rutting, and deflection at moisture contents near optimum and above. The contractor should be prepared to handle soils of this type, including the use of chemical stabilization, if necessary. Compaction areas should be kept separate, and no lift should be covered by another until relative compaction and moisture content within the recommended ranges are obtained. Use of Squeegee Relatively uniformly graded fine gravel or coarse sand, i.e., "squeegee," or similar materials commonly are proposed for backfilling foundation excavations, utility trenches (excluding approved pipe bedding), and other areas where employing compaction equipment is difficult. In general, GROUND does not recommend this procedure for the following reasons: Although commonly considered "self compacting," uniformly graded granular materials require densification after placement, typically by vibration. The equipment to density these materials is not available on many job-sites. Even when properly densified, uniformly graded granular materials are permeable and allow water to reach and collect in the lower portions of the excavations backfilled with those materials. This leads to wetting of the underlying soils and resultant potential loss of bearing support as well as increased local heave or settlement. GROUND recommends that wherever possible, excavations be backfilled with approved, on-site soils placed as properly compacted fill. Where this is not feasible, use of "Controlled Low Strength Material" (CLSM), i.e., a lean, sand-cement slurry ("flowable fill') or a similar material for backfilling should be considered. Where "squeegee" or similar materials are proposed for use by the contractor, the design team should be notified by means of a Request for Information (RFI), so that the Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 24 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado proposed use can be considered on a case-by-case basis. Where "squeegee" meets the project requirements for pipe bedding material, however, it is acceptable for that use. Settlements Settlements will occur in filled ground, typically on the order of 1 to 2 percent of the fill depth. If fill placement is performed properly and is tightly controlled, in GROUND's experience the majority (on the order of 60 to 80 percent) of that settlement will typically take place during earthwork construction, provided the contractor achieves the compaction levels recommended herein. The remaining potential settlements likely will take several months or longer to be realized, and may be exacerbated if these fills are subjected to changes in moisture content. Cut and Filled Slopes Permanent site slopes supported by on-site soils up to 6 feet in height may be constructed no steeper than 2'/2:1 (horizontal : vertical). Minor raveling or surficial sloughing should be anticipated on slopes cut at this angle until vegetation is well re-established. Surface drainage should be designed to direct water away from slope faces. Soft and Wet Subgrade Conditions The following recommendations should be considered where soft, wet, and unstable subgrade conditions are encountered: 1. In areas where apparently stable conditions are found, the subgrade should be proof-rolled or evaluated by a geotechnical engineer. 2. Pockets of weak or pumping soils should be excavated to a depth of 2 or more feet, as necessary, below retaining wall bottom and to at least 2 feet beyond its lateral limits. The excavated soil should be replaced with open graded material such as 1'/2-inch crushed rock up to foundation grade. A geotextile separator fabric should be placed between the crushed rock and native soils, as needed. The use of recycled concrete aggregate may be a cost effective alternative in this application. 3. In cases where placement of coarse aggregate fill does not result in stable conditions, it will be necessary to place a woven geotextile, Mirafi® HP370, a geogrid product, or equivalent fabric below the coarse aggregate fill. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 25 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado 4. The surface of the subgrade should be leveled prior to geosynthetic reinforcement placement. Very weak or pumping soils should be excavated and replaced with granular fill or road base for best performance. The geosynthetic reinforcement should be placed directly on the prepared subgrade. Placement should be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Rolls should be overlapped in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Geosynthetic reinforcement will be disturbed under the wheel loads of heavy construction vehicles, especially track type vehicles; therefore no vehicle traffic should be allowed over the geosynthetic reinforcement until 8 or more inches of soil has been placed over. 7. Fill materials should be thoroughly mixed to achieve a uniform moisture content, placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness, and properly compacted. (For very weak subgrades, an 18 to 24 inch "pioneer' or "first" lift may be required to stabilize the subgrade.) EXCAVATION CONSIDERATIONS The test holes for the subsurface exploration were advanced to the depths indicated on the test hole logs by means of continuous flight auger equipment. We anticipate no unusual excavation difficulties in these materials with conventional, medium to heavy- duty excavating equipment in good working condition. We recommend that temporary, un-shored excavation slopes up to 6 feet in height be cut no steeper than 1.5 (H) to 1(V) in the site soils in the absence of seepage. Some surficial sloughing may occur on slope faces cut at this angle. Local conditions encountered during construction, such as loose, dry sand, or soft or wet materials, or seepage will require flatter slopes. Stockpiling of materials should not be permitted closer to the tops of temporary slopes than 5 feet or a distance equal to the depth of the excavation, which-ever is greater. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 26 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado The risk of slope instability will be significantly increased in areas of seepage along the excavation slopes. If seepage is encountered, the slopes should be re-evaluated by a geotechnical engineer. Should site constraints prohibit the use of the recommended slope angles, then temporary shoring should be used. A registered engineer should design actual shoring system(s) for the Contractor. Good surface drainage should be provided around temporary excavation slopes to direct surface runoff away from the slope faces. A properly designed drainage swale should be provided at the top of the excavations. In no case should water be allowed to pond at the site. Slopes should also be protected against erosion. Erosion along the slopes will result in sloughing and could lead to a slope failure. EXTERIOR FLATWORK Proper design, drainage, construction and maintenance of the areas between individual buildings and parking/driveway areas are critical to the satisfactory performance of the project. Sidewalks, entranceway slabs and roofs, fountains, raised planters and other highly visible improvements commonly are installed within these zones, and distress in or near these improvements is common. Commonly, proper soil preparation in these areas receives little attention during overlot construction because they fall between the building and pavement areas which typically are built with heavy equipment. Subsequent landscaping and hardscape installation often is performed by multiple sub- contractors with light or hand equipment, and necessary over-excavation and soil processing is not performed. Consequently, subgrade soil conditions commonly deviate significantly from recommended ranges. Therefore, GROUND recommends that the contractor take particular care with regard to proper subgrade preparation in the immediate building exterior. Exterior flatwork and other hardscaping placed on the soils encountered at the site will experience post-construction movements as soil moisture contents increase after construction. Settlement of the local earth materials should be anticipated and distress to rigid hardscaping likely will result. The following measures will help to reduce damages to these improvements: Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 27 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado 1) Project sidewalks, paved entryways and patios, masonry planters and short, decorative walls, and other hardscaping should be underlain by a section of properly moisture-conditioned and compacted fill soils at least 12 inches in thickness, constructed in accordance with the recommendations in the Project Earthwork section of this report. Greater depths of moisture-density conditioning of the subgrade soils, e.g., 5 feet such as for a slab-on-grade floor, can reduce post-construction movements, but movements of some magnitude still will be realized. 2) Prior to placement of flatwork, a proof roll should be performed to identify areas that exhibit instability and deflection. The deleterious soils in these areas should be removed and replaced with properly compacted fill. The contractor should take care to achieve and maintain compaction behind curbs to reduce differential sidewalk settlements. As in the case of pavements, passing a proof roll is an additional requirement to placing and compacting the subgrade fill soils within the recommended ranges of moisture content and relative compaction presented in the Project Earthwork section of this report and subgrade stabilization may be cost-effective for achieving a stable platform. 3) Flatwork should be provided with control joints extending to an effective depth and spaced no more than 10 feet apart, both ways. Narrow flatwork, such as sidewalks, likely will require more closely spaced joints. 4) In no case should exterior flatwork extend to under any portion of the building where there is less than 2 inches of clearance between the flatwork and any element of the building. Exterior flatwork in contact with brick, rock facades, or any other element of the building can cause damage to the structure if the flatwork experiences movements. Frost and Ice Considerations Nearly all soils other than relatively coarse, clean, granular materials are susceptible to loss of density if allowed to become saturated and exposed to freezing temperatures and repeated freeze —thaw cycling. The formation of ice in the underlying soils can result in heaving of pavements, flatwork and other hardscaping ("ice jacking") in sustained cold weather up to 2 inches or more. This heaving can develop relatively rapidly. A portion of this movement typically is recovered Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 28 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail, Colorado when the soils thaw, but due to loss of soil density, some degree of displacement will remain. This can result even where the subgrade soils were prepared properly. Where hardscape movements are a design concern, e.g., at doorways, replacement of the subgrade soils with 3 or more feet of clean, coarse sand or gravel should be considered or supporting the element on foundations similar to the building and spanning over a void. Detailed recommendations in this regard can be provided upon request. It should be noted that where such open graded granular soils are placed, water can infiltrate and accumulate in the subsurface relatively easily, which can lead to increased settlement or heave from factors unrelated to ice formation. The relative risks from these soil conditions should be taken into consideration where ice jacking is a concern. GROUND will be available to discuss these concerns upon request. Concrete Scaling Climatic conditions in the project area including relatively low humidity, large temperature changes and repeated freeze — thaw cycles, make it likely that project sidewalks and other exterior concrete will experience surficial scaling or spelling. The likelihood of concrete scaling can be increased by poor workmanship during construction, such as 'over-finishing' the surfaces. In addition, the use of de-icing salts on exterior concrete flatwork, particularly during the first winter after construction, will increase the likelihood of scaling. Even use of de-icing salts on nearby roadways, from where vehicle traffic can transfer them to newly placed concrete, can be sufficient to induce scaling. Typical quality control / quality assurance tests that are performed during construction for concrete strength, air content, etc., do not provide information with regard to the properties and conditions that give rise to scaling. We understand that some municipalities require removal and replacement of concrete that exhibits scaling, even if the material was within specification and placed correctly. The contractor should be aware of the local requirements and be prepared to take measures to reduce the potential for scaling and/or replace concrete that scales. In GROUND's experience the measures below can be beneficial for reducing the likelihood of concrete scaling. It must be understood, however, that because of the other factors involved, including weather conditions and workmanship, surface damage to concrete can develop, even where all of these measures were followed. The mix design criteria should be coordinated with other project requirements including the criteria for sulfate resistance presented in the Water-Soluble Sulfates section of this report. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 29 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado 1) Maintaining a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45 by weight for exterior concrete mixes. 2) Include Type F fly ash in exterior concrete mixes as 20 percent of the cementitious material. 3) Specify a minimum, 28-day, compressive strength of 4,500 psi for all exterior concrete. 4) Include 'fibermesh' in the concrete mix may be beneficial for reducing surficial scaling. 5) Cure the concrete effectively at uniform temperature and humidity. This commonly will require fogging, blanketing and/or tenting, depending on the weather conditions. As long as 3 to 4 weeks of curing may be required, and possibly more. 6) Avoid placement of concrete during cold weather so that it is exposed to freeze- thaw cycling before it is fully cured. 7) Avoid the use of de-icing salts on given reaches of flatwork through the first winter after construction. We understand that commonly it may not be practical to implement some of these measures for reducing scaling due to safety considerations, project scheduling, etc. In such cases, additional costs for flatwork maintenance or reconstruction should be incorporated into project budgets. CLOSURE Geofechnica/ Review The author of this report should be retained to review project plans and specifications to evaluate whether they comply with the intent of the recommendations in this report. The review should be requested in writing. The geotechnical recommendations presented in this report are contingent upon observation and testing of project earthworks by representatives of GROUND. If another geotechnical consultant is selected to provide materials testing, then that consultant must assume all responsibility for the geotechnical aspects of the project by concurring Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 30 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado in writing with the recommendations in this report, or by providing alternative recommendations. Materials Testing The Vail Valley Foundation should consider retaining a geotechnical engineer to perform materials testing during construction. The performance of such testing or lack thereof, in no way alleviates the burden of the contractor or subcontractor from constructing in a manner that conforms to applicable project documents and industry standards. The contractor or pertinent subcontractor is ultimately responsible for managing the quality of their work; furthermore, testing by the geotechnical engineer does not preclude the contractor from obtaining or providing whatever services they deem necessary to complete the project in accordance with applicable documents. Limitations This report has been prepared for The Vail Valley Foundation as it pertains to the proposed improvements to Ford Amphitheater as described herein. It may not contain sufficient information for other parties or other purposes. The owner or any prospective buyer relying upon this report must be made aware of and must agree to the terms, conditions, and liability limitations outlined in the proposal. In addition, GROUND has assumed that project construction will commence by Summer 2012. Any changes in project plans or schedule should be brought to the attention of the Geotechnical Engineer, in order that the geotechnical recommendations may be re- evaluated and, as necessary, modified. The geotechnical conclusions and recommendations in this report relied upon subsurface exploration at a limited number of exploration points, as shown in Figure 1, as well as the means and methods described herein. Subsurface conditions were interpolated between and extrapolated beyond these locations. It is not possible to guarantee the subsurface conditions are as indicated in this report. Actual conditions exposed during construction may differ from those encountered during site exploration. If during construction, surface, soil, bedrock, or groundwater conditions appear to be at variance with those described herein, the geotechnical engineer should be advised at once, so that re-evaluation of the recommendations may be made in a timely manner. In addition, a contractor who relies upon this report for development of his scope of work or cost estimates may find the geotechnical information in this report to be inadequate for his purposes or find the geotechnical conditions described herein to be at variance with Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 31 of 32 Ford Amphitheater Improvements 580 South Frontage Road East Vail,Colorado his experience in the greater project area. The contractor is responsible for obtaining the additional geotechnical information that is necessary to develop his workscope and cost estimates with sufficient precision. This includes current depths to groundwater, etc. The materials present on-site are stable at their natural moisture content, but may change volume or lose bearing capacity or stability with changes in moisture content. Performance of the proposed park structure and pedestrian bridge will depend on implementation of the recommendations in this report and on proper maintenance after construction is completed. Because water is a significant cause of volume change in soils and rock, allowing moisture infiltration may result in movements, some of which will exceed estimates provided herein and should therefore be expected by the owner. This report was prepared in accordance with generally accepted soil and foundation engineering practice in the project area at the date of preparation. GROUND makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, as to the professional data, opinions or recommendations contained herein. Because of numerous considerations that are beyond GROUND's control, the economic or technical performance of the project cannot be guaranteed in any respect. GROUND appreciates the opportunity to complete this portion of the project and welcomes the opportunity to provide the Owner with a cost proposal for construction observation and materials testing prior to construction commencement. Sincerely, GROUND Engineering Consultants, Inc. 0 LIC ., 45426 s 12 3o1�f' Scott W. Richards, P.E. *k Reviewed by Brian H. Reck, P.G., C.E.G. Job No. 11-6029 Ground Engineering Consultants, Inc. Page 32 of 32 :w w 1 • 1 . LW JA f� • 1 � i I �Y• w Test Hole Test Hole 1 2 0 22/12 0 30/4 12/12 20/5 17/12 10/12 7/12 7 9/12 1 41517 23112 0 46/12 22/12 20 N N w i L 2/2/2 Q- N 30 40 50 GROUND ENGINEERING CONSULTRNTS LOGS OF TEST HOLES JOB NO.: 11-6029 FIGURE: 2 CADFILE NAME: 6029LOG.DWG LEGEND: Fill:Sand, gravels, and scattered cobbles, loose to dense, moist to very moist, and dark brown in color. Sand: Silty, gravelly,fine to coarse sand fractions, non-plastic, loose,wet, and brown in color. ® Gravel: Sandy, scattered cobbles and possible boulders, medium dense to very dense, non-plastic, moist to wet, and brown in color. k] Drive sample, 2-Inch I.D. California liner sample F Drive sample, 1-3/8 Inch I.D. standard sample 23/12 Drive sample blow count, indicates 23 blows of a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches were required to drive the sampler 12 inches. 20/25/30 Drive sample blow count, indicates 20, 25, and 30 blows of a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches were required to drive the sampler 18 inches. 0 — Depth to water level and number of days after drilling that measurement was taken. Rig Refusal NOTES: 1) Test holes were drilled on 11/28/11 with 4-inch diameter continuous flight power augers. 2) Locations of the test holes were measured approximately by pacing from features shown on the site plan provided. 3) Elevations of the test holes were not measured and the logs of the test holes are drawn to depth. 4) The test hole locations and elevations should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used. 5) The lines between materials shown on the test hale logs represent the approximate boundaries between material types and the transitions may be gradual. 6) Groundwater level reading shown on the log was made at the time and under the conditions indicated. Fluctuations in the water level may occur with time. 7) The material descriptions on this legend are for general classification purposes only. See the full text of this report for descriptions of the site materials and related recommendations. GROUND ENGINEERING CONSULTRNTS LEGEND AND NOTES JOB NO.: 11-6029 FIGURE: 3 CADFILE NAME: 6029LEG.DWG 4 3 7TT Consolidation with Constant Pressure 2 Upon Wetting 1 JJ W m 0 Z O 1 F- Q 0 J w U 2 U 3 4 6 0.1 1.0 10 100 APPLIED PRESSURE-ksf Moisture Content = 19.9 percent Dry Unit Weight = 103.0 pcf Sample of: Silty Sand From: Test Hole 2 at 5 ft GROUND ENGINEERING CONSULTRNTS SWELL-CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS JOB NO.: 11-6029 FIGURE: 4 CADFILE NAME:6029SWL01.DWG 4 3 Consolidation with Constant Pressure 2 z Upon Wetting 1 J W 0 0 0 Z O 1 F — J O 2 U 3 4 5 0.1 1.0 10 100 APPLIED PRESSURE-ksf Moisture Content = 16.3 percent Dry Unit Weight = 112.8 pcf Sample of: Sandy Silt From: Test Hole 2 at 7.5t GROUTED ENGINEERING CONSULTRNTS SWELL-CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS JOB NO.: 11-6029 FIGURE: 5 CADFILE NAME:6029SWL02.DWG a a a m > a <n d 0 co U) m Z Y (n Co a0 > >_ N N N Fn U > LO 9 0 C O O O 0 O O Q� @ 'A (7 Q N V �i Q V v Q Q ¢ Q Q N A A U) co U) E J 7 N w w m W m d L_ rn d 0 A r Q G = o O O C F- (A O F W c 7 q A ¢ z 7t5 N a a a � E ZU1 u� Z Z c ' -° � a 0 W ~ a Z uJ � OL7 m d Z ~ m Cc QJ.E.I ` N oo rn � LU J rno z 0 LL N Cl d V V IT N z 0 aZ � w � a 0 N a w 2 0� V N Cl) a O N 3 H C M N R � Z p d w L N C (O to W (O Z 0 o 0 L r G N u o ` n 0 J d ) .0 CL \ \ � U) � > $ ) ° 0 § ( k ) 7 7 2 = eG U, e w » 0 CD -c: r-z k � - � ( w z 0 ; � ] � G e ac \ { Lo m J » + � z « o � k § x � ) b W \ £ 2 � 2 $ « $ / 0 q ( \ ƒ/ m < / / ) ) a COMcheck Software Version 3.9.2 Interior Lighting Compliance Certificate 2012 IECC Section 1: Project Information Project Type:Addition Project Title : Ford Amphitheater-Phase It Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Vail,CO Chuck Langston AEC 40801 US Hwy 6&24 Suite 214 Avon,CO 81620 970-748-8520 chuck @aec-vail.com Section 2: Interior Lighting and Power Calculation A B C D Floor Area Allowed Allowed Watts Watts 1 ft2 New service area(Dining:cafeteria/fast food) 22.3 1.4 312 Total Allowed Watts= 312 Section 3: Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule A B C D E Fixture ID :Description I Lamp 1 Wattage Per Lamp 1 Ballast Lamps/ #of Fixture (C X D) Fixture Fixtures Watt. New service area(Dining:cafeterialfast food 223 sq.ft.) Linear Fluorescent 1:A:Lensed Linear Surface:48"T8 32W:Magnetic: 3 3 96 288 LED 1:L:LED UC Strip Light:Other: 1 11 1.5 16.5 Total Proposed Watts= 305 Section 4: Requirements Checklist Lighting Wattage: C:] 1. Total proposed watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts. Allowed Wattage:312 Proposed Wattage:305 Complies:YES Mandatory Requirements: El 2. Dwelling units(complete independent living facilities)within commercial buildings are not required to comply with interior lighting requirements of this code provided that>=75 percent of the permanently installed fixtures other than low voltage lighting contain only high efficacy lamps. Lj 3. Manual Controls:Each enclosed space has manual lighting control.Remotely located manual controls are labelled for area of service and indicate on/off status. Exception(s): L] Securitylemergency areas with 24-hour operation. 0 Stairways/corridors that are means of egress. ❑ 4. Light Reduction Controls:Each space required to have a manual control also allows for reducing the connected lighting load by at least 50 percent by either controlling all luminaires,dual switching of alternate rows of luminaires,alternate luminaires,or alternate lamps, switching the middle lamp luminaires independently of other lamps,or switching each luminaire or each lamp. Project Title: Ford Amphitheater-Phase II Report date: 11/07113 Data filename:P:ICurrent Projects113084.00-Ford Amphitheater Phase MCalculations lCOMcheckt13084-Comcheck.cck Page 1 of 4 Exception(s): Only one luminaire(lamp<100 W)in space. An occupant-sensing device controls the area. F1 The area is a corridor,equipment/store rooms, restrooms,public lobby,elec./mech.room, or sleeping unit. 0 Areas that use<0.6 Watts/sq.ft.. ❑ Daylight spaces having automatic daylighting controls. F1 5. Automatic time switching controls are installed and have an override switching device.The override switching device allows for<=2 hour operation cycle within spaces—5000 sq.ft., manual operation,and is readily accessible and located where the operation of the connected lights are visible or communicated to the switch. Exception(s): Sleeping units,patient care areas;and spaces where automatic shutoff would endanger safety or security or where lighting is intended for 24-hour operation. Emergency egress lighting. Spaces where lighting is controlled with occupancy sensors. L] Malls,arcades,auditoriums,single tenant retail spaces,industrial facilities and arenas that are<=20,000 sq.ft.are permitted. exceed the 2-hour operation cycle limit when a captive key device override switch is installed. ® 6. Occupant sensors are installed in the following spaces and automatically turn lighting off within 30 minutes of all occupants leaving the space:Classrooms,conferencelmeetingltraining rooms,employee lunch and break rooms,private offices,storage/janitorial rooms, restrooms,and other spaces<=300 sq.ft.Automatic-on sensors set power on <50 percent power. Exception(s): Fl Full power automatic-on controls are permitted where manual-on operation would endanger the safety or security of the room or building occupants. [j 7. Daylight zones have either individual lighting controls independent from that of the general area lighting that are either manual or automatic and serve zones<=2,500 sq.ft.Zones under skylights more than 15 feet from the perimeter have lighting controls separate from daylight zones adjacent to vertical fenestration. Exception(s): U Contiguous daylight zones spanning no more than two orientations are allowed to be controlled by a single controlling device. C] Daylight spaces enclosed by walls or ceiling height partitions and containing two or fewer light fixtures are not required to have a separate switch for general area lighting. ❑ 8. Automatic daylight zone controls are capable of reducing power to<35 percent using continuous dimming ballasts and daylight-sensing controls OR,are capable of automatic power reduction using step-dimming multi-level switching and daylight-sensing controls having at least two control channels per zone and at least one control step in the 50-70 percent range and another<=35 percent of design power. ® 9. Medical task lighting or art/history display lighting claimed to be exempt from compliance has a control device independent of the control of the nonexempt lighting. ❑ 10.Separate control device for display/accent lighting,case lighting,task lighting,nonvisual lighting,under-shelf/cabinent lighting, lighting for sale,and demonstration lighting. Fi 11. Hotel/motel sleeping units and guest suites have control device(s)at the entry door that control all permanent luminaires and switched receptacles. ❑ 12. Exit signs 5 Watts or less per sign. FI 13.Tandem wired one-lamp and three-lamp ballasted luminaires(No single-lamp ballasts). Exception(s): Electronic high-frequency ballasts. C] Luminaires not on same switch. ❑ Recessed luminaires 10 ft.apart or surfacelpendant not continuous. L3 Luminaires on emergency circuits. Interior Lighting PASSES: ■• code. Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed lighting system has been designed to meet the 2012 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.9.2 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Chec klist. CLL'fr."� — / t If/7 !7 Name-Title ignature Date Project Title: Ford Amphitheater-Phase II Report date: 11107113 Data filename:P:1Current Projects\13084.00-Ford Amphitheater Phase IIICalculationslCOMcheck\13084-Comcheck.cck Page 2 of 4 COMcheck Software Version 3.9.2 Exterior Lighting Compliance Certificate 2012 IECC Section 1: Project Information Project Type:Addition Project Title : Ford Amphitheater-Phase II Exterior Lighting Zone: 2(Neighborhood business district) Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Vail,CO Chuck Langston AEC 40801 US Hwy 6824 Suite 214 Avon,CO 81620 970-748-8520 chuck@aec-vail.com Section 2: Exterior Lighting Area/Surface Power Calculation A B C D E F ExteriorArea/Sur€ace Quantity Allowed Tradable Allowed Proposed Watts Wattage Watts Watts 1 Unit (B x C) Entry Canopy(Entry canopy) 4800 ft2 0.25 Yes 1200 352 E Walkway(Walkway—10 feet wide) 2000 ft2 0.14 Yes 280 174 W Walkway/Handicap ramp(Walkway<10 feet wide) 60 ft of walkway length 0.7 Yes 42 50 Decorative wall(Illuminated length of facade wall or 30 ft 2.5 No 75 45 surface) Concessions Plaza(Plaza area) 1720 ft2 0.14 Yes 241 230 Concession&Ticketbox Overhang(Free 100 ft2 0.6 Yes 60 139 standinglattached sales canopy) Total Tradable Watts*= 1823 946 Total Allowed Watts= 1898 Total Allowed Supplemental Watts**= 600 *Wattage tradeoffs are only allowed between tradable areaslsurfaces. **A supplemental allowance equal to 600 watts may be applied toward compliance of both non-tradable and tradable areastsurfaces. Section 3: Exterior Lighting Fixture Schedule A B C D E Fixture ID: Description/Lamp 1 Wattage Per Lamp/Ballast Lampsl #of Fixture (C X D) Fixture Fixtures Watt. Entry Canopy(Entry canopy 4800 ft2):Tradable Wattage LED 1: ID:Wall Sconce:Other: 1 6 42 252 LED 2:S1:Step Light:Other: 1 10 10 100 E Walkway(Walkway>=10 feet wide 2000 ft2):Tradable Wattage LED 2 copy 1:S1:Step Light:Other: 1 5 10 50 LED 4:Al:Pole Light:Other: 1 2 62 124 W Walkway/Handicap ramp(Walkway<10 feet wide 60 ft of walkway length):Tradable Wattage LED 2 copy 2:S1:Step Light:Other: 1 5 10 50 Decorative wall(Illuminated length of facade wall or surface 30 ft):Non-tradable Wattage LED 6:L: LED Strip Light:Other: 1 30 1.5 45 Concessions Plaza(Plaza area 1720 ft2):Tradable Wattage LED 4 copy 1:Al:Pole Light:Other: 1 1 62 62 Project Title: Ford Amphitheater-Phase II Report date: 11/07/13 Data filename:P:1Current Projects113084.00-Ford Amphitheater Phase II1Calculations\COMcheck 113084-Com check.cck Page 3 of 4 LED 1 copy 1: ID:Wall Sconce:Other: 1 4 42 168 Concession&Ticketbox Overhang(Free standing/attached sales canopy 100 ft2):Tradable Wattage LED 9:D1:Downlight:Other: 1 9 13 117 LED 6 copy 1:L:LED Strip Light:Other: 1 15 1.5 22.5 Total Tradable Proposed Watts= 946 Section 4: Requirements Checklist Lighting Wattage: ❑ 1. Within each non-tradable area/surface,total proposed watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts.Across all tradable areas/surfaces,total proposed watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts. Compliance:Passes. Controls, Switching, and Wiring: ❑ 2. All exemption claims are associated with fixtures that have a control device independent of the control of the nonexempt lighting. ❑ 3. Lighting not designated for dusk-to-dawn operation is controlled by either a a photosensor(with time switch),or an astronomical time switch. 0 4. Lighting designated for dusk-to-dawn operation is controlled by an astronomical time switch or photosensor. Li 5. All time switches are capable of retaining programming and the time setting during loss of power for a period of at least 10 hours. Exterior Lighting Efficacy: [--1 6. All exterior building grounds luminaires that operate at greater than 100W have minimum efficacy of 60 lumen/watt. Exceptions: Lighting that has been claimed as exempt and is identified as such in Section 3 table above. Lighting that is specifically designated as required by a health or life safety statue,ordinance,or regulation. L] Emergency lighting that is automatically off during normal building operation. LJ Lighting that is controlled by motion sensor. Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement. The proposed exterior lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed lighting system has been designed to meet the 2012 IECC requirements inrrCOMcheck Version 3.9.2 and}ttojcomply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist. �i� uCij� f� c�►�§Y-a/r 4 I f�- "1-71{� Name-Title ignature Da#e Project Title: Ford Amphitheater-Phase II Report date: 11107/13 Data filename:P:ICurrent Projects113084.00-Ford Amphitheater Phase Il\Calculations lCOMcheck\l3084-Com check.cck Page 4 of 4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL — Reference attached DRAFT AIA Form A107 for General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Work restrictions. 5. Specification and drawing conventions. 6. Miscellaneous provisions. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: The Gerald R. Ford Amphitheater Remodel, Phase 2, 530 S Frontage Rd E,Vail, Colorado. 1. Architect's Project Number: 20132266.00. B. Owners: The Town of Vail, 75 S. Frontage Road, Vail, CO 81657(866) 650-9020, Operated by The Vail Valley Foundation, 90 Benchmark Road Suite 300, Avon, CO 81620, (970) 777- 2015 C. Architect: Zehren and Associates,Inc., 48 East Beaver Creek Boulevard, PO Box 1976, Avon, CO 81620, (970) 949-0257(David Baum, RA, LEED AP). D. Contractor: RA Nelson LLC,PO Drawer 5400, Avon, CO, 81620, (970) 949-5151, (Mike Cuthbertson, LEED AP, Regional Manager/Senior PM) 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and generally consists of the following: 1. Installation of various improvements as indicated at Central Betty Ford way 2. Modifications to the existing Esrey Plaza(known as the Public Plaza),to include relocation of existing landscape and installation of new landscape, installation of new steps and ADA compliant ramp, installation of new pavers and special paving areas, installation of a new Donor Plaza seating area, construction of a new stage and installation of the Ford Sculpture. 3. Construct new stone landscape walls throughout Phase 2, as indicated. SUMMARY 011000 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 4. Installation of a new tensile fabric canopy structure above the Public Plaza(known as the Public Plaza Cover). This includes construction of the foundations for the touchdown points of the structure. 5. Install new stone veneer and wall cap at newly proposed concrete planter walls and tensile structure foundations as indicated. New handrails to match existing. 6. Patch and repair stucco and repaint(interior and exterior) of existing buildings and features as necessary and required in concert with the proposed improvements and indicated in the documents. Work is generally limited to the buildings commonly referred to as the"Stage Left"and"Concessions". The canopy above the fixed seating area is excluded from this scope. a. The existing countertops at the Box Office Window located in the Stage Left Building; remove stainless steel countertops and replace with new synthetic stone countertops. b. Install Copper wall cladding with"Dirty Penny"finish below new synthetic stone countertops and as otherwise indicated. 7. Construction of a new concrete and concrete masonry point of service at the Concessions Building. a. Install synthetic stone countertops. b. Install Copper wall cladding 8. Installation of the new Ford Family Story, including foundations for the monuments. 9. Installation of the new Ford Family Sculpture, including foundations for the monument. 10. Installation of the new Building Signage and Donor Wall Signage. 11. Install new exterior lighting at both locations on the existing buildings, as well as throughout the Esrey Plaza area. B. Type of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Per an agreement with the Town of Vail, Contractor must provide pedestrian access to the Nature Center Bridge from East Betty Ford Way by November 15, 2013 and full pedestrian and vehicle access through the site by November 27, 2013. C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. D. This project will run concurrent with a separate construction project, operating under a separate agreement that will occur at both the"upper bench" and"lower bench" of Ford Park. As SUMMARY 011000 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 necessary, construction activities, including site access, will be coordinated between the two projects as to not interrupt the normal progress of either effort. 1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, including Design Guidelines. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.,Monday through Friday,unless otherwise indicated or otherwise restricted by Design Guidelines. C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet(8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. 1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon() is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. SUMMARY 011000 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 011000 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 012100-ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.6 LUMP-SUM,UNIT-COST,AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed. 1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance,multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses,tolerances,mixing wastes,normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey,measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. ALLOWANCES 012100 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Provide an allowance of$25,000.00 for winter conditions. END OF SECTION 012100 ALLOWANCES 012100 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 012300 -ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate,miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract,notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted,rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALTERNATES 012300 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 1. Alternate No.01: Replace the countertops in the existing Dressing Rooms,Men's and Women's Green Room Restrooms and in the Green Room with synthetic stone counter tops, color TBD by architect from manufacturer's full range. a. Install new stainless steel bowls and faucets to match Phase 1 specifications. 2. Alternate No. 02: Repaint the interior of the Stage Left Building, excluding the Men's and Women's public restrooms. 3. Alternate No. 03: Demo the existing tile floors at the Stage Left Building Public Restrooms. Install a new polished concrete floor to match that installed at the new East Restrooms building. 4. Alternate No. 04: West Service Building Pavers—all pavers on the upper level of Borgen Plaza will be replaced with new material to match that installed to the west of the existing stair and into the donor plaza. 5. Alternate No. 05: Cap and seal the existing sewer line at the new manhole to the north of the open space lawn. Remove the existing manhole rim located inside Esrey Plaza and prepare surface to receive new special pavers. Construct a new sewer line across the open space lawn west to Betty Ford Way, and then east along Betty Ford Way until connecting with the existing sewer. a. If Alternate No. 05 is accepted, cap and seal the existing sewer line from the GRFA to the abandoned manhole located inside Esrey Plaza. Install new sewer line to the east of Esrey Plaza, south of the ticket office to Betty Ford Way, connecting with the existing sewer. 6. Alternate No. 06: Extend parapet walls at both Stage Left and Stage Right buildings as indicated on the floor plans and exterior elevations. Relocate any building signage as necessary. 7. Alternate No. 07: Provide enhanced landscape as indicated to screen the adjacent Holy Cross electrical shelter. 8. Alternate No. 08: Central Betty Ford Way road,utility, landscape and paver improvements, as noted in the documents. END OF SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES 012300 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 012500- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data,where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information,including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. M. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary,the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days,when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail," or other forms acceptable to Architect and Owner. B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.61), "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail," or other form acceptable to Architect and Owner. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request,Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 3. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 4. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored,but not yet installed. 6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 20th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. 2. Emailed versions of Applications are also acceptable. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 1. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including,but not limited,to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 013100 -PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Coordination drawings. 2. Requests for Information(RFIs). 3. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 'Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services,including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preconstruction conference. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION(RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFL Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 6. RFI number,numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 3:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. £ Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.213 or software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 F. On receipt of Architect's action,update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. Meeting can be held via conference call if deemed more practical for Owner, Architect, and Contractor. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect,within three days of the meeting. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. B. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 0 13 100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Site condition reports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in any of the following formats: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file,where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. 3. Two paper copies. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports,payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date,unless specifically authorized by Change Order. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. b. Seasonal variations. C. Environmental control. 2. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including,but not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON(activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates,regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. C. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 013233 -PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Periodic construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 5 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. C. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction(by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format,with minimum size of 5 megapixels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration,manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. The Periodic Construction Photographs must be shared with the collaborating Architect on a weekly, basis. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. F. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum or in the allowance for construction photographs, unless photographs provided to Architect by Contractor are blurry or do not illustrate work in progress at the time photographs are submitted. 1. Three days'notice will be given,where feasible. 2. In emergency situations,take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. C. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. £ Owner's request for special publicity photographs. END OF SECTION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 013300- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,including re-submittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each re-submittal. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. Paper submittals or electronic submittals are acceptable for use on this Project. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. 1. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Re- submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.0t.A). j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 1. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810 or CSI Form 12.1A. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination(To:). 4) Source(From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor,manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number,numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows. Either electronic submittals or paper submittals are acceptable for use on this Project. 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Re- submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. £ Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor,manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 1. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. P. Transmittal number,numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. S. Remarks. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. H. Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 3. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings,not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. C. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data,unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm),but no larger than 30 by 42 inches(750 by 1067 mm). 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections,prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures. H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,that product complies with building code in effect for Project. S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 W. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including,but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file or three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for re-submittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant,mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force- resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not,what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements,whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release,revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests,inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 014200 -REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and"permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and"specified"have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. REFERENCES 014200 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. AA Aluminum Association(The) AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) AF&PA American Forest&Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers AHRI Air-Conditioning,Heating, andRefrigeration Institute, The Al Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects (The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction REFERENCES 014200 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee,Incorporated AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International,Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association APA Architectural Precast Association API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air-Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Protection Association (Formerly: American Wood Preservers'Association) AWS American Welding Society REFERENCES 014200 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association(The) BICSI BICSI,Inc. BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CEA Canadian Electricity Association CEA Consumer Electronics Association CFFA Chemical Fabrics&Film Association,Inc. CGA Compressed Gas Association CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association CISCA Ceilings&Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CPA Composite Panel Association CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CSA Canadian Standards Association CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS -International Approval Services) CSI Construction Specifications Institute(The) REFERENCES 014200 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 CSSB Cedar Shake& Shingle Bureau CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute ECA Electrical Components Association EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association,Inc. ESD ESD Association (Electrostatic Discharge Association) ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (Formerly: ITS -Intertek Testing Service NA) FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC FM Global FM Global (Formerly: FMG-FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal&Air Conditioning Contractors Association,Inc. FSA Fluid Sealing Association FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America GRl (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal GSI Geosynthetic Institute HI Hydronics Institute REFERENCES 014200 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association Division of Air-Conditioning,Heating, and Refrigeration Institute(AHRI) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood&Veneer Association HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. ICPA International Cast Polymer Association IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America,Inc. ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The ISO International Organization for Standardization ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association LGSEA Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) REFERENCES 014200 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 LPI Lightning Protection Institute MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MCA Metal Construction Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association,Inc. MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MIA Marble Institute of America MPI Master Painters Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association(The) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCTA National Cable&Telecommunications Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations REFERENCES 014200 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NOMMA National Ornamental&Miscellaneous Metals Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) NSSGA National Stone, Sand& Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo &Mosaic Association,Inc. (The) NWFA National Wood Flooring Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDI Plumbing&Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RIS Redwood Inspection Service SAE SAE International SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers SDI Steel Deck Institute REFERENCES 014200 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SDI Steel Door Institute SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD -The Society of the Plastics Industry,Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau(The) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings STI Steel Tank Institute SWI Steel Window Institute SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance TMS The Masonry Society TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. TPI Turfgrass Producers International REFERENCES 014200 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 TRI Tile Roofing Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association USAV USA Volleyball USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association WDMA Window&Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA-National Wood Window and Door Association) WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC -Woodwork Institute of California) WMMPA Wood Moulding&Millwork Producers Association WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service,Inc. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. COE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce REFERENCES 014200 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 DOD Department of Defense DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety&Health Administration PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board USDA Department of Agriculture USP U.S. Pharmacopeia USPS Postal Service E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) REFERENCES 014200 - 11 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point Available from Defense Standardization Program Available from General Services Administration Available from National Institute of Building Sciences FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. CBHF State of California,Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation CCR California Code of Regulations CDHS California Department of Health Services CDPH California Department of Public Health,Indoor Air Quality Section REFERENCES 014200 - 12 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 CPUC California Public Utilities Commission TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 REFERENCES 014200 - 13 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,whichever is more stringent. C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. As required by the Town of Vail Design Guidelines. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained,liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed,by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction,provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures". PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead or underground,unless otherwise indicated. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 1. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. At each telephone,post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. £ Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and non-tracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install sub-base and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Civil Engineering drawings. 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, re- grading,proof-rolling, compacting, and testing. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Civil Engineering drawings. D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs,pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as required by Town of Vail Code&Design Guidelines. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary,directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." 1. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion-and sedimentation-control Drawings. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully,using environmentally safe materials. G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. 1. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241;manage fire prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers,when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores,protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard,replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems,maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,unpacking,protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes,profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 017300 -EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. D. Final Property Survey: Submit two copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. EXECUTION 017300 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used,use materials that,when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. EXECUTION 017300 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered,notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. EXECUTION 017300 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement,utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys,weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor,that principal metes,bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. EXECUTION 017300 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. EXECUTION 017300 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace,patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling,breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling,repairing,refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections,where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even EXECUTION 017300 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 surface of uniform finish, color,texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch,repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. 1. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg Q. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. EXECUTION 017300 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition waste. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 044313.13 "Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer" for disposal requirements for excess stone and stone waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.3 SAMPLE FORMS END OF SECTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected(Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements,including touchup painting. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first] [and] [proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy. 1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch (215-by-280-mm)paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults,manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment,elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers, and grills. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Two paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION,AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. C. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. F. Manuals,Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy,bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered,post-type binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1l-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem,piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color,pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal,replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal,repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording,if available. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product,material,and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 017839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. C. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders,record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders,record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02220 Site Demolition 02230 Site Clearing 02300 Earthwork 02370 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02510 Water Distribution 02530 Sanitary Sewer System 02580 Electric, Communication, Conduits and Gas Systems 02630 Storm Drainage 02720 Unbound Base Course 02740 Flexible Pavement 02750 Rigid Pavement 02751 Concrete Paving Joints 07252 Concrete Paving Curing 02753 Cold Weather Concreting 02922 Topsoil GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Removal and satisfactory disposal of buildings, foundations, fences, signs, structures, pavements, traffic control devices, utilities, and other obstructions not designated or permitted to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 1.2 PERMITS A. Stormwater Discharge Permit (CDPHE) B. Construction Dewatering (CDPHE) 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS Protection: Protect all vegetation, utilities, structures, and other facilities to remain, from damage in manner acceptable to Engineer. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. PART2 PRODUCTS None PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PAVEMENTS, CURBS, GUTTER, FLATWORK A. Remove all pavements, curbs, gutter, and flatwork not designated to remain. Where existing construction is to be partially removed, saw edges to remain in place on straight line with vertical face. 3.2 BRIDGES, SEWERS, CULVERTS, DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Do not remove structures in use until arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic. Site Demolition 02220-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. For structures removed down to natural stream bottom, remove those parts outside stream to F below ground. Remove all portions within limits of new construction as necessary to accommodate new work. C. Maintain satisfactory traffic bypass at all times. 3.3 STRUCTURES Remove structures within project limits or as shown on drawings. Protect portions to remain from damage. Damage to be repaired at Contractor's expense. 3.4 UTILITIES Remove designated utility lines within project limits, properly capping or plugging existing lines to remain. 3.5 DISPOSAL Remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. 3.6 RESTORATION After removal of obstruction, fill and compact to finish grade in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION Site Demolition 02220-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing of all vegetation and debris within work limits and from borrow pits, and such other areas as required, except objects designated to remain or to be removed. Also includes preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Site Demolition: Section 02220 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 4. Topsoil: Section 02922 1.2 PERMITS A. Stormwater Discharge Permit (CDPHE) B. Construction Dewatering (CDPHE) 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS Protection: Protect trees, shrubs and planted areas to remain from damage or from unnecessary vehicular traffic, in manner acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Protect bench marks, staking, existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from damage. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. Burning is not permitted. PART 2 NONE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING A. Clear and/or grub all surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots, bushes and other protruding obstructions, not designated to remain. 3.2 DISPOSAL Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site to satisfaction of Engineer. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 02230 CLEARING Site Clearing 02230-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation and borrow pits, removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials taken from within work limits, dust control, including excavation for ditches and channels, inlet and outlet ditches for culverts and structures, all necessary shaping and sloping for the construction, preparation, processing soil to proper moisture content, and completion of all backfill, embankments, subgrade, shoulders, slopes and intersections, to required alignment, grade, and typical cross section shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Site Demolition: Section 02220 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 4. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definitions: 1. Suitable Material: Earth fill material consisting of on-site or similar non-organic sands, gravels, clays, silts and mixtures thereof with maximum size of 6". Bedrock that breaks down to specified soil types and sizes during excavation,hauling, and placement may be considered as suitable material. Rock fill material which consists predominantly of cobbles or boulder-sized pieces of blasted or broken rock with maximum size of 18". 2. Unsuitable Material: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, muck, peat, excessive expansive materials, organic silt, topsoil, frozen materials, trees, stumps, certain manmade deposits, or industrial waste, sludge or landfill, or other undesirable materials. 3. Unclassified Excavation: Any and all materials, including surface boulders, encountered during construction. Rock formations that can be removed by ripping with D-9 tractor in good repair with single tooth hydraulic ripper are considered as unclassified excavation. 4. Rock Excavation: Rock formations which cannot be excavated without blasting. Includes removal and disposal of all rock. 5. Backfill and Embankment: Embankments, including preparation of area upon which they are to be placed, dikes within or outside right-of-way. Placing and compacting Earthwork 02300-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 approved material within areas where unsuitable materials have been removed. Placing and compacting of material in holes, pits and other depressions to lines and grades shown on drawings. Use only suitable materials in construction of embankments and backfills. 6. Borrow: Backfill or embankment material which must be acquired from designated borrow areas to make up deficiencies which cannot be completed from excavation within work limits. Borrow material must be agreed to by Engineer. 7. Proof Rolling: Applying test loads over subgrade surface by means of heavy pneumatic-tired roller of specified design, to locate weak areas in subgrade. 1.2 PERMITS A. Stormwater Discharge Permit (CDPHE) B. Construction Dewatering (CDPHE) PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL Any suitable material or borrow as defined above. Free-running water shall be drained from materials before placement. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION WATER Acceptable water shall be provided at Contractor's expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION Unclassified Excavation: All excess or unsuitable excavated materials, including rock and boulders, that cannot be used in backfill and embankments, shall be placed in designated disposal areas or disposed of off site. Where shown on drawings or considered necessary, construct intercepting ditches above top of cut slopes and carry to outlets near ends of cuts. To blend intersection of cut slopes with slope of adjacent natural ground surfaces in uniform manner, shape tops of all cut slopes, except those in solid rock, for flattening and rounding in accordance with details shown on drawings. Treat earth overburden above solid rock cuts in same manner as earth cut. Engineer reserves the right to change cut slopes during progress of excavation. Scale all exposed rippable rock cuts of loose, potentially falling rock at Contractor's expense. 3.2 PROOF ROLLING Proof rolling will be required to determine whether certain areas of subgrade meet compaction and/or stable requirements. Proof roll designated areas with heavy rubber-tired roller approved by Engineer. Areas found to be weak or fail the test shall be repaired in accordance with recommendations by the Engineer. Earthwork 02300-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.3 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Adjust completed subgrade from slope or grade stakes to assure surface width conforms to typical section, dimensions, lines, and grades on drawings. Compact subgrade in accordance with compaction requirements. 3.4 EMBANKMENT AND FILL CONSTRUCTION A. Place earth fill materials for backfill or embankment in thin horizontal layers near optimum moisture content and compact as specified before next layer is placed. Use effective spreading equipment on each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As compaction of each layer progresses, continuously level and manipulate to assure uniform density. Add or remove water as necessary to obtain maximum density. Place embankment in layers not greater than 12" which have been demonstrated to meet compaction standards. Occasional cobble and boulder- sized pieces of excavated rocks with sizes from 6" to 12",may be placed in earth fill if agreed to by Engineer. Space large rocks so compaction of earth fill will meet compaction requirements. B. When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built one-half width at a time, slopes which are steeper than 4:1 measured longitudinally or at right angles to roadway shall be continuously benched over as work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be well keyed into existing slopes a minimum of 8' wide. Begin each horizontal bench at intersection of original ground and sides of previous benches. Material benched shall be excavated and recompacted along with new embankment material at Contractor's expense. C. Rock fill embankment material consists predominantly of rock 6" to 12" in diameter placed in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer provided material is carefully placed, large stones well distributed, and voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer with suitable equipment, distributing soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. Embankments consisting predominantly of rock larger than 6" in greatest dimension, shall not be constructed above an elevation 2' below finished subgrade. Balance of embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 8"in loose thickness and compacted as specified. D. Remove all sod and vegetable matter from surface upon which embankment is to be placed. Completely break up cleared surface by plowing, scarifying, or stepping a minimum of 8"to insure a bond between embankment and original ground. Recompact to specifications. E. Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankments. F. During construction maintain area in such condition that it will be well-drained at all times. G. At the end of every construction day all fill areas must be flat rolled to provide proper drainage. Earthwork 02300-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.5 BORROW Provide test pit if required by Engineer to evaluate acceptability and limits of source at Contractor's expense. If more borrow is placed than required, amount of overrun will be deducted from borrow volume. Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 10 working days in advance of need before opening borrow area. Strip all borrow pits of sod,topsoil, and unsuitable materials. Restore borrow area,grade and shape to provide proper drainage before placement of topsoil, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.7 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Thoroughly scarify surface upon which embankment is to be placed to depth of 8". B. Compact scarified materials and embankments to following %AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. 1. Landscaped area 90% 2. Roadway 95% 3. Driveways 95% 4. Parking lots 95% 5. Public roadways 95% 6. Beneath structures 100% C. Where Engineer agrees to rock fill material embankments constructed without moisture and density control, place in loose lifts up to maximum rock dimension not exceeding 12". Apply water as necessary to facilitate compaction. Route construction equipment, compactors, or both, uniformly over each lift prior to placing additional lifts. Apply sufficient compactive effort to each lift to achieve uniform, well-compacted rock fill. Distribute rocks throughout layer, spaced far enough apart to allow compaction equipment to pass between and permit cross rolling. Place, move and compact embankment materials, and apply water to facilitate compaction and prevent voids in embankment. Number of passes required will depend on available compaction equipment to achieve compactive effort agreed to by Engineer. 3.8 DUST CONTROL Contractor shall take appropriate measures to minimize adverse impacts caused by dust by watering exposed surfaces and haul roads and by implementing other measures. END OF SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK Earthwork 02300-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, grading, and installation and maintenance of riprap, stabilized construction entrances, sediment ponds, filter material, jute netting, straw bale sediment barriers, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site clearing: Section 02230 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Storm Drainage: Section 02630 4. Topsoil: Section 02921 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Gradation and Soundness of Riprap. 2. Gradation of Filter Material. 1.3 PERMITS A. Construction Dewatering (CDPHE) B. Stormwater Discharge Permit (CDPHE) PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RIPRAP Hard, dense, sound, angular rough fractured stone meeting AASHTO T 85. Excavated shot rock may be used if agreed to by the Owner's representative and the Engineer. Neither breadth nor thickness of single stone to be less than one-third its length. Nominal Size Min. Volume Min. Weight 9" 0.25 CF 30 lbs. 12" 0.5 CF 75 lbs. 18" 1.8 CF 250 lbs. 24" 4 CF 600 lbs. Size of stone and total thickness of riprap as shown on drawings. Stone well graded so voids can be filled, and at least 50%of mass equal to or larger than size called for on drawings. Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02370-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.2 FILTER MATERIAL Aggregate Filter: Conform to following gradation: Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 3" 100 3/4" 20-90 No.4 0-20 No. 200 0-3 2.3 FILTER FABRIC Manufactured especially for stability of erosion control construction. Made from polyethylene and polypropylene yarns, in accordance with following: Weight 4.0 oz/yd ASTM D1910 Thickness 15 mils ASTM D1777 Grab Strength 130 lbs. ASTM D1682 Elongation Break 62% ASTM D1682 Burst Strength 125 psi ASTM D7742 Trapezoid Tear Strength 70 lb. ASTM 2263 Water Permeability 0.02 cm/se CFMC Water Flow Rate 4.80 gal/min/ft CFMC Equivalent Opening Size 70-100 U.S. Sieve ASTM D422 2.04 EROSION LOGS Erosion logs shall be curled aspen wood excelsior with a consistent width of fibers evenly distributed throughout the log. The casing shall be seamless, photodegradable tube netting and shall have minimum dimensions as shown below, based on the diameter of the log called for in the plans. The curled aspen wood excelsior shall be fungus free, resin free and shall be free of growth or germination inhibiting substances. Nominal Dimensions of Erosion Logs Diameter Length Weight (min.) Stake Dimensions 8 inch 7-10 feet 1.6 lbs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 20 inches 12 inch 7-10 feet 2.5 lbs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 24 inches 18 inch 7-10 feet 4 lbs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 30 inches 2.5 DANDY SACK A. The Dandy SackTM inlet protection unit shall be a sewn in the U.S.A. geotextile fabric unit. B. The Dandy SackTM shall have lifting straps to allow removal of the unit and manual inspection of the storm water system C. The Dandy SackTM unit shall utilize an orange monofilament fabric that is manufactured in the U.S.A. with the following characteristics: Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02370-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 PROPERTY TEST METHOD UNITS MARV Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 kN(lbs) 1.62 (365)x 0.89 (200) Grab Tensile Elongation ASTM D 4632 % 24x 10 Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 kN (lbs) 0.44 (100) Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 kPa (psi) 3097 (450) Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 kN (lbs) 0.51 (115)x 0.33 (75) % Open Area COE - 22125-86 % 10 Apparent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 mm(US Std Sieve) 0.425 (40) Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec' 2.14 Permeability ASTM 4491 cm/sec 0.142 Water Flow Rate ASTM 4491 Vmin/n-f (gal/min/ftl) 5607 (145) Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D 4355 % 70 Color Orange' 'The color orange is a trademark of Dandy Products, Inc. 2.6 SILT FENCE A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) 90 ASTM D1682 Elongation at Failure (%) 50 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786 Puncture Strength (Ibs) 40 ASTM D751 (modified) Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf) 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40-80 US Std Sieve CW-02215 Ultraviolet Radiation Stability % 90 ASTM-G-26 B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than 1.00 pound per linear foot. C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening, or as approved. D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above wire fence providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FILTER FABRIC Place fabric over shaped surface loosely where, when large stones are placed, they will not cause stretching of fabric beyond elastic limits. Overlap joining sections 2' at edges. Secure overlapped edges to subgrade with cinch pins. If riprap is dropped, place aggregate bedding 2" thick over fabric. Place riprap in a manner that fabric will not be damaged by stretching,punching, or ripping. Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02370-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.2 RIPRAP A. Angular reasonably well-graded from smallest to maximum size specified. Stones smaller than 10% of smallest size not permitted. Control gradation of riprap by visual inspection to assure thickness of riprap conforms with drawings. B. Hand Placed: Rectangular to facilitate butt placement. Fill openings with loose, well-graded road aggregate base material. 3.3 FILTER MATERIAL Wet subgrade, reasonably shape, and compact prior to placing filter material. Filter material may be backdragged with loader bucket to a reasonably smooth surface for placement to lines and grades of drawings. 3.4 WATER BARSANTERCEPTOR TRENCHES Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1%. Discharge on existing vegetated slopes alternately to avoid erosion. 3.5 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches, and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or baling wire, not twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale. 3.6 EROSION LOGS The Contractor shall maintain the erosion logs during construction to prevent sediment from passing over or under the logs or from sediment accumulation greater than two thirds of the original exposed height of each erosion log. Stakes shall be embedded to a minimum depth of 12 inches. At the discretion of the Engineer, a shallower depth may be permitted if rock in encountered. 3.7 DANDY SACK A. Remove the grate from the catch basin. B. For Oil and Sediment Model; to install or replace absorbent,place absorbent pillow in unit, on the bottom (below-grade side) of the unit. C. Stand the grate on end. Move the top lifting straps out of the way and place the grate into the Dandy SackTM unit so that the grate is below the top straps and above the lower straps. The grate should be cradled between the upper and lower straps. D. Holding the lifting devices, insert the grate into the inlet, being careful that the grate remains in place and being careful not to damage the Dandy SackTM unit. E. Remove all accumulated sediment and debris from vicinity of unit after each storm event. Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02370-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 F. After each storm event and at regular intervals, look into the Dandy SackTM unit. If the unit is more than 1/3 full of accumulated sediment, the unit must be emptied. G. To empty the unit,using the lifting straps lift the unit out of the inlet and remove the grate. Transport the unit to an appropriate location for removal of the contents. Holding the dumping straps on the outside at the bottom of the unit, turn the unit upside down, emptying the contents. Reinstall unit as above. H. For Oil and Sediment Model; remove and replace absorbent when near saturation. L Dispose of unit and/or absorbent in accord with applicable Federal, state and local environmental laws and regulations. 3.8 CHECK DAMS Install bottom of check dam at least 6" below maximum depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6" above maximum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings. 3.9 SILT FENCE Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. END OF SECTION 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02370-5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, valves, fittings, fire hydrants, vaults, service lines, curb stops, valve boxes, pressure reducing valves,meters, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation; All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for water lines as adopted by Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: I. Valves and Valve Boxes 2. Fittings 3. Fire Hydrants 4. Vaults 5. Service Lines 6. Meters B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. Water Distribution 02510-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Certificates: Submit copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in service. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS —All materials shall conform to the local water district's specifications. 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS All ductile iron pipe and fittings used shall meet the latest AWWA Specifications. A. Pipe 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, working pressure 350 psi, minimum thickness class 52, with cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Pipe joints, push-on type utilizing rubber ring gasket, AWWA C111. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900,working pressure 200 psi,with push-on joints ASTM D1869. six inch (6"), eight inch (8") and twelve inch(12")PVC water lines shall be Class 200 dimension ratio 14 (DR 14). PVC pipe may be used only in corrosive areas and in the Edwards Metropolitan District provided the static water pressure does not exceed 170 psi. Installation of PVC pipe in corrosive areas must have prior written authorizations from the District. 3. Steel Pipe: All steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200 Standard for Steel Water Pipe-eight inches (8") and larger-and AWWA M-11 Steel Pipe Manual. Working pressure shall be 350 psi. All material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates of Structural Quality or ASTM A36 Standard Specifications for Structural Steel. For mill-type pipe, all material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. All fittings shall be fabricated from tested pipe and dye checked in accordance with AWWA C208. All steel pipe and fittings shall be prepared, primed, lined, coated, painted or wrapped as hereinafter specified: a. Exterior Surfaces — Tape coating system conforming to AWWA C209 and C214. b. Interior Surfaces— Cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C205. Water Distribution 02510-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 4. HDPE Pipe: With authorization from the engineer and approval by the District, this pipe may be used as an alternative in those applications where "hot soils" are determined to be found. 5. Fittings: Fittings shall be made of ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C 111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating shall be a minimum of one-mil (1) thick. 6. Joint Restraint Devices: Joint restraint devices shall be made of ductile iron. Twist-off nuts, sized the same as the tee-head bolts, shall be used to ensure proper actuating of restraining devices. Joint restraint devices shall be EBAA Iron, Inc., Megalug Series 1100 or 1700 or Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1400 for new pipe restraint and EBAA Iron Sales, Megalug Series 1100SD or 1100HD or Uni-Flange UFR1300-C or UFR1390-C for existing pipe restraint or accepted equal. 7. Solid Sleeves: Solid sleeves shall be made of ductile iron,mechanical joint,long body. Sleeves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Where a solid sleeve is used to join two pieces of pipe of the same diameter, a "wedding band" is to be inserted between the two pipes inside of the solid sleeve. S. Tapping Sleeves: Wet taps shall only be made with the use of a tapping sleeve. The District will allow epoxy-coated Smith Blair 620, Mueller H304, JCM 412 or equivalent. No tapping sleeves will be allowed for any application with a working pressure of 150 psi or higher. For those applications where working pressure exceeds 150 psi, the District will require the use of a tee. B. Fittings Fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153,pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low- alloy steel. All fittings cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. 2.2 VALVES The valves shall be the same size as the main. A. Gate Valves Gate valves shall be Mueller A-2360, Waterous AFC-2500 or AVK Series 25 with an epoxy- coated interior and exterior cast iron or ductile iron body, pressure rating 250 psi, bronze- mounted, AWWA C509. Resilient seat (wedge) rubber encapsulated gate, flanged or mechanical joint as required. Valves with ring stem seal, two-inch (2") square operating nut, open left must be used. Resilient wedge gate valves on all pipe sizes up to and including 12 inches are required. Water Distribution 02510-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Direction of Opening: All valves are to open left. Specifications: Gate valves in sizes through twenty-four inches (24") shall be of the iron body, non-rising bronze stem, resilient seated wedge type manufactured to equal or exceed ANSI/AWWA Standard C509-80 and the specific requirements outlined in these Special Provisions. Valves shall have a bottle-tight working water pressure of 250 psi with zero leakage and be capable of flow in either direction. End connections shall be mechanical joint and shall be furnished with all necessary joint materials. Valve openings shall be furnished and installed with valve stacks and covers in accordance with locate water district specifications. Valve body, bonnet, stuffing box and disc cast shall be manufactured of either gray or ductile iron. The exterior of the valve shall have epoxy coating per AWWA standards, applied to the ferrous parts of the valve, except for finished or seating surfaces. All internal ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with a two-part thermosetting epoxy coating. The coating shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to water, protect all seating and adjacent surfaces from corrosion and prevent build-up of scale or tuberculation. The valve shall be structurally designed so that if excessive torque is applied to the stem in the closing direction, with the disc seated, failure of the pressure retaining parts does not occur. Stem failure under such conditions shall occur externally at such a point as to enable the stem to be safely turned in the opening direct by use of a pipe wrench. B. Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be Tyler 668-5, D&L M-9042 (with a M-9073 extension), or East Jordan 8550 (with a 8560 extension). All buried valves shall be provided with a six-inch(6") cast iron, valve box, screw type. The valve box shall be of a design which will not transmit shock or stress to the valve and which shall have enough extension capability to be raised to final street grade. The valve box shall be cast iron, adjustable screw type, with minimum five-inch (5") diameter shaft provided with cover, marked"Water". C. Pressure Reducing Valves All pressure reducing valves shall be CLA-VAL 92G-01ABXCKDS as appropriate and determined by the Engineer. In addition, the PRV is to have the following features: 1. Pressure reducing pilotry with pressure control ranges for correct valve operation where installed. Pilot material shall be bronze body only, brass and stainless-steel trim. Tubing shall be copper. Water Distribution 02510-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Epoxy coated interior and exterior suitable for potable water contact. 3. Dura-clean stem design shall be installed. 4. Valve opening shall be regulated by means of a"speed control valve"for flow control. 5. Ductile iron,globe body,minimum 150-pound ANSI flanges or as maybe required by system pressures, bronze trim 6. Pilotry flow-clean strainer and minimum of three (3) pilot cocks. D. Pressure Reducing Valves-Bypass Line The PRV shall be CLA-VAL 90-01 valve, sized appropriately to allow low flow to bypass around the main PRV. The valve shall have a ductile iron globe body with screwed ends. Pilotry is to be equipped with a flow wye strainer and isolation cocks. E. Air Release/Vacuum Valves Shall be an APCO air vacuum combination valve sized by the engineer as manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation or an equivalent valve that has been approved by the local water district. The valve shall have a cast iron body, cover and baffle with a stainless-steel float. The seat shall be fastened into the valve cover, without distortion and shall be easily removed, if necessary. Air release/vacuum valves shall be installed at all high points in the system on any main line extensions. F. Check Valves Golden-Anderson Silent Check Valve (Figure 280). Bronze mounted, AWWA C508. High strength cast iron gate with bronze gate ring. Bronze, back-faced seat ring. Solid bronze Y- shaped hinge. 2.3 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be Mueller Centurion A423 Mountain Hydrant, which conform to AWWA Standard C502 with a working pressure of 250 psi. They also shall be six-inch(6")mechanical joint inlet, minimum 5'/4 inches, compression-type main valve that closes with pressure,two 2'/2 hose nozzles, one 4'/2-inch pump nozzle, nozzle threads ANSI B26. Nozzles must be easily replaceable in the field with standard tools. Operating and cap nuts must be 1'/2-inch, Number 17 National Standard hex main valve which open to the LEFT. An arrow cast on top of hydrant shall indicate direction opening. These shall be a breakable section that permits clean break at or near ground level, preventing water loss in case of breakage. Working parts must be removable for maintenance or repair without excavation. Also required are operating mechanism non-wetting, oil reservoir lubricated, with O-ring seals and barrel drain bronze mounted with at least two (2) outlets, which operate automatically with main valve. Fire hydrants must be installed at the end of all main lines. Finish grade of the fire hydrant shall be twelve inches (12")below the flange for final grade and paving inspection. Water Distribution 02510-5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Fire Hydrant Extensions New Installations: All new installations shall be installed at the standard 7-foot to 9-1/2 foot of cover measured from the top of the pipe to finish grade. All fire hydrants shall consist of a single solid shaft. No fire hydrant extensions will be allowed. Any special circumstance will require written approval from the local water district prior to installation. Existing Fire Hydrants: No more than one (1), two-foot (2') long, fire hydrant grade extension (extension section) shall be used or installed on fire hydrant assemblies. All hydrants shall be installed with a guard valve to isolate the hydrant for repair while maintaining service to main. No service line taps will be allowed between the guard valve and hydrant. Guard valves shall be installed on the tee off of the water main. The maximum distance from the guard valve to the fire hydrant shall not exceed fifty feet (50') Fire hydrants shall be installed at the end of all dead-end mains. C. Fire Hydrant Marker Flags Install fire hydrant marker flags for all newly constructed fire hydrants. The required flat is a Nordic Flex Flag, FF2-72 inches. D. Fire Hydrant Depth of Bury Fire hydrant dept of bury will conform to Manufacturer's requirements. 2.4 SERVICE LINES A. Copper Tubing Type 'W', ASTM B88. Connections to be compression or silver soldered. B. Corporation Stops Mueller 300 Ball Valve No. B-25008 or B25028, AWWA C800. All brass construction with compression connection. McDonald No. 4701 BT or 4704 BT, AWWA C800. Ford cc/comp FB-1000-G Ford IPS/comp FB-1100-G C. Curb Stops Mueller 300 Ball Curve Valve No. 25209, Ford B44 with compression connections,AWWA C- 800. McDonald Ball Curb Valve- 6100 T,AWWA C800. Water Distribution 02510-6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Curb Boxes For curb stops up to 1": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid or McDonald 5601 with 5601L lid. For curb stops larger than 1": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid and Tyler 6500 Series Enlarged Base#144809 or McDonald 5603 with 5601L lid. Shaft diameter shall be 1" and the top of the shaft shall be a minimum of 18" from final grade and lid. E. Saddles Ductile Iron Saddle: Mueller DE2A, JCM402, Smith & Blair 313, Ford F202, McDonald 3825, 3826 or equal and approved by the District. The saddle must have a double flat strap design with ductile iron body. Said saddle must conform to AWWA C800. 2.5 METERS Rockwell SR Compound Meter A. All services are required to have a positive displacement Rockwell meter with ECR touch- read pad. Conformance per AWWA C702 Standard for Cold Water Meters - Compound Type. 1. SR 2. SR2 3. Compound 4. Meter type will be determined by the District. B. Installation must be in freeze-proof, accessible area. C. A telephone jack must be installed within five feet (S) of the meter to provide for future automated meter reading. D. Installation will be near floor level in a horizontal position. Isolation valves shall be located before the PRV and after the meter(i.e. valve, PRV, meter, valve). E. Customer shall install wire from meter location to touch-read pad prior to meter installation. F. Touch-read pad will be located on street side of building, five feet (5) above the ground in an accessible location free from snow. G. Master Meter Vaults: All master meter vaults will be required to have a six inch(6") Rockwell turbine meter with a two inch (2")positive displacement low flow meter. The Contractor will be required to submit a piping schematic to the District and Engineer prior to any installation. Refer to Details for additional information. Water Distribution 02510-7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.6 BEDDING Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1 '/a inch maximum, and 100 100 maximum of 10% of pipe diameter to '/2 inch No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to 90% of Standard Proctor placed Requirement fill voids below pipe at+/- 3% of Optimum Moisture haunches The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1'/z inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter, whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding 3/4 inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No. 4 (4.75 millimeter) screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 (75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated, the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration. The District may require soil or select import. Where groundwater may be present, the use of screened rock for bedding is prohibited. Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB, Class II, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at+/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content,referencing Standard Proctor(ASTM D698, AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill, a '/2 sack(50 pounds)per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. Water Distribution 02510-8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious materials. -Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications, Section 206.02, may be used with District approval. -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSFAWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSFAWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1'/2 inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. 2.7 TRENCH BACKFILL Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over six inches (6") in diameter in top twelve inches (12") of trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than eighteen inches (18") in diameter shall be backfilled in the trench. 2.8 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of"blue" marking tape is required on all water mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately twenty-four inches (2') above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: A. Four(4) mil thick PVC material. B. Solid"blue" color with black lettering C. Six inches (6") in width 2.9 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials shall be furnished from sources agreed to by the Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. Water Distribution 02510-9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.10 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water- 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned,mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.11 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Install polyethylene encasement on all Ductile Iron Pipe unless noted otherwise on plans. A polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C105, with the following additional requirements. The raw material used to manufacture polyethylene film shall be Type 1, Class A, Grade E-1, in accordance with ASTM D-1248. 2.12 THRUST BLOCKS AND ANCHORS Concrete thrust blocks and anchors shall be sized for the internal pipe pressure and soil bearing capacity. Standard sizes and shapes of thrust blocks and anchors are shown on the details. No thrust block shall be smaller than that size required for an eight inch(8")main. Thrust reaction blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand and 5 parts stone, and having a compressive strength of not less than 3000 P.S.I. after 28 days. Megalug joint restraint devices shall be used in conjunction with thrust blocks. All thrust blocks shall be formed in accordance with the local water district's specifications. See detail. The Water District shall inspect all thrust blocks. Water Distribution 02510-10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.13 PRESSURE REDUCER VAULTS All proposed installations shall be "factory-built" vault including the appropriately sized main line inlet and outlet. PRV installations shall include an appropriately sized manual bypass with an approved gate valve; two (2) appropriately sized CLA-VAL Model 90G-01ABK pressure reducing valves with approved isolating gate valves. All vault installations shall include a 120/240-volt power panel; all assembled, tested and painted. Minimum dimensions of the vault shall be 7' (H) x 8' (L) x 6' (W), skid—mounted capsule with Bilco Model MNB-50 access hatch, ladder, fluorescent light, gravity drain in sump, dehumidifier, 240 volt heater, exhaust fan and two (2) magnesium anode packs. All proposed vault installations must be pre- approved by the local water district. 2.14 CASING SPACERS Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Trench Excavation: Prior to removal,notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. Water Distribution 02510-11 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.2 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.3 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Deliver, handle, store, and install in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable paragraphs of AWWA C600, AWWA C603, and ASTM D2321. Carefully examine all pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects. Groove in bells of ductile iron pipe to be full and continuous or be rejected. Remove all foreign matter from interior and ends of pipe and appurtenances before lowering into trench. Carefully lower all pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants into trench piece by piece to prevent damage to pipe materials,protective coatings, and linings. Do not dump into trench. If pipe cannot be lowered into trench and into place without getting earth into it, place heavy, tightly woven canvas bag over each end and leave in place until joints are made. During pipe laying,place no debris,tools, clothing or other materials in pipe. Keep trenches free from water during pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering of trench considered as incidental to construction an all costs included in contract prices. When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by watertight plug, or other means approved by Engineer. B. Deflection of Pipe: Pipe deflections are discouraged. Do not exceed 50% of the deflection limits for each type of pipe as recommended by pipe manufacturer. C. Pipe Jointing 1. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in neat and workmanlike manner with no damage to pipe or lining. Leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. 2. Mechanical Joints: Thoroughly clean last 8" of spigot and inside bell to remove oil, grit, tar, and other foreign matter. Coat spigot and gasket with solution furnished by pipe manufacturer. Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward spigot end. Coat gasket with joint lubricant and place on spigot end of pipe to be laid, with thick edge toward gland. Push entire section forward to seat spigot in bell of pipe in place. Press gasket into place within bell, even around entire joint. Move ductile-iron gland along pipe into Water Distribution 02510-12 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 position for bolting all nuts with suitable torque wrench. Alternately tighten nuts 180 degrees apart to produce equal pressure on all parts of gland. Pipe Size Bolt Size Range of Torque Inches Inches Ft.-Lb. 3" 5/8 45 -60 4"-24" 3/4 75 -90 3. Push-on Joints: Thoroughly clean exterior 4" of pipe spigot and inside of adjoining bell to remove all oil, grit, tar, and other matter. Place gasket in bell with large round side of gasket pointing inside pipe bell. Apply thin film joint lubricant over gasket's entire exposed surface. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and insert into bell to contact gasket. Force pipe into bell to manufacturer's jointing mark. 4. Flanged Joints: Thoroughly clean faces of flanges of all oil,grease,and other material. Thoroughly clean rubber gaskets and check for proper fit. Assure proper seating of flanged gasket. Tighten blots so pressure on gasket is uniform. Use torque wrenches to insure uniform bearing. If joints leak when hydrostatic test applied, remove and replace gaskets and retighten bolts. D. Thrust Restraint: Concrete thrust blocks are required. 3.5 SANITARY SEWER CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.6 TAPPING PIPE Use experienced workmen with tools in good repair and proper adapters for size of pipe being tapped. Drilling and tapping machines proposed for tapping directly into pipe agreed to by Engineer. If tap is improperly installed with leakage around threads or, in opinion of Engineer, connection is substandard, provide tap saddle at Contractors' expense. If damage to pipe cannot be repaired by saddle, install approved repair sleeve over injured portion and retap at Contractor's expense. Install corporation stop and couplings, flanged coupling adapters, and service saddles to provide clean seat. Wipe gaskets clean before installation. Flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated for installation on pipe ends. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten bolts progressively from opposite sides until all bolts have uniform tightness. Use torque wrenches or other approved equipment. Water Distribution 02510-13 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.7 SERVICE LINE Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to curb stop or meter,in shortest direct route by continuous section of pipe with no splices. Locate 10' horizontally from all sewer lines. Terminate near center of each lot or as shown on drawings. 3.8 VALVES AND HYDRANTS Carefully inspect valve and hydrant before installation. Clean interior. Operate valve and hydrant to determine parts in proper working order, with valves seating and drain valve operating properly. Set plumb and securely braced into place. Set hydrant with bury line at fmish grade, with hose nozzles parallel to and pumper nozzle facing pavement, at least 6" behind curb or sidewalk and 18" from property line or as shown on drawings. Provide drainage pit having 9 square feet of surface area and 2' of depth below seep hole. Backfill pits with 1-1/2" washed rock to 6" above barrel drain hole. Provide thrust blocking at bowl of each hydrant as shown on drawings. Do not obstruct barrel drain hole. Hydrants and valves backfilled by installing 1- 1/2" aggregate road base to subgrade. Valve boxes centered and plumb over the operating nut. Valve boxes supported by bricks or other means to prevent any shock or stress transmitted to pipe or valve. Set valve box covers to just below subgrade level to prevent damage during construction of surfacing if applicable. Adjust to grade of surfacing. 3.9 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS Install standard plugs or caps at dead ends of all fittings and pipe in accordance with drawings. If dead end is not to be extended,place water service line as near dead end as practical. 3.10 VAULTS Construct vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.11 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, from rain, and flowing water for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after fmishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. Water Distribution 02510-14 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.12 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to P above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 85 to 90%, AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over 6" in diameter in top 12" trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than 18" in diameter. Carefully lower boulders larger than 12" in diameter into trench until backfill is 4'over top of pipe. 3.13 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95%, AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2%of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock, to 18" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.14 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with a cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95%AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these Specifications. Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. Water Distribution 02510-15 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Hydrostatic Testing 1. General: Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Test two or more valved sections not to exceed 1000 feet. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Lay no additional pipe until first test section has passed tests. Furnish the following equipment and materials for tests, unless otherwise directed by Engineer: 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Testing Procedure: Test each 1000 feet of line installed while trench is partially backfilled and joints are left exposed for examination for leaks. Do not conduct pressure tests until 48 hours after placement of concrete thrust blocks. After pipe has been partially backfilled, slowly let water into line. Vent to allow air in line to be released. Flush line as necessary for cleaning. Leave water in line for 24 hours prior to pressure test. Test at 1-1/2 times working pressure, calculated for low point of test section, or 150 psi, whichever is greater. Valve off pump and hold pressure in line for test. Test for two hours or as agreed to by Engineer. At end of test, operate pump until test pressure is again attained. Calibrate container of water for pump suction to determine amount of water to replace leakage. 3. Leakage Allowance: Leakage is quantity of water necessary to refill line at end of test period. No installation will be accepted until leakage is less than: ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 1000'OF PIPE IN GPH Avg.Test Nominal Pipe Diameter - in. Pressure psi 6 8 10 12 18 200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.91 175 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.79 150 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.66 125 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.51 100 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.35 *For pipe with 18' nominal lengths. To obtain recommended allowable leakage for pipe with 20'nominal lengths, multiply the leakage calculated from the table by 0.9. If pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size. Reduce allowable leakage proportionately for sections less than 1000 ft. 3.16 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING A. General: In accordance with AWWA C601. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules and sodium hypochlorite solutions. Water Distribution 02510-16 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Chlorine-water solution method: Chlorine Required to Produce 25 mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe-by Diameter Pipe 100 Percent 1 Percent Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution In. Lb. Gal. 4 .013 .16 6 .030 .36 8 .054 .65 10 .085 1.02 12 .120 1.44 16 .217 2.60 Induce chlorine solution into pipeline at a continuous feed rate to attain a concentration of 25 Mg/L free chlorine. C. Chlorination Test: Assure valves are closed on existing system to prevent chlorine solution flowing into existing system. Retain 25 mg/L chlorinated water in pipeline for minimum of 24 hours. During retention period operate all valves and hydrants to disinfect. At end of 24 hour period, chlorine in system to be no less than 10 mg/L throughout length tested. When section being tested meets 10 mg/L chlorine after 24 hours, flush main. Water samples taken shall show no coliform organisms. If water in pipe does not meet the governing health agency requirements, repeat disinfection procedure, at Contractor's expense, until requirements are met. Furnish acceptance forms from governing agency to Engineer. 3.17 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION Water Distribution 02510-17 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, service wyes, service lines, force mains and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a CAT 375 backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for sewer lines as approved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and manholes; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. Sanitary Sewer System 02530-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC): 4"45",ASTM D3034,Type PSM,SDR 35; 18"-27",ASTM F679. Push-on joints and molded rubber gaskets. Maximum pipe length 20'. B. Ductile Iron: AWWA C151, Class 52. Push-on joints. Poly-lined or Griffin "Sewper Coat" ASTM A746. C. Yelomine: Restrained joint PVC pressure pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2241 "Standard Specifications for PVC, pressure rated pipe (SDR Series)". D. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi with push-on joints ASTM D1869. Transition coupling from SDR35 to C-900, pressure pipe shall be Harco Manufacturing 337-080, Class 150 and ASTM3139. All spigot ends shall be beveled to manufacturer's specifications. 2.2 MANHOLES A. Manhole bases: Precast concrete ASTM C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete (wetcast) with the lip outside with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Rings and Covers: Cast iron, ASTM A48 with a flat lid with the lettering "Sewer" cast on the cover. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 255 lbs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. HS20 traffic loading. D&L A-1043 or accepted equal. D. Manhole Grade Rings: Precision Cover Systems, Inc. (PCSO fully adjustable manhole covers with variable grade rings that adjust to meet different roadway heights and grades will be installed where required by District. E. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of a vertical load of 800 pounds and a pullout load of 1500 pounds (ASTM-C478), six inches (6")from face of manhole. The steps shall meet industry standards or equal and be plastic coated. F. Manhole Joint Sealant: Double Rub-R-Nek with primer. One inch (1") on 48"-inch diameter manholes; P/2- inch on all larger numbers. Sanitary Sewer System 02530-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.3 BEDDING Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1 '/2 inch maximum, and 100 100 maximum of 10%of pipe diameter to '/2 inch No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to 90% of Standard Proctor placed Requirement fill voids below pipe at+/- 3% of Optimum Moisture haunches The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1'/z inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter, whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding 3/4 inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No. 4 (4.75 millimeter) screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 (75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated, the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration and the use of screened rock is prohibited in these applications. See sewer pipe bedding detail (S-10). Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB, Class 11, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at+/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content,referencing Standard Proctor(ASTM D698, AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill, a '/2 sack(50 pounds)per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. Sanitary Sewer System 02530-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious materials. -Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications, Section 206.02, may be used with District approval. -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSFAWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSFAWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1'/2 inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type][[. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate -43% Water- 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% Sanitary Sewer System 02530-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.6 TRACER WIRE Tracer wire shall be ten(10)gauge insulated copper wire and be required on all curve-linear applications. 2.7 MARKETING/LOCATING DISK The District will provide 3M "Green" marking disks to the contractor. The contractor shall ensure their correct installation. 2.8 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of"green" marking tape is required on all sewer mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately two feet (2') above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: 1. 4-mil thick PVC material 2. Solid green color with black lettering 3. Six inches (6") in width 2.9 CASING SPACERS Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. Restrained casing spacers shall be provided at all pipe joints. In addition, casing spacers shall be installed every ten feet (10') of the pipeline to support the pipe barrel and the weight of its contents. Restrained casing spacers shall be Uni-Flange Series UFRCS1300 or URFCS1390, or an approved equal restrained joint device and Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Company, Model CCM casing spacers. Sanitary Sewer System 02530-5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.2 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the District. 3.3 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.4 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4"pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. Sanitary Sewer System 02530-6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.5 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Pipe installation may be lamped daily by Engineer. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. C. Wyes and Risers for Service Connections: Angle upward so 1/8 bend connected to fitting will make service line invert equal to inside crown of sewer main. Where elevation of top of service is more than 12'below finished grade, install riser pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.6 WATER LINE CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18"between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition covelings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.7 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of an expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six, two-inch reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE Make connections to existing manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out,in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. Sanitary Sewer System 02530-7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.9 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to house service, in shortest direct route. Locate 10' from all water lines. Terminate 5' from lowest corner of lot or as shown on drawings. Where wyes have not been installed in main sewer, tap by machine drilling hole in main, sized to fit saddle for service line. Each wye or drilled tap and saddle shall be inspected prior to backfilling. Service line minimum grade of 1/4"per foot. If service line is to be stopped at property line, place 6-foot steel fence post at end, extending 2'above finished ground.Place watertight plug in end of service line. 3.10 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.11 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90%AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. 3.12 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. Sanitary Sewer System 02530-8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2%of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock 18" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3. Trenches outside road right-of-way. Compact to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. 3.13 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6"undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 1. General: Conduct infiltration or exfiltration test for each section between manholes. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Testing may be required during course of work where infiltration appears to be grater than maximum allowable, or quality of work is questionable. No sewer line will be accepted where water tightness tests show leakage exceeding 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day. Flush and clean sewer line prior to testing, wetting pipe, and cleaning out debris. Plug all pipe outlets to resist test pressure. 2. Infiltration Test: In high ground water table installation only. Plug upper manhole to determine leakage in section of line between consecutive manholes. Record quantity of water collected in time period to calculate infiltration rate. 3. Exfiltration Test by Air: Test each section of pipe between consecutive manholes to determine test duration for section by computation from Air Test Tables. Pressure- holding time is based on an average holding pressure of 3 psi gauge or a drop from 3.5 Sanitary Sewer System 02530-9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 psi to 2.5 psi gauge. Add air until internal air pressure of sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi gauge. After internal pressure of approximately 4.0 psi is obtained, allow time for air pressure to stabilize. Pressure will normally show some drop until temperature of air in test section stabilizes. When pressure has stabilized and is at or above starting test pressure of 3.5 psi gauge, commence test. Before starting test, pressure may be allowed to drop to 3.5 psi. Record drop in pressure for test period. If pressure has dropped more than 1.0 psi gauge during test line has failed. Test may be discontinued when prescribed test time has been completed even though 1.0 psi drop has not occurred. ASTM C828 "Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers". Pipe Size Time Inches Minutes 4 2-1/2 6 4 8 5 10 6-1/2 12 7-1/2 15 9-1/2 18 12 21 14 24 15-1/2 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM Sanitary Sewer System 02530-10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02580 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, rock excavation, blasting, rock disposal, dewatering, backfill, bedding, compaction, installation of conduits, vaults, pads and all necessary appurtenances and coordination with the telephone, cable television, electric and gas companies. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force 35,000 lbs each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Utility Company Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications of the telephone company, the cable television company, the electric company and the gas company. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the systems they install by each of the respective utility companies. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and vaults; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. Electric, Communication 02580-1 and Gas Systems GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 2"-8", Schedule 40 PVC. Electric rated for electric application. B. Electric primary conduit supplied by Holy Cross Energy. C. Gas pipe to be supplied and placed by gas company. 2.2 VAULTS All switchgear, transformer, splice vaults, pads, and bases to be supplied by Holy Cross Energy. 2.3 BEDDING A. Granular material - 3/4" screened rock. B. On-site 1-1/2" minus well graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written approval of the utility company and Engineer. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the Utility Companies. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type H. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water- 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% Electric, Communication 02580-2 and Gas Systems GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in dram mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Owner, Engineer and Fire Department. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.2 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. Electric, Communication 02580-3 and Gas Systems GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.3 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 3"below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.4 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4"pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.5 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. 3.6 PADS AND VAULTS Install pads and vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.7 PULL STRING Pull string shall be labeled to identify which utility company or spare conduit the use of the conduit is intended for. 3.8 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. Electric, Communication 02580-4 and Gas Systems GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.9 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" screened rock or on-site screened material (if approved by Engineer) for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material,debris,or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90%AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2%of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be o to 2%of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to maximum rock dimension of 12". Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. Prepare a shear step and replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. Electric, Communication 02580-5 and Gas Systems GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Testing 1. General: Conduct testing in accordance with procedures approved by the appropriate utility company or as directed by engineer. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION 02580 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS Electric, Communication 02580-6 and Gas Systems GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, catch basins, inlets, outlets, underdrains, irrigation ditches, channelization, detention storage, siphons and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Precast Manholes 2. Precast Catch Basins 3. Frames, Grates, Covers B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. All to be submitted to Engineer of Record and then to the Building Department for approval. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing. Storm Drainage 02630-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14 B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, circular; ASTM 506, arch; ASTM 507, vertical or horizontal elliptical. Class pipe as shown on drawings. C. Concrete End Section: Same ASTM specification as pipe. Equivalent in area as circular pipe. D. Corrugated Steel Pipe and Arches: AASHTO M36,gauge as shown on drawings. Bands shall conform to following: Pipe Size Corrugations Number Bolts 3" Inches 2-2/3" x 1/2" x 1" 6-30 7" - 2 ea 36-60 12" 14" 3 ea 66-120 24" 20" 5 ea Thickness of band one gauge less than pipe but not less than 16 gauge. E. Corrugated Steel Pipe End Section: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as corrugated steel pipe. F. Bituminous Coating: Where required on corrugated steel pipe and fittings, AASHTO M190, Type A, with minimum thickness of 0.03". Coupling bands fully coated. G. HDPE Pipe: Pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular corrugations. AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306. Class pipe as shown on drawings. H. HDPE Pipe End Sections: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as HDPE pipe. 2.2 UNDERDRAIN PIPE A. Corrugated Steel: AASHTO M36 Type III. Holes 3/8" double row each side of pipe for 6"-10" size pipe. Triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. Spaced in center of each depressed corrugation nearest to center pipe. Install hole row each side of pipe for 6"-10"pipe; triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. B. Rigid PVC Schedule 40. C. Flexible Polypropelene or Polyethylene/Hancor. Storm Drainage 02630-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.3 PREFABRICATED INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Corrugated Steel Units: Conform to drawing dimensions,AASHTO M36. Bituminous coating when specified, AASHTO M190, Type A. Steps fabricated into units. B. Precast Concrete Units: In accordance with drawings,ASTM C478 and C789,wall "B",wall thickness 1/12 internal diameter. Steps precast into units. 2.4 MANHOLE A. Manhole Bases: Precast concrete. Manhole base and first barrier section cast monolithic per ASTM - C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Ring and Cover: Cast iron, ASTM A48. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 400 lbs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. D. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in the surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1,000 lbs. 6" from face of manhole. E. Manhole Joint Sealant: RubberNek. 2.5 SLOTTED DRAIN AASHTO M36 with grate assembly, ASTM A123. Joint and couplers of ring compression type. Where required, expanded wire mesh attached across top of drain opening. Fittings provided with annular ends for hugger-type bands. 2.6 FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS, AND STEP Metal units conform to drain dimensions and to following for designated material. A. Gray Iron Castings: AASHTO M105. B. Carbon-Steel Castings: AASHTO M103. C. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536. D. Structural Steel: AASHTO M183 and ASTM A283, Grade B. Galvanizing,where specified, AASHTO M111. 2.7 BEDDING A. Pipe and culvert-roadbase,percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 3/4", 100;No.4,30- 65;No. 8, 25-55;No. 200, 3-12. B. Underdrain-washed gravel: percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 1", 100%; 3/4 95-100%; No.4, 0-5%. Storm Drainage 02630-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.8 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials furnished from sources approved by Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C150 for Portland Cement, Type 11. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps, caked cement and have been exposed to inclement weather shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.9 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix: 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate 43% Water 5.5 Gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% B. Job Mixed Concrete: Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete: Proportioned,mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. Storm Drainage 02630-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Engineer. 3.2 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM, EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.3 BEDDING OTHER THAN UNDERDRAINS A. Pipe: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for full width of trench. B. Culvert: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6" below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. 3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: For new embankments, place fill so width each side of pipe is at least five (5) times pipe diameter. After embankment is placed, proceed with trenching. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduit and outside circumferential laps of flexible conduit facing upstream. Place flexible conduits with longitudinal laps or seams at sides. B. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Remove all loose excavated materials from bottom of trench and install bedding to required thickness. Install pipe true to line and grade. Install remaining bedding material along sides of pipe to avoid any voids. Repair bituminous coating damage using similar coating material. Lubricate coupler bands. Vertical elongation caused by backfill operation shall not exceed 3% of pipe diameter. Compact backfill to 90% AASHTO T99 and continue to F over top of pipe. C. Concrete Pipe: Extend bedding around bell where bell and spigot pipe is used. Place pipe on bedding as shown on drawings. Place remaining bedding along pipe sides with no voids. Compact backfill to 95%AASHTO T99 and continue to F over pipe. D. HDPE Pipe: Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS recommended installation guidelines, with the exceptions that minimum cover in traffic areas for 24-inch through 48-inch shall be one foot and for 60-inch diameters, the minimum cover shall be 2-feet in single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of ADS Class 1 or Class 2 (minimum 98% SPD) material. Storm Drainage 02630-5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 E. Underdrain Pipe: 1. General: Install to lines and grades shown on drawings. Extend underdrain material a minimum of 6" over top of pipe. Cover underdrain material for entire width of trench with filter fabric. If shown on drawings, line trench with fabric before installing pipe and underdrain material. 2. Concrete Pipe: Install with bell resting on trench bottom facing up grade, with underdrain material supporting pipe. 3. Corrugated Steel or PVC Pipe: Holes or perforations placed down with maximum V underdrain material under pipe. Joint according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 SLOTTED DRAIN INSTALLATION Install in accordance with drawings. Trench as narrow as possible and backfill to create uniform foundation side support. Install true to line and grade. 3.6 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert after manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity, so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of fmished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six - two inch thick reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.7 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE Make connections to existing manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out,in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.8 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. Storm Drainage 02630-6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, or flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.9 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" road base for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to F above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 95%AASHTO T99, at a point 6" above top of pipe. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or required compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95%AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2% of optimum. 2. Predominantly of rock, to 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General: Cast-in-place concrete conforming to dimensions shown on the drawings and accurate to tolerances of 1/4". Install forms so all finished lines will be true and straight. Install reinforcing steel with the spacing between the forms and between bars as shown on drawings. Storm Drainage 02630-7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Keep excavation dry during construction. Compaction requirements same as above. B. Inlets and Outlets: Either cast-in-place or precast units, in accordance with drawings. When required, set castings accurately to grade with adjustment courses of brick in full mortar beds. Construct pipe inverts or smooth concrete inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe, with bench to stand on. C. Frames, Grates, Covers, and Steps: Install accurately according to drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure firm foundation. D. Trash Guards: Install in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95%ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. 3.14 TESTING For HDPE and concrete pipe perform an exfiltration test. Plug pipe outlets and fill the system with water from structure to structure and allow system to stabilize for 24 hours and measure the water level. Then measure the water level again in 24 hours. 200-gal/in. dia./mi./day is acceptable. 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE Storm Drainage 02630-8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade immediately prior to paving including proofrolling, repair of areas showing excess deflection during proofrolling and furnishing and placing one or more courses of aggregate in conformance with lines, grades,and typical sections shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis -ASTM C136 2. Wear Abrasion -ASTM C 131 3. Liquid Limit -AASHTO T89, T90 4. Moisture Density Curves - AASHTO T99 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves Size Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 4" 100 - - - 3" 95-100 - - - 2" - 100 - - 1-1/2" - 90-100 - - 1" - - 100 - 3/4" - 50-90 - 100 No. 4 - 30-50 30-70 30-65 No. 8 - - - 25-55 No. 200 3-15 3-12 3-15 3-12 Unbound Base Course 02720-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Liquid limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. B. Requirements for this Project: Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Staking: Owner shall provide slope stakes every 50 foot station. Contractor will provide at his expense all additional staking necessary to ensure work conforms with drawings. B. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, line, grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings before placing base material. Compact to 95%AASHTO T99. 3.2 MIXING The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogeneous mixture. 3.3 PLACEMENT If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6", construct in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6". When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8"upon approval of Engineer. 3.4 SHAPING AND COMPACTION Compact each layer to 95% AASHTO T180. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that uniform texture is produced and aggregates are firmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during compaction so moisture content is within 2% of optimum. END OF SECTION 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE Unbound Base Course 02720-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PART GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing,laying,and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines,grades,and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement,temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Owner will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If requested,provide samples of proposed materials. B. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Aggregate -AASHTO T96, CP-45, AASHTO T304, AASHTO T176, AASHTO T89,AASHTO T90 2. PG Graded Binders,use PG 58-28 -AASHTO T48,TP48,TP5 AND T51 3. Liquid Asphalt-AASHTO M81,M82;ASTM D2026 4. Emulsified Asphalt-AASHTO M140 or M208 5. Compaction—Colorado Procedure 51,CP44 or CP81 C. Job Mix Formula: The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer. 1. A proposed j ob—mix gradation as required by the contract,which shall be wholly within the Master Range Table of Table 703—4 of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction(CDOT Specifications)before the tolerances shown in Table 401 - 1,of the CDOT Specifications,are applied. Flexible Pavement 02740-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 The job — mix formula shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size. A single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate and a single temperature for the mixture at the discharge point of the plant. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight,clean,smooth metal beds thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil,lime solution,or other approved release agent. Petroleum distillates such as kerosene or fuel oil will not be permitted. Each truck shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material to protect the mixture from the weather. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Bituminous plant mix shall be placed only on properly constructed surfaces that are free from water, snow, or ice. The bituminous mixtures shall be placed in accordance with the temperature limitations of Table 401-3 "of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction"and only when weather conditions permit the pavement to be properly placed and finished,as determined by the Engineer. B. Protection: After final rolling,do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades,flagmen,and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required. Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. C. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with specifications prior to placement of asphaltic concrete. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE Clean,hard,durable particles of crushed stone,crushed gravel,natural gravel,or crushed slag with not more than 45%of wear,AASHTO T96. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Grading SX 1-1/2" - 1„ - 3/4" 100 1/2" 90-100 3/8" - #4 - #8 28-58 #30 - #200 2-10 Flexible Pavement 02740-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Sizes#8 and larger,tolerances+8%; #30+6%;#200+3%;where 100%passing,no tolerance. Use Grading SX for this project. 2.2 ASPHALTIC CEMENT A. Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M226,Table 2. B. Superpave Performance Graded Binders shall conform to AASHTO Provisional Standard MP 1 for PG 58-28 Performance Graded Binders 2.3 TACK COAT One of the following,grade and type as recommended by supplier: A. Emulsified asphalt,AASHTO M140 B. Cationic emulsified asphalt,AASHTO M208 2.5 MIX DESIGN A. Use Grading SX,75 Design Gyrations,PG 58-28 Binder. 1. Job—Mix Formula as defined in the Submittal Section(02740—3, Part 1.03 Q. B. Furnish aggregate gradation. C. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications. 2.6 MIXING A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. B. Aggregates: Keep each component of various-sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat-dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2%. Deliver dry aggregate to mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration,grade,and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement,ambient temperature,and workability of mixture. C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature-viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. D. Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cement to comply with j ob-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 95%minimum coated particles for base mixtures in accordance with AASHTO T 195 and 85- 90%coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. Flexible Pavement 02740-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section in accordance with the technical specification for Unbound Base Course Section 02720. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers,blowers,or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. Hot mixed asphalt shall be placed only on property prepared unfrozen surfaces which are free of water,snow,and ice. B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with levelling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surfacing at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed immediately. Do not extend more than 2000'ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling on tack coat. 3.2 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS Set frames of structures to final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over,mark so crews can find on emergency basis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing. 3.3 SPREADING AND FINISHING A. Place at temperatures of not less than 275 degrees F, or more than 305 degrees F. If temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling,asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F,while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical,self-powered pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade, and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control may be used for levelling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screed shall be adjustable for height and crown, equipped with controlled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mix without tearing,shaving or gouging surface,to depth and cross-section specified,without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Paver shall be capable of placing courses in thicknesses from 1/2"to 4"and from widths of 8'to 15'. Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6". B. Strike finish surface smooth;true to cross section;uniform in density and texture;free from hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters,manhole rings,catch basins,and other similar structures with thin,uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be 1/4" above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving,flush with gutters sloping towards paving. C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity,inaccessibility,or unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish and compaction tolerances of these specifications. Flexible Pavement 02740-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavement, or between successive day's work, to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand,dirt,dust,or other materials,and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture,density,and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing. 1. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on j oint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. In every pavement layer the longitudinal joints shall not be constructed in the wheel paths. Prepare longitudinal joints by overlapping screed 1" on existing surface. Deposit sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake 1/2"on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately I"high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8" for width of 6",after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place levelling courses within 1/2"of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10'straight edge,parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for each lane. Straight edge will be advanced 5'and space under straight edge shall not exceed 1/4". Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced. G. Segregated areas in the top lift shall be removed and replaced, full lane width, at the Contractor's expense. 3.4 COMPACTION A. General: Provide rollers to obtain required density, surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment,rollers,etc.to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. B. Rollers 1. Steel-wheel rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled,developing contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish one complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first, starting at outside edge and gradually progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated curves rolling on low side on previously transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by Flexible Pavement 02740-5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 one half width of roller. Mat temperature must not be below 185 degrees F. 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by a combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density, surface texture,and surface tolerances required. D. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92%to 96%of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado Procedure 51. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. 3.5 PATCHING Cut out and fill with fresh,hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel,and perpendicular to direction of traffic to extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact and finish to specification. 3.6 CLEAN UP After completing operations,clean surfaces,pick up excess paving materials,and clean work area. END OF SECTION 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT Flexible Pavement 02740-6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, forming,jointing, placing and curing of concrete pavement, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, pans, in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 02300 B. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 C. Concrete Paving Joints: Section 02751 D. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 02752 E. Hot Weather Concreting: Section 02753 F. Cold Weather Concreting: Section 02754 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement,temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Installers: 1. All work in this section to be accomplished under direct on-site supervision of thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and the recommendations contained in the reference standards. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only when performed under the direct supervision of a Craftsman holding the following certificate: ACI Concrete Flatwork Finisher and Technician (ACICFFT) or other Flatwork Finisher certification program approved by CDOT. A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required at each finishing operation. A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required for each three or fewer finishers (non-certified ACICFFTs) at each operation 2. In acceptance of the finished work, allowance will not be made for lack of skill on the part of the workers. Rigid Pavement 02750 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly adhered to concerning both methods and materials. Where surrounding conditions or base materials are not compatible with manufacturer's recommendations, notify Engineer in writing prior to bidding. E. Design Criteria: See Part 2 Products F. Testing Agency. All testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory and paid by the Owner with the exception of Contractor submittal requirements, qualifications of proposed materials and establishment of mixture proportions and other tests required by the Contractor to assure Contractor is furnishing materials and construction in compliance with the contract documents. G. Source Quality Control: The Engineer or his representative shall be offered uninterrupted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the work is in progress. H. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Engineer for examination at any time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Reinforcement, precast sections. B. Manufacturers Data: Additives, joint materials, curing compounds, concrete sealant with 10- year manufacturer warranty, fly ash, reinforcement, concrete bonding agent, precast concrete reinforcing supports. C. Mix Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate, water, cement, air content, admixtures, fly ash. A laboratory trial mix shall be prepared and test results submitted. The Concrete Mix Design will not be approved when the laboratory trial mix data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past or aggregate data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past. Provide all of the information outlined below for the concrete mix proposed for the project: Identification: I. Project. 2. Name and address of Contractor and concrete producer. 3. Mixture designation. 4. Class of concrete and intended use. Materials and Proportions: 1. Name and location of material sources for aggregate, cement, admixtures and water. 2. Type of cement and additives (if used). 3. Cement content in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. 4. The water/cement ratio of modified concrete is the ratio of the mass of water to the combined masses of Portland cement and supplementary cementitious material. 5. The saturated surface dry batch mass for the coarse and fine aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. Rigid Pavement 02750 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 6. Water content (including free moisture in the aggregate plus water in the drum, exclusive of absorbed moisture in the aggregate) in kilograms per cubic meter(pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. 7. Target water/cementitious ratio. 8. Dosage of admixture(s). Entrained air may be obtained either by the use of an air- entraining Portland cement or by the use of an air-entraining admixture. 9. Sieve analysis of aggregates. 10. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate. 11. Bulk specific gravity(dry and saturated surface dry) of fine and coarse aggregate. 12. Dry rodded unit mass of coarse aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard). 13. Fineness modulus (FM) of fine aggregate. 14. Concrete unit mass. 15. Material certifications for Portland cement, admixtures, and aggregate. The laboratory trial mix shall include results of the following: 1. AASHTO T 119 slump of hydraulic cement concrete. 2. AASHTO T121 weight per cubic foot, yield, and air content (gravimetric) of concrete. Air content from AASHTO T152 air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method may be used in lieu of the air content by the gravimetric method in AASHTO T121. 3. AASHTO T22 compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens shall be performed with at least two specimens at 7 days,two at 14 days and three specimens at 28 days. 4. Report compressive strength at other times as necessary for expected opening to traffic requirements. D. Placement: Method proposed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: 1. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. When air temperature is above 85°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Excessive slump or delivery time will be considered as a basis for rejection of the concrete placement. B. Extra Water: 1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix. 2. Should extra water be required before depositing concrete, the General Contractors Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible. 3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater. Rigid Pavement 02750 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: a. When placing concrete in cold weather, as defined in Section 02753, follow specifications for Cold Weather Concreting, Section 02753. b. When placing concrete in cold weather that does not meet the definition of"cold weather" in Section 02753, the following requirements shall be observed: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at minimum of 50°F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. 2. Maintain forms in place for minimum of 72 hours after depositing concrete.. 3. Do not place concrete without acceptance of Engineer on days when temperature 9:00 A.M. is below 40°F until, the General Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supplied all necessary equipment to prevent concrete from freezing. 2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow specifications for Hot Weather Concreting, Section 02754. B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Cover masonry walls, glazing and other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to pouring slabs, sidewalks, or other concrete. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 READY-MIXED CONCRETE AASHTO M157 2.2 CEMENT Portland Cement ASTM C 150, TYPE 1/II. 2.3 CONCRETE Use CDOT Concrete Class P or indicated on plans. 2.4 AGGREGATES A. Fine Aggregate - AASHTO M 6. 1. Fineness Modulus (FM)—AASHTO T 176, 2.50 <FM<3.50 B. Coarse Aggregate - AASHTO M80. Coarse Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of CDOT Class P concrete. For curb and gutter, curbs, sidewalks, pads and pans use AASHTO M43 coarse aggregate gradation #67. Rigid Pavement 02750 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.5 WATER-AASHTO T26 A. The maximum slump of the delivered concrete shall be the slump of the approved concrete mix design plus 1-1/2". B. Water cement ratio - 0.44 maximum 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Agent -AASHTO M154. See table for percent air requirements. Nominal Maximum Size Target Entrained Air Content aggregate,in. at the point of delivery, percent* 3/8 7-1/2 1/2 7 3/4 6 1 6 1-1/2 5-1/2 2 5 *tolerance, 4%to+2% B. Chemical-Admixtures AASHTO M194 2.7 QUALITY A. Provide approved mix design B. Conform to applicable requirements of ACI 301 C. For CDOT Class P concrete, field cylinders shall produce 28-day minimum compressive strength of 4200 psi. Cement content 660 lb/cy minimum. 2.8 REINFORCEMENT A. Deformed and plain billet-steel bars AASHTO M31 B. Fabricated steel bar rod mats, steel wire fabric AASHTO M54 2.9 JOINT MATERIAL AASHTO M173 2.10 CURING MATERIALS A. Burlap cloth from jute or kenaf-AASHTO M 182 B. Liquid membrane -AASHTO M148, 1 gal/150 SF C. Sheet Materials -AASHTO M171, 4 mil Rigid Pavement 02750 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.11 SEALANTS A. Euclid Baracade Silane 100 High Performance Water Repellent or Symons Silane 40% 2.12 WATER: CLEAN AND POTABLE 2.13 FLY ASH: A. ASTM C 618. Use Class F fly ash only. The amount of fly ash shall conform to the percentages allowed in CDOT Class P concrete. Fly ash shall be from a source listed on CDOT's Approved Products List (APL). Verification from the supplier shall be submitted, confirming the fly ash is currently on CDOT's APL. 2.14 DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS: A. Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length.Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. B. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40, epoxy coated, deformed steel bars. Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter, the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE/BASE COURSE A. Check for soft spots by proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove soft yielding material and replace. Compact to specification. Wet to optimum moisture to 6" deep, not more than 12 hours prior to placement so subgrade will not absorb moisture from concrete. B. Test for crown and/or elevation to assure specified thickness. If additional material used to bring subgrade to correct elevation, compact to specification. Before placing concrete, clean subgrade of all loose materials. No disturbance inside forms after fine grading subgrade. 3.2 INLETS, MANHOLES AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES CAST IN PAVEMENT: Thicken pavement and install joints and bond breaker at inlets, manholes and similar structures according to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Smaller structures such as valve and monument boxes do not require a bond breaker. 3.3 FORMS A. Capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment, with maximum deflection of 1/4". Straight and free from warp, with maximum surface deviation of 1/8". In good condition, clean, and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when placed. Joined neatly and Rigid Pavement 02750 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 accurately to line and grade, and mechanically tamped to assure firm placement. Oil prior to concrete placement. B. Set dowels if required and expansion joints, preformed construction joints, and header boards in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Securely stake preformed baskets to prevent movement. Lightly grease dowels full length. C. Backfill behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT When indicated,place wire mesh as shown on drawings. If required for this project, place dowels and tie bars in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.Hold all tie and marginal bars in proper position by sufficient supports or pins. If center longitudinal joint sawed in lieu of placing metal or plastic strip, bars may be mechanically installed or placed on supports. Where rebar, rod mats or steel wire mesh is required, support with bar chairs. Where two layers of mesh are required, support bottom layer by bar chairs with separators for top mesh. 3.5 READY-MIXED CONCRETE The use of ready-mixed concrete shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proportion, mix, delivery, or placement of concrete. All ready-mixed concrete shall comply with ASTM C94. Concrete shall be continuously mixed or agitated from the time the water is added until the time of use. The concrete shall be deposited in place within 90 minutes after batching when concrete is delivered in truck mixers or agitating trucks. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating truck may be extended to 120 minutes i£ (1)no water is added after 90 minutes (2) the concrete temperature prior to placements is less than 90° F. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating trucks maybe extended to 180 minutes if(1)no water is added after 90 minutes (2) the concrete temperature prior to placement is less than 90°F(3) the approved concrete mix contains a water reducing and retarding admixture which conforms to AASHTO M194, Type D. In accordance with ASTM C94, water may be added to ready-mix concrete one time in order to get slump within range, as long as the specified water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Engineer shall have free access to the ready mix plant at all times. The organization supplying the concrete shall have sufficient plant and transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery of the concrete at the required rate. The contractor shall collect delivery or batch tickets from the driver for all concrete used on the project and shall deliver them to the Engineer. Batch tickets shall provide the following information in accordance with ASTM C94: A. Name of ready-mix batch plant B. Serial number of ticket C. Date D. Truck number E. Name of purchaser F. Specific designation of job (name and location) G. Mix# or specific class or designation of the concrete Rigid Pavement 02750 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 H. Amount of concrete in cubic yards I. Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates J. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials K. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates L. Type, brand and amount of cement M. Type, brand and amount of admixtures N. Weight (in gallons) of water, including surface water on aggregates 3.5 PLACEMENT Deposit near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without damage to subgrade. Operate transit mixer outside forms at all times, except in locations agreed to by Engineer. Place concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in manner requiring as little rehandling as possible. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials. Additional spreading may be by hand shovels. Deposit excess concrete to provide roll ahead of strike off screed for full length of screed. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms, so final surfaces will not have holes or honeycombs. 3.6 FINISHING A. Use equipment designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float freshly placed concrete in one pass, providing well consolidated, homogenous mixture, requiring minimum of hand finishing to meet surface tolerances. Strike hand finished surfaces to tolerances by methods agreed to by Engineer. B. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge parallel to centerline immediately following first floating of surface. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 3/16". C. Final finish pavements after floating and straight edging. Curbs, gutters, pans, and sidewalks shall be broom finished unless otherwise indicated. D. Finish: Broom finish unless otherwise indicated. Finish edges with a slightly rounded edging tool. E. ACI certificated finisher(s) must be on-site during finishing. F. The contractor shall not add water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations. 3.7 CURING (see Section 02752 Concrete Paving Curing for detailed specifications) Apply curing compounds or sheets immediately after finishing. Do not mark or mar finished surface. Coat sides within one hour after form removal. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Have plastic sheeting or other suitable materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from rain. Rigid Pavement 02750 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Provide full protection from freezing. Admixtures (calcium chloride) are not acceptable for freeze protection. C. For hot weather, use fog spray or water retarding additives. Do not throw water directly on surface. D. When indicated, apply two (2) coats deep penetrating sealant. E. Conform to ACI 102.2R-09 "Guide to Durable Concrete" 3.9 JOINTS (see Section 02751 Concrete Paving Joints for detailed specifications) A. Contraction joints. For concrete pavement and concrete pans, depth 1/3 the thickness of concrete. For sidewalks, depth 1/4 the thickness of concrete. For curb and gutter, depth 1/4 the thickness of the gutter concrete. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement, transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. 1. Hand formed with tool, header board, or trowel pushed into surface to move all aggregate from joint. 2. Saw joints as soon as concrete can support equipment without marring and cutting can proceed without chipping, spalling or tearing, no later than 12 hours after placement. Saw as soon as possible to prevent erratic or uncontrolled cracking and prior to the development of shrinkage cracking. Transverse joints to be perpendicular to centerline. First joints sawed approximately 60 feet apart, intermediate joints sawed after initial joints. Suitable guidelines shall be provided to ensure joint is straight and true to line. 3. Curb and gutter, sidewalk and pan joints shall have tooled radii per current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.. 4. Longitudinal joints, including tie bars if required, shall conform with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 5. Fabricated steel or plastic strip held rigidly in place. B. Construction joints shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and, if required, tie bars shall be installed. Transverse construction joints shall be planned to coincide with a contraction joint location. 1. Joints constructed by forms with tie bars. C. Expansion joints with preformed joint filler in a vertical position, deviating not more than 1/4" from a straight line. Install at all existing and proposed structures projecting through, into, or against pavement, in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. D. Install joint sealant in all joints, at temperatures above 50 degrees F., in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all dust, debris and water from joint. Rigid Pavement 02750 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.10 THICKNESS Remove and replace work less than 95% of thickness according to drawings at Contractor's expense. 3.11 CLEANUP After completing concrete operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess materials, and clean work area. 3.12 OPENING TO TRAFFIC Pavement shall not be opened to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed and the concrete has achieved a flexural strength of 650 psi. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: All testing, with the exception of slump tests, shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory. The following tests and procedures are subject to change during construction at the discretion of the Engineers. B. Testing Laboratory: The selection of a testing laboratory for any of the following tests shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. C. Testing Priority: Control tests shall be used to determine the concrete quality throughout the project,however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests. D. Slump Tests: Provide all necessary equipment and make tests in conformity with ASTM C143 at a minimum frequency as indicted by CDOT specifications, with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer. Provide for tests to be made by a person thoroughly familiar with the requirements specified. Reject batch if slump excess the limits specified. Keep accurate record of time, location in the work, and the results of all slump tests. Make available for inspection by the Engineer. E. Control Tests: Control tests of concrete work, as a minimum, shall be made at such times and in such manner as indicated by CDOT specifications, with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. For this project, each test shall consist of 5 standard 6" test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C172. Compressive strength samples shall be obtained at a minimum frequency of one sampling per day and more if deemed necessary by materials testing organization. Two cylinders shall be broken at the end of 7 days after placing and three cylinders shall be broken 28 days after placing. The Engineer reserves the right to stop all future concrete work when the 7 or 28-day tests indicate unsatisfactory results; until, in his opinion, proper corrective measures have been taken to assure quality concrete in future work. Tests shall be made at the time test cylinders are taken, and recorded on the reports to determine the slump, air content, unit weight, and temperature of the concrete. All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C39, ASTM C138 or ASTM C231. F. Maturity metering: When maturity metering is required, each pour shall include the necessary wires and connectors for maturity meter monitoring. Rigid Pavement 02750 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.14 PROTECTION General: Protect all exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. Protect freshly placed concrete against rain damage. Protect all concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping and other damage during progress of work, and leave in good condition upon completion. END OF SECTION 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT Rigid Pavement 02750 - 11 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS PART GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Work of this section generally includes provisions for joints for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs,pans, stairs and curb and gutter; and saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavements for new joints. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 02300 B. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 02752 C. Flexible Pavement: Section 02740 D. Rigid Pavement: Section 2750 1.3 MEASUREMENT A. No measurement will be made for street pavement load transfer expansion joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. B. No measurement will be made for saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavement or concrete curbs for new joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. C. No measurement will be made for formed, tooled or sawed street pavement contraction joints; construction joints and non-load transfer expansion joints regardless of material. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. D. No measurement will be made for jointing in concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs,pans, stairs and curb and gutter. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet—Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM D994—Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). C. ASTM D1751 —Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction(Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). Concrete Paving Joints 02751-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. ASTM D6690— Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants,Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements E. ASTM D5893 —Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. F. AASHTO M 254 -Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant Coated Dowel Bars G. AASHTO M 284-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. B. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. C. If tie bars are required, submit method of tie bar placement. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Foam Expansion Joint Material: Polyethylene foam conforming to ASTM D4819. Provide with a pre-scored removal strip or removable cap for creating the joint sealant reservoir. B. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous composition material conforming to ASTM D994 and ASTM D1751. Provide with a pre-scored removal strip or removable cap for creating the joint sealant reservoir. C. Joint Sealing: Silicon based mastic, color to match paving, conforming to ASTM D5893 or Hot Applied conforming to ASTM D6690. All joint sealing to conform to manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. D. Dowel Bars and Tie Bars (if required) 1. Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 2. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conformto AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40, epoxy coated, deformed steel bars. Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter, the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. Concrete Paving Joints 02751-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 E. Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal or concrete supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as needed to adequately maintain reinforcing location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Concrete jointing shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on plans and details. If the contractor proposes variations or the project has unusual or irregular conditions not covered, the contractor shall prepare a pavement jointing plan for approval by the Engineer. B. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete,place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement, or as shown on jointing plan if jointing plan has been prepared for the project. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes,but in no case shall a transverse construction joint be constructed within 2 feet of another transverse joint. If 2' long slab cannot be provided, remove concrete back to preceding joint and place standard transverse construction joint bulkhead. Transverse construction joints, and tie bars if required, shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. B. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes. Place longitudinal construction joints at the exterior edge of pavement lanes where pavement is placed adjacent to concrete pans or curb and gutter. Longitudinal construction joints, and tie bars if required, shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Place '/2-inch preformed joint filler expansion joints at locations indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and at all existing or proposed structures and features projecting through, into or against the pavement, or as located in adjacent pavement. For concrete pavement,use boards no shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use no more than 2 lengths of board. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape board filler accurately to cross-section of concrete slab. Thicken pavement and provide jointing around inlets,manholes and other fixed structures per current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Seal joint in conformance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.4 CONTRACTION(WEAKENED PLANE)JOINTS A. Place transverse contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Joints for concrete pavement and Concrete Paving Joints 02751-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 pans shall be tooled or sawed to a depth of 1/3 the concrete thickness. Additional joint depths are as specified below. If dowel bars are required, they shall be installed within the tolerances and of the size, spacing and locations as indicated in the CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Dowel bars shall be furnished in a rigid welded assembly securely fastened to the sub-base and constructed to firmly hold all the dowel bars at the specified depth and parallel to each other and pavement grade and alignment B. Place longitudinal contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Joints shall be tooled or sawed to the depth specified. If tie bars are required,they shall be installed to the size, spacing and location as indicated in the CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.5 SAWED JOINTS A. Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to tooled joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line joint a minimum of 1/8 inch wide. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Saw joints at required spacing in sequence with concrete placement. The time of sawing shall be determined by the Contractor to prevent random cracking and raveling from the sawing. If uncontrolled cracking begins during or prior to joint sawing,the Contractor shall move sawing operations ahead, and if necessary, provide additional sawing units to prevent uncontrolled cracking. If concrete is snowmelted, care shall be taken to not damage any snowmelt tubing or heat trace. B. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.6 JOINTS FOR CURB, CURB AND GUTTER,AND PANS A. Place '/Z- inch preformed joint filler expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of adjacent expansion joints in pavement; at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and between concrete curb or pan and any fixed structure or bridge. Provide 1/8-inch wide joints on 10-foot centers, or, if curb or curb and gutter is poured adjacent to a concrete sidewalk, provide joints at every other sidewalk joint (maximum spacing of 12-feet). Joint depth shall be 1/4 of the gutter thickness and 1/3 of the pan thickness. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement, transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. 3.7 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS A. Provide Y2-inch preformed joint filler expansion joints at intervals of not more than 500 feet and between sidewalk and any fixed structure, including utility penetrations. Extend the expansion joint material full depth of the sidewalk. Provide 1/8-inch wide joints, extending 1/4 the depth of the sidewalk, at intervals approximately equal to the width of the sidewalk. Concrete Paving Joints 02751-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.8 JOINT SEALING(all joints shall be sealed) A. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F and less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B. Joint sealing equipment shall be in first class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow,brooms, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C. Thoroughly clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust, residue, curing compound and other foreign material that will prevent bonding of the joint sealant. Compressed air, if used, shall be free of oil. The term joint includes wide joint spaces, contraction joints, construction joints, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Install backer rod and fill joints neatly with joint sealer per the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Provide sufficient joint sealer so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Maintain joints in good condition until completion of work. B. Replace damaged joint material with new materials as required by this Section. END OF SECTION 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS Concrete Paving Joints 02751-5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING PART GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section includes curing of Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork—Section 02300 B. Rigid Pavement—Section 02750 C. Concrete Paving Joints—Section 02751 1.3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 171 —Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. B. AASHTO M 148—Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. C. AASHTO M 182 -Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for cover materials and liquid membrane-forming compounds. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. If concreting occurs during cold weather as defined in Section 02753, concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of Section 02753. 2. If concreting occurs during hot weather as defined in Section 02754, concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of Section 02754. PART 2 PRODUCTS, CURING MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: 2.1 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 Concrete Paving Curing 02752-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 C. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/4 of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 2.2 LIQUID MEMBRANE—FORMING COMPOUNDS A. Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to AASHTO M 148. Membrane shall be Type 2 for non-colored concrete and Type 1 for colored concrete and shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 Kg/m of surface in 72 hours. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. When the ambient temperature is below 35°F the Contractor shall maintain the concrete temperature above 50°during the curing period. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine for himself the necessity for undertaking protective measures. B. The minimum curing period shall be determined by one of the following methods. The Engineer shall review for adequacy,the Contractor's determination of the curing period. 1. The minimum curing period shall be 120 hours 2. The minimum curing period shall be from the time the concrete has been placed until the concrete has met a compressive strength of 80 percent of the required field compressive strength. The Contractor shall cast information cylinders on the final portion of a placement and store as close to the structure as possible. The information cylinders shall receive similar thermal protection as the structure. The Contractor shall protect the information cylinders from damage. hi-place strength shall be determined by at least two cylinders. If the information cylinders are destroyed in the field,the minimum curing period shall be 120 hours. C. Immediately after placing fresh concrete, all concrete shall be cured by one of the following methods. The Engineer shall review for adequacy, the curing method proposed by the Contractor. 3.2 WATER METHOD A. All surfaces other than slabs shall be protected from the sun and the whole structure shall be kept wet throughout the curing period. All concrete slabs shall be covered as soon as possible with suitable material so that concrete is kept thoroughly wet for at least five(5) days. The concrete surface shall be kept moist at all times by fogging with an atomizing nozzle until the covering is places. Concrete Paving Curing 02752-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.3 MEMBRANE FORMING CURING COMPOUND METHOD A. A volatile organic content(VOC) compliant curing compound conforming to AASHTO M148,Type 2 shall be used on surfaces where curing compound is allowed, except that Type 1 curing compound shall be used on exposed aggregate or colored concrete, or when directed by the Engineer. Curing compound shall not be used on construction joints. The rate of application of curing compound will be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation,but shall not be more than 300 square feet per gallon. All concrete cured by this method shall receive two applications of the curing compound. The first coat shall be applied immediately after stripping of forms and acceptance of the concrete finish. If the surface is dry, the concrete shall be thoroughly wet with water and the curing compound applied just as the surface film of water disappears. The second application shall be applied after the first application has set. During curing operations, all unsprayed surfaces shall be kept wet with water. The coating shall be protected against marring for a period of at least ten days after application. Coating marred, or otherwise disturbed, shall be given an additional coating. When using a curing compound, the compound shall be thoroughly mixed within an hour before use. If the use of a curing compound results in a streaked or blotchy appearance, its use shall be discontinued. Water curing shall then be applied until the cause of the defective appearance is corrected. 3.4 BLANKET METHOD A. Electrically heated curing blanket or insulation blankets may be used in cold weather to maintain specified curing temperature and to retain moisture in concrete. Blankets shall be lapped at least 8-inches and shall be free of holes. Blankets shall be secured at laps and edges to prevent moisture from escaping. END OF SECTION 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING Concrete Paving Curing 02752-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02753 ACI 306.1-90 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 1 -GENERAL 1.1 - Scope 1.1.1 This Standard Specification covers requirements for cold weather concreting and protection of concrete from freezing during the specified protection period. 1.1.2 The provision of this Standard Specification shall govern unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 1.2. -Definitions These definitions are to assist in interpreting the provisions of this specification. Accepted-Accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer. Engineer-The engineer or engineering firm issuing Project Drawings and Specifications,or administering the Work under the Contract Documents. Cold weather-A period when for more than three successive days the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 F. The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. When temperatures above 50 F occur during more than half of any 24 hr duration, the period shall no longer be regarded as cold weather. Cold weather concreting-Operations concerning the placing, finishing, curing, and protection of concrete during cold weather. Contractor-The person, firm, or corporation with whom the Owner enters into an agreement for construction of the Work. Contract documents-Documents including the Project Drawings and Project Specifications covering the required Work. Day-A time period of 24 consecutive hours. Owner-The corporation, association,partnership, individual, or public body or authority with whom the Contractor enters into an agreement and for whom the Work is provided. Project drawings-The drawings, which along with the Project Specifications, complete the descriptive information for constructing the Work required or referred to in the Contract Documents. Project specifications-The written documents which specify requirements for a project in accordance with the service parameters and other specific criteria established by the Owner. Protection period-The required time during which the concrete is maintained at or above a specific temperature in order to prevent freezing of the concrete or to ensure the necessary strength development for structural safety. Reference standards- Standards of a technical society, organization, or association, including the codes of local or state authorities,which are referenced in the Contract Documents. Required-Required by this Specification or the Contract Documents. Submitted- Submitted to the Engineer for review. Work- The entire construction or separately identifiable parts thereof which are required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing labor, and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. Cold Weather Concreting 02753- 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 1.3 -Reference organizations ACI: American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit,MI 48219 ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 1.4 -Reference standards 1.4.1 ACI Standards 301-89 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 1.4.2 ASTM Standards C 31-88 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C 150-86 Standard Specification for Portland Cement C 494-86 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C 803-82 Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete C 873-85 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast in Place in Cylindrical Molds C 900-87 Standard Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete 1.5- Submittal of procedures 1.5.1 Detailed procedures -If required, submit detailed procedures for the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather. In the submittal, include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures. Do not begin cold weather concreting until these procedures have been reviewed and accepted. Minimum procedures for placement, curing and protection of the concrete shall follow the recommendations in ACI 306R, "Cold Weather Concreting."The details should include,but not be limited to, the following: a. Procedures for protecting the subgrade from frost and the accumulation of ice or snow on reinforcement or forms prior to placement. b. Methods for temperature protection during placement. C. Types of covering, insulation, housing, or heating to be provided. d. Curing methods to be used during and following the protection period. e. Use of strength accelerating admixtures. f. Methods for verification of in-place strength. g. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures. h. Procedures for preventing drying during dry, windy conditions. 2 --MATERIALS 2.1 Scheduling protection materials All materials and equipment required for protection shall be available at the project site before cold weather concreting. 2.2 -Concrete Concrete for slabs and other flatwork exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing in a wet condition during the construction period shall be air entrained. 3--EXECUTION 3.1 -Preparation before concreting Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which the concrete is Cold Weather Concreting 02753-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement, completely thaw the subgrade. Do not place concrete around massive embedments identified in the Contract Documents unless such embedments are at a temperature above freezing. 3.2 -Concrete temperature 3.2.1 Placement temperature-The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be as specified in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. The temperature of concrete as placed shall not exceed the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1 by more than 20F. Table 3.2.1 -Concrete temperature (1) (2) (3) Least dimension of Minimum temperature Maximum gradual section, in. of concrete as placed decrease in surface and maintained during temperature during protection period, °F any 24 h after end of protection, °F Less than 12 55 50 12 to less than 36 50 40 36 to 72 45 30 Greater than 72 40 20 3.2.2 Protection temperature-Unless otherwise specified, the minimum temperature of concrete during the protection period shall be as shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. Temperatures specified to be maintained during the protection period shall be those measured at the concrete surface,whether the surface is in contact with formwork, insulation, or air. Measure the temperature with a surface temperature measuring device having an accuracy of+/-2 F. Measure and record the temperature of concrete in each placement at regular time intervals at a frequency not less than twice per 24-hr period. 3.2.3 Termination of protection-The maximum decrease in temperature measured at the surface of the concrete in a 24-hour period shall not exceed the values shown in Column 3 of Table 3.2.1. Do not exceed these limits until the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperatures. When the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperature, all protection may be removed. 3.3 -Curing of concrete Prevent concrete from drying during the required curing period. If water curing is used, terminate use at least 24 hr before any anticipated exposure of the concrete to freezing temperatures. 3.4 -Protection of concrete 3.4.1 Combustion heaters -Vent flue gases from combustion heating units to the outside of the enclosure. 3.4.2 Overheating and drying-Place and direct heaters and ducts to avoid areas of overheating or drying of the concrete surface. 3.4.3 Maximum air temperature-During the protection period, do not expose the concrete surface to air having a temperature more than 20 F above the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1,unless higher values are required by an accepted curing method. 3.4.4 Protection against freezing-Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 3 days,unless otherwise specified. Maintain the surface temperature of the concrete during that period in accordance with Column 2 of Table 3.2.1,unless otherwise specified. The protection period may be reduced to 2 days if use of one or more of the following to alter the concrete mixture is accepted: • Type III portland cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150 Cold Weather Concreting 02753-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 • Elk strength accelerating admixture meeting the requirements of ASTM C 494 • 100 lb/yd3 of additional cement During periods not defined as cold weather,but when freezing temperatures may occur,protect concrete surfaces against freezing for the first 24 hr after placing. Any changes in the concrete mix proportions for reducing the duration of the protection period to prevent early freezing should be submitted for review or acceptance. 3.4.5 Protection deficiency-If the temperature requirements during the specified protection period are not met but the concrete was prevented from freezing, continue protection until twice the deficiency of protection in degree-hours is made up. Deficient degreehours may be determined by multiplying the average deficiency in temperature by the number of hours the temperature was below the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. APPENDIX-METRIC CONVERSIONS Inch-pound unit Factor S I unit In. x25.4 =mm Lb/yd' x0.5933 =kg/m' Psi x0.006895 =Mpa Temperature, °F (°F-32)/1.8 =°C Temperature interval°F °F/1.8 =°C END OF SECTION 02753 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING Cold Weather Concreting 02753-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02754 ACI 305.1-06 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING SECTION 1—GENERAL 1.1—Scope This Specification covers requirements for hot weather concrete construction. Provisions of this Specification shall govern, except where other provisions are specified in Contract Documents. This Specification shall not be used in conjunction with ACI 301 or ACI 530.1. 1.21teferenced standards 1.2.1 Standards of ACI and ASTM referred to in this Specification are listed with serial designation, including year of adoption or revision, and are part of this Specification. 1.2.2 ACI Standards 308.1-98 Standard Specification for Curing Concrete 1.2.3 ASTM Standards C 31/C31 M-03a Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C 39/C 39M-05 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens C 78-02 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete(Using Simple Beam with Third- Point Loading) C 94/C 94M-05 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete C 138/C 138M-01a Test Method for Density(Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content(Gravimetric)of Concrete C 143/C 143M-05a Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete C 171-03 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete C 173/C 173M-Olsl Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method C 192/C 192M-05 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory C 231-04 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method C 293-02 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete(Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading) C 1064/C 1064M-05 Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 1.2.4 Abbreviations for and complete names and addresses of organizations issuing documents referred to in this Specification are listed: American Concrete Institute(ACI) PO Box 9094 Farmington Hills,MI 48333-9094 Phone: (248) 848-3700 Fax: (248) 848-3701 website: www.concrete.org Hot Weather Concreting 02754- 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 ASTM International(ASTM) 100 Barr Harbor Dr West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 Phone: (610) 832-9500 Fax: (610) 832-9555 website: www.astm.org 1.3—Defmitions day—a period of 24 consecutive hours. evaporation retardant—a material that generates a continuous thin film when spread over water on the surface of fresh concrete and thus retards the evaporation of bleed water. hot weather—job-site conditions that accelerate the rate of moisture loss or rate of cement hydration of freshly mixed concrete, including an ambient temperature of 27 °C (80 °F) or higher, and an evaporation rate that exceeds 1 kg/m2/h, or as revised by the Engineer. hot weather concreting—operations concerning the preparation,production, delivery, placement, finishing,protection, and curing of concrete during hot weather. moist—slightly damp but not quite dry to the touch; "wet"implies visible free water, "damp"implies less wetness than"wet,"and"moist"implies not quite dry. protection period—the required time during which the concrete is protected against thermal cracking due to rapid temperature drops. temperature of fresh concrete—the temperature measured during the discharge and placement in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. temperature of hardened concrete—the temperature measured at the concrete surface. units—values stated in either U.S. Customary or SI units shall be regarded separately as standard. Values stated in each system might not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other,without combining values in any way. IASubmittal of procedures 1.4.1 Before hot weather concreting and the preplacement conference, submit to Engineer for review and comment detailed procedures, including production,placement, finishing, curing and protection of concrete during hot weather concreting. 1.51'replacement conference 1.5.1 At least 15 days before the start of the concrete construction schedule,hold a preplacement conference for the purpose of reviewing hot weather concreting requirements and mix designs. 1.5.2 Send a preplacement conference agenda on hot weather operations and procedures to representatives of concerned parties not less than 10 days before the scheduled date of the conference. 1.5.3 Preplacement conference shall include, but is not limited to,representation of Contractor, Concrete Subcontractor, Testing Agency, Pumping Contractor, and Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer. 1.5.4 Distribute the minutes of the preplacement conference to representatives of concerned parties within 5 days after the preplacement conference. 1.6—Documents required on site 1.6.1 Copies of ACI 305R, ACI 305.1, and ACI 308.1 must be available at the project site during concrete construction. SECTION 2—PRODUCTS 2.1—General 2.1.1 Store all materials and equipment required for curing and protection at or near the project site before hot weather concreting commences. Hot Weather Concreting 02754-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.1.2 Initial site curing of strength test specimens for acceptance—Provide facilities that ensure compliance with the initial curing requirements of ASTM C 31/C 31M. 2.2—Concrete mixture proportions 2.2.1 Submit concrete mixture proportions to Engineer for review. Include specific materials, manufacturer, and type for hot weather concreting. The submittal shall include concrete mixture adjustment parameters and methods to be implemented during changes in weather conditions. SECTION 3—EXECUTION 3.1—General 3.1.1 Do not place concrete against surfaces of absorbent materials that are dry. Do not place concrete against surfaces that have free water. 3.1.2 Prepare all materials required for accepted evaporation control measures and have them available on site so that specified measures can be executed as necessary. 3.1.3 Initiate accepted evaporation control measures when concrete and air temperatures,relative humidity of the air, and the wind velocity have the capacity to evaporate water from a free water surface at a rate that is equal to or greater than 1.0 kg/m2/h(0.2 lb/ft2/h),unless otherwise specified. Determine the evaporation rate of surface moisture by use of the Menzel Formula: W= 0.315(eo–ea)(0.253 +0.0601) [SI units] W=0.44(eo–ea)(0.253 +0.096V) [U.S. Customary units] where W=mass of water evaporated in kg(lb)per m2 (ft2) of water-covered surface per hour; eo=saturation water vapor pressure in kPa(psi)in the air immediately over the evaporating surface, at the temperature of the evaporating surface. Obtain this value from Table 3.1(a) or(b). The temperature of the evaporating surface shall be taken as the concrete temperature; ea=water vapor pressure in kPa(psi) in the air surrounding the concrete. Multiply the saturation vapor pressure at the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete by the relative humidity of the air. Air temperature and relative humidity are to be measured at a level approximately 1.2 to 1.8 in(4 to 6 ft) above the evaporating surface on the windward side and shielded from the sun's rays; and V=average wind speed in km/h(mph), measured at 0.5 in(20 in.) above the evaporating surface. 3.1.3.1 Monitor site conditions (air temperature, humidity, wind speed)to assess the need for evaporation control measures beginning no later than 1 hour before the start of concrete placing operations. Continue to monitor site conditions at intervals of 30 minutes or less until specified curing procedures have been applied. 3.1.3.2 For measuring the rate of evaporation of surface moisture, use equipment or instruments that are certified by the manufacturer as accurate to within 1 °C (2 °F), 5%relative humidity, and 1.6 km/h(1 mph)wind speed. Use equipment in accordance with the product manufacturer recommendations. Table 3.1(a)—Saturation water vapor pressure(kPa) over water(SI units) Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, °C pressure,kPa temperature, °C pressure,kPa 4 0813 28 3.78 5 0.872 29 4.01 6 0.934 30 4.24 7 1.00 31 4.49 Hot Weather Concreting 02754-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, °C pressure,kPa temperature, °C pressure,kPa 8 1.07 32 4.75 9 1.15 33 5.03 10 1.23 34 5.32 11 1.31 35 5.62 12 1.40 36 5.94 13 1.50 37 6.28 14 1.60 38 6.63 15 1.70 39 6.99 16 1.82 40 7.38 17 1.94 41 7.78 18 2.06 42 8.20 19 2.20 43 8.64 20 2.34 44 9.10 21 2.49 45 9.58 22 2.64 46 10.1 23 2.81 47 10.6 24 2.98 48 11.2 25 3.17 49 11.7 26 3.36 50 12.3 27 3.56 Data source: CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 68th Edition, 1987, mathematically converted into kPa. Table 3.1(b)-Saturation water vapor pressure(psi)over water(U.S. Customary units) Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, °F pressure,psi temperature, °F pressure,psi 40 0.121 81 0.523 41 0.127 82 0.542 42 0.132 83 0.559 43 0.137 84 0.577 44 0.143 85 0.595 45 0.147 86 0.615 46 0.153 87 0.637 47 0.159 88 0.658 48 0.166 89 0.679 49 0.171 90 0.698 50 0.178 91 0.722 51 0.185 92 0.746 52 0.192 93 0.769 53 0.199 94 0.789 54 0.206 95 0.816 55 0.214 96 0.843 56 0.222 97 0.870 57 0.231 98 0.896 58 0.238 99 0.920 59 0.247 100 0.951 60 0.257 101 0.981 61 0.267 102 1.01 Hot Weather Concreting 02754-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, T pressure,psi temperature, T pressure,psi 62 0.277 103 1.04 63 0.285 104 1.07 64 0.296 105 1.10 65 0.308 106 1.13 66 0.319 107 1.17 67 0.327 108 1.20 68 0.339 109 1.24 69 0.352 110 1.27 70 0.366 111 1.31 71 0.378 112 1.35 72 0.388 113 1.39 73 0.403 114 1.43 74 0.418 115 1.47 75 0.433 116 1.52 76 0.443 117 1.56 77 0.459 118 1.60 78 0.476 119 1.65 79 0.494 120 1.70 80 0.510 Data source: CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 68th Edition, 1987, mathematically converted into T and psi. 3.2Maximum allowable concrete temperature 3.2.1 Limit the maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature to 35 °C (95 °F), unless otherwise specified, or unless a higher allowable temperature is accepted by Engineer, based upon past field experience or preconstruction testing using a concrete mixture similar to one known to have been successfully used at a higher concrete temperature. 3.2.2 Measure the fresh concrete temperature at the point and time of discharge in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Frequency of temperature determination shall be in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M and at the option of the inspector. 3.3 Qualification of concrete mixture proportions 3.3.1 Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature, supported by past field experience of Section 3.2.1, shall be based, on similar climate and production conditions,materials, mixture proportions and temperatures,placing and finishing methods, and concrete delivery time. 3.3.2 Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature, supported by preconstruction testing of Section 3.2.1, shall require materials similar to those proposed for use in the project. 3.3.3 Laboratory trial batch—Batch the laboratory concrete trial mixture within 2 °C (3 °F) of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature and mix in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M, except as modified herein. If necessary, move the laboratory mixer into an enclosed,heated and ventilated space, or use heated mixing water, or both, to achieve and maintain the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature. For drum-type mixers, the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 47 minutes after completion of the 3-minute initial mixing period unless specified otherwise. During the 50- minute period, cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material, such as plastic, to prevent moisture loss, and rotate the mixer continuously at an agitation speed of 6 to 8 rpm. For laboratory mixers without speed adjustments, simulate agitation by rotating the mixer continuously at a drum angle between 45 and 75 degrees from horizontal. At the end of 50 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing Hot Weather Concreting 02754-5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 speed designated by the manufacturer(8 to 20 rpm) for 2 minutes. For pan-type mixers, the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 41 minutes after completion of the initial 3-minute mixing period. During the 44-minute period, the mixer shall cycle through periods of rest for 5 minutes, and then mixing for 1 minute. During the rest period, cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material, such as plastic, to prevent moisture loss. At the end of 44 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer(8 to 20 rpm) for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods for both drum type and pan-type mixers, the addition of water, chemical admixture, or both,to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded. As needed, check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 50-or 44-minute laboratory trial mixing period. 3.3.3.1 The proposed concrete mixture shall meet the specified slump range at the end of the laboratory mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. 3.3.4 Field trial batch—Batch the field concrete trial mixture within 2 °C (3 °F) of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature in a truck-mixer with a minimum batch size of 3 m3 (4 yd3). If necessary, move the truck mixer into an enclosed, heated, and ventilated space to achieve a concrete temperature within the specified tolerance of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature. The concrete mixture shall be held in the mixer for 90 minutes,unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. During the entire 90-11iinute period, agitate the mixer at 1 to 6 rpm. At the end of 90 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer(6 to 18 rpm) for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods, the addition of water, chemical admixture, or both,to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded. As needed, check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 90-minute mixing period. 3.3.4.1 The proposed concrete mixture shall be within the specified slump range at the end of the 90- minute field mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. 3.3.5 Test values obtained in accordance with the appropriate ASTM Standard shall include compressive strength(C 192/C 192M or C 31/C 31M, and C 39/C 39M), flexural strength(C 192/C 192M and either C 78 or C 293; C 31/C 31M and either C 78 or C 293), or both; slump (C 143/C 143M); air content(C 231, C 173/C 173M, or C 138/C 138M); concrete density(unit weight) (C 138/C 138M); and concrete temperature(C 1064/C 1064M). Slump, air content, and concrete and air temperature measurements shall be performed after initial mixing, intermediately as needed or as desired, and at the conclusion of the mixing period along with the other specified tests. 3.3.6 Acceptance of concrete mixture proportions—Submit to the Engineer for acceptance a request for a specific higher maximum allowable concrete temperature. Include the constituent materials and proportions of the proposed concrete mixture and all values obtained from past field experience or preconstruction testing. Test results shall be within the Project Specification ranges and tolerances. 3.4Concrete production and delivery 3.4.1 Concrete shall be produced at a temperature such that its maximum temperature at discharge will not exceed the specified maximum allowable concrete temperature. Acceptable production methods to reduce the temperature of the concrete include: shading aggregate stockpiles, sprinkling water on coarse aggregate stockpiles; using chilled water for concrete production; substituting chipped or shaved iced for portions of the mixing water; and cooling concrete materials using liquid nitrogen. The submittals for hot weather concreting shall indicate which methods will be used and in what order they will be initiated when multiple methods are to be used. The substitution of other cooling methods will be considered by the Engineer when requested in the submittal and accompanied by satisfactory supporting data. 3.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M,which requires the concrete to be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the truck-mixer drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first. Hot Weather Concreting 02754-6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.5—Concrete placement and finishing 3.5.1 Concrete placement and finishing operations shall proceed as quickly as conditions will permit. 3.6—Concrete bleed-water evaporation 3.6.1 Control concrete surface bleed-water evaporation with application of evaporation reducers,plastic sheeting, fog spray, or wind breaks. Use these materials and methods in accordance with ACI 308.1 Submit for approval the desired method to be used when concreting during periods with evaporation rates higher than permitted 3.7—Concrete curing 3.7.1 Concrete curing—Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1. 3.8Concrete protection 3.8.1 Protection period—Protect the concrete against thermal shrinkage cracking due to rapid drops in concrete temperature greater than 22 °C (40 °F) during the first 24 hours unless otherwise specified. 3.8.2 Protection materials—Acceptable protection materials to prevent excessive temperature drops are insulating blankets,batt insulation with moisture-proof covering, layers of dry porous material such as straw, hay, or multiple layers of impervious paper meeting ASTM C 171. These protection materials shall not be applied until the concrete surface temperature has become steady or is beginning to decline. END OF SECTION 02754 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING Hot Weather Concreting 02754-7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 02922 TOPSOIL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONS A. Work Included: Stripping of existing topsoil, storage in stockpiles, replacement of topsoil after other work is completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL Material stripped from site consisting of loose, friable loam, reasonably free of admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, rocks, brush, weeds, or other material detrimental to proper development of vegetative growth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION Remove all sod, topsoil, organic earth. Stockpile topsoil as designated on drawings, or directed by Engineer. 3.2 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT A. General: When job has been shaped and ready for placement of topsoil, cover all cut-fill areas and construction scars with topsoil to depth of 6". Contour all surfaces in accordance with drawings to blend with existing adjacent terrain. Deposit all excess topsoil in areas designated by Engineer. Grade, shape, fertilize, seed, and mulch designated topsoil waste area. B. Slope Rounding: Round top and bottom of slopes and feather into undisturbed natural terrain. Avoid abrupt grade changes by making smooth transitions from slopes to more level areas. C. Slope Molding: Avoid long, continuous slope faces by molding face of slope to accent existing adjacent terrain. Steepen slope faces near ridges and bluffs, laid back to link to natural draws, creating an undulating face. D. Surface Roughing: Gouge slope surfaces of 4:1 or steeper with horizontal ridges and trenches to minimum depth of 6", creating roughened surface to lessen erosion, improve moisture percolation, and soil-layer binding. Trenches or ridges shall not be longer than 30' to prevent water accumulation or flowing water to cause rivulets. END OF SECTION 02922 TOPSOIL Topsoil 02922-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design,placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. D. Verification Samples: For seamless epoxy quartz and marble-chip flooring, submit two samples 4 by 4 inches (102mm by 102mm) in size illustrating color, chip size and variation, and matrix color,representing actual product scheduled. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Material certificates. C. Material test reports. D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D I A/D I AM, "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel." CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Seamless Epoxy Quartz and Marble-Chip Flooring Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be performed by an applicator approved by the manufacturer of the flooring surfacing materials. The Contractor shall furnish a certified installer certificate. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. H. Formwork: Design and engineering of formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. I. Mockups: Provide a mockup of at least 50 sq. ft. (4.2 sq. m) for the seamless epoxy quartz and marble-chip flooring for evaluation of surface preparation techniques, application workmanship and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard ten (10) year warranty for seamless epoxy quartz and marble- chip flooring. Include coverage for delamination of floor and base materials ftom substrate and degradation of surface finish. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire,plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/11, gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch(19 mm)nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq. m)when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not more than 20 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture per Structural General Notes. 2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C),reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.11 SEAMLESS EPDXY QUARTZ AND MARBLE-CHIP FLOORING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following. 1. Everlast Epoxy Flooring Company. B. Materials: 1. Everlast Floor: A 100 percent solids epoxy, marble-chip and quartz aggregate that is a troweled in place, evenly textured, slip-resistant finish of between 1/8 inch (3 mm) and 3/16 inch(4.8 mm)thickness including select quartz and marble-chip aggregate fillers. a. Base: A three-component, integral troweled base and cove consisting of manufacturer's Everlast Floor resin and hardener, silica quartz and marble-chip aggregates as used in the floor, and finely graded silica aggregate, 6 inches (152 mm)height. b. Color: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer's Standard Color Range. 2. Everlast Glaze: High performance, chemical resistant, two-component clear sealer. The finish shall be manufacturer's "Super Anti-Skid Finish" — Everlast Floor with 1 coat of Everlast Glaze with coarse anti-skid broadcast into the during application. C. Location: Seamless Epoxy Quartz and Marble-Chip Flooring shall be installed at the Men's Restroom(Room E01) and Women's Restroom(Room E02) identified on the floor plans. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches(150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch(4.8 mm). C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI301 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float finishing. C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1,by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 3.11 SEAMLESS EPDXY QUARTZ AND MARBLE-CHIP FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Examination and Preparation: Contractor and Installer shall examine and prepare the substrate where to receive seamless epoxy quartz and marble-chip flooring per the recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Application: Apply flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch(3 mm). Finish to smooth level surface sloped to drains. C. Provide base and cove at vertical surfaces to height of 6 inches (152 mm). D. Apply Everlast Glaze and anti-skid surfacing. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Tolerance: Maximum variation from flat surface shall be 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m). F. Protection: Protect finished installation during construction and until completion of project. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surfaces for 42 hours. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement and embedments. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. Inspect the first concrete placement of footings and walls. Inspect each truck for correct mix design, addition of water to each truck and subsequent mixing, cleanliness of forms, concrete vibration, concrete finishing and concrete curing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample of each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement of each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample at point of placement, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/ C 1064M; one test hourly when and temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test of each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one cylinder at 7 days and two cylinders at 28 days. Hold one cylinder and test at 56 days if 28-day strength is not achieved. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive-strength by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa). 8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive- strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests, concrete supplier and mix ID number. Also include amount of water added at site prior to sampling, ambient air CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 temperature, and concrete wet unit weight. Include time concrete was hatched and time when placement was finished. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 033543 -DIAMOND POLISHING CONCRETE FLOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Products and procedures for coloring and diamond polishing concrete floors using multi-step wet/dry mechanical process, and accessories indicated, specified, or required to complete polishing. B. The final finish is to match that installed at the recently completed "East Restrooms". If any information contained herein alters or otherwise changes the performance or appearance of the finished concrete product, it should be brought to the attention of the Owner and Architect prior to completion of the work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined by CPAA. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Installer Qualifications: Data for company, principal personnel, experience, and training specified in PART 1 "Quality Assurance"Article. B. Maintenance Data: For inclusion in maintenance manual required by Division 01. 1. Include manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. 2. Include precautions against cleaning products and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Polisher Qualifications: 1. Experience: Company experienced in performing specified work similar in design, products, and extent to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce specified work. 2. Supervision: Maintain competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified work is in progress, and is currently certified as Craftsman or Master Craftsman by CPAA. 3. Manufacturer Qualification: Approved by manufacturer to apply liquid applied products. B. Field Mock-up for Aesthetic Purposes: Floor installed at recently completed"East Restrooms" 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Damage and Stain Prevention: Take precautions to prevent damage and staining of concrete surfaces to be polished. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 033543 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Prohibit vehicle parking over concrete surfaces to be polished. 2. Prohibit pipe cutting operations over concrete surfaces to be polished. 3. Prohibit storage of any items over concrete surfaces to be polished for not less than 28 days after concrete placement. 4. Prohibit ferrous metals storage over concrete surfaces to be polished. 5. Protect from petroleum, oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquid dripping from equipment working over concrete surfaces to be polished. 6. Protect from acids and acidic detergents contacting concrete surfaces to be polished. 7. Protect from painting activities over concrete surfaces to be polished. B. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting liquid applied product application. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LIQUID APPLIED PRODUCTS A. Liquid Densifier: Odorless, non-hazardous, silicate that penetrates concrete to react with free lime and calcium hydroxide to produce permanent chemical reaction that hardens and densifies concrete surface. B. Dyes: Extremely fine molecules of color solvent or dye for mixing with water or acetone that is designed to penetrate and color concrete surface. C. Pigmented Microstains: Extremely fine pigment particles in a water-based silicate solution that penetrates concrete and reacts with calcium hydroxide to lock in color particles. D. Polish Guard: Non-film forming, stain resistant, food resistant, chemical stain resistant, impregnating sealant designed to be used on concrete surfaces previously densified. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Patching Compound: Compound composed of 40 percent portland cement, 45 percent limestone, and 15 percent vinyl acetate copolymer, when mixed with dust salvaged from grinding process forms a paste that hardens when surface imperfections are filled. B. Grout Material: Clear modified silicate sealant, containing no pore clogging latex, when mixed with dust salvaged from grinding process forms a paste that reacts with calcium hydroxide in concrete that hardens when surface imperfections are filled. C. Protective Cover: Non-woven, puncture and tear resistant,polypropylene fibers laminated with a multi-ply,textured membrane,not less than 18 mils in thickness. 2.3 POLISHING EQUIPMENT A. Field Grinding and Polishing Equipment: 1. Variable speed, multiple head, counter-rotating, walk-behind machine with not less than 600 pounds of down pressure on grinding or diamond polishing pads. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 033543 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. If dry grinding, honing, or polishing, use dust extraction equipment with flow rate suitable for dust generated,with squeegee attachments. B. Edge Grinding and Polishing Equipment: Hand-held or walk-behind machines which produces same results,without noticeable differences, as field grinding and polishing equipment. C. Burnishing Equipment: High speed walk-behind or ride-on machines capable of generating 1000 to 2000 revolutions per minute and with sufficient head pressure of not less than 20 pounds to raise floor temperature by 20 degrees F. D. Metal Bonded Pads: Grinding pads with embedded industrial grade diamonds of varying grits fabricated for mounting on equipment. E. Resin Bonded Pads: Polishing pads with embedded industrial grade diamonds of varying grits fabricated for mounting on equipment. F. Burnishing Pads: Maintenance pads for use with high speed burnishing equipment. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: 1. Examine substrates to be polished for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 2. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. 3. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning New Concrete Surfaces: 1. Prepare and clean concrete surfaces. 2. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, paint splatter, and other contaminants incompatible with liquid applied products and polishing. 3.3 VAPOR TESTING CONCRETE FLOORS A. Alkalinity: 1. Test Method: Measure pH according to method indicated in ASTM F 710. 2. Acceptable Results: pH between 8 and 10. B. Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate: 1. Test Method: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. 2. Acceptable Results: Not more than 5 pounds per 1000 square feet in 24 hours. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 033543 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Relative Humidity: 1. Test Method: Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. 2. Acceptable Results: Not more than 75 percent. 3.4 COLORING CONCRETE FLOORS A. Dye or Pigmented Microstain Application: 1. Apply solution by methods and techniques required by manufacturer to produce finish matching approved mock-ups. 2. Maintain wet edge, working newly applied solution into edges of adjacent wet edges of previously treated surfaces. 3. Maintain consistent saturation throughout application. 4. Avoid splashing, dripping, or puddling of solution on adjacent substrates. 5. When color matches approved mock-ups,neutralize as required by manufacturer. 3.5 POLISHING CONCRETE FLOORS A. Sequence of Polishing: Perform polishing before partitions are erected B. Initial Grinding: 1. Use grinding equipment with metal bonded grinding pads. 2. Begin grinding in one direction using sufficient size grit pad. 3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit pad with each pass,up to 150 grit. 4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit pads. 5. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment after each pass. 6. Continue grinding until aggregate exposure matches approved field mock-ups. C. Treating Surface Imperfections: 1. Mix patching compound and grout material with dust created by grinding operations to match color of adjacent concrete surface. 2. Fill surface imperfections including, but not limited to, holes, surface damage, small and micro cracks, air holes,pop-outs, and voids. 3. Work compound and treatment until color differences between concrete surface and filled surface imperfections are not reasonably noticeable when viewed from 10 feet away under lighting conditions that will be present after construction. D. Liquid Densifier Application: Apply undiluted to point of rejection, remove excess liquid, and allow to cure according to manufacturers instructions. E. Grout Grinding: 1. Use grinding equipment and appropriate grit grinding pads. 2. While applying fresh grout material prior to, grind concrete in direction perpendicular to initial grinding to remove scratches. 3. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment after each pass. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 033543 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 F. Honing: 1. Use grinding equipment with resin bonded grinding pads. 2. Grind concrete in one direction starting with 50 grit pad and make as many sequential passes required to remove scratches, each pass perpendicular to previous pass, up to 400 grit pad reaching maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit pads. 3. Auto scrub or vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment after each pass. G. Polishing: 1. Use polishing equipment with resin bonded polishing and burnishing pads. 2. Begin polishing in one direction starting with 800 grit pad. 3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit pad with each pass,up to 3000 grit. 4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit pads. 5. Auto scrub or vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment after each pass. 6. Continue polishing until gloss appearance, as measured according to ASTM E 430, matches approved field mock-ups. H. Polish Guard: Uniformly apply and remove excessive liquid according to manufacturer's instructions. I. Final Polish: Using burnishing equipment and finest grit burnishing pads, burnish to uniform sheen matching approved mock-up. J. Final Polished Concrete Floor Finish: 1. Class B —Fine Aggregate (Salt and Pepper) Finish: Remove not more than 1/16 inch of concrete surface by grinding and polishing resulting in majority of exposure displaying fine aggregate with no, or small amount of,medium aggregate at random locations. 2. Level 2—Medium Gloss Appearance: a. Procedure: Not less than 5 step process with full refinement of each diamond pad up to 800 grit resin bonded pad with one application of densifier. b. Gloss Reading: Not less than 55 according to ASTM E 430 before polish guard application. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing: Engage a qualified walkway auditor to perform field testing according to NFSI 101-A to determine if polished concrete floor finish complies with specified static coefficient of friction. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Maintenance Training: CPAA Master Craftsman shall train Owner's designated personnel in proper procedures for maintaining polished concrete floor. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 033543 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.8 PROTECTION A. Covering: After completion of polishing, protect polished floors from subsequent construction activities with protective covering. END OF SECTION DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 033543 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units(CMU's). 2. Steel reinforcing bars. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. 3. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." C. Samples: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties. B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200- 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Standard: Comply with AC1530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated,provide units that comply with requirements for fire- resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,bonding, and other special conditions. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units and where indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. C. Grace Construction Products,W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi(19.3 MPa). 2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated. D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi(19.3 MPa). 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Pattern and Texture: a. Scored vertically, standard finish. Match Existing construction. 2.3 MASONRY LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout shall be extracted,harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or 11, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick,use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Euclid Chemical Compan_ (The);Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products,W. R. Grace& Co. - Conn.; Morset. C. Sonneborn Products,BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA. 1. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. ACM Chemistries,Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. C. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. J. Water: Potable. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Mill-galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch(3.77-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch(3.77-mm) diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch(3.77-mm) diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet(3 m). 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch(7.6 to 12.7 mm) and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm) made from 0.075-inch- (1.90-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch(25 mm) of masonry face. D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200- 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing or Copper Sealtite 2000. 2) Da, on Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru- Wall Flashing. 3) Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.; H&B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co.,Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) York Manufacturing.;Multi-Flash 500. 2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch(0.76 mm). a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.;Peel-N-Seal. 2) Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru- Wall Flashing. 4) Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.;Aquaflash 500. 5) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 6) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. 7) Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.; Textroflash. 8) W. R. Meadows,Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. 9) Polyguard Products, Inc.;Polyguard 300 or Polyguard 400. 10) Sandell Manufacturing Co.,Inc.; Sando-Seal. 11) Williams Products,Inc.;Everlastic MF-40. C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry,use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry,use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth,use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry,use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats,use Type S or Type N. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated,use Type N. 5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions,Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated,but not less than 3000 psi(14 MPa). 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch(12 mm). CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm)in a story height or 1/2 inch(12 mm)total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm)maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm)maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm)maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm)maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm)maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm),with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch(12 mm). 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch(9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm). 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm). 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath,wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200- 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint)unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches(406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch(25 mm)wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c.horizontally. 3.6 FLASHING A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm)to form end dams. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. 3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 12.67 ft. (3.86 m). 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. H. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 3.9 PARGING A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch(19 mm). B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 11 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.10 REPAIRING,POINTING,AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm)of finished grade. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 12 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 044313.16-ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stone masonry adhered to concrete backup. 2. Stone masonry adhered to unit masonry backup. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for concealed flashing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Samples: 1. For each stone type indicated. 2. For each color of mortar required. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C)and above and will remain so until masonry has dried. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.VASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SANDSTONE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 616, Classification I Sandstone. ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Regional Materials: Sandstone shall be fabricated within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from stone that has been extracted within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1. Rustic Stone-Colorado Buff random width,random height natural cleft face strip stone 2. Stone Caps -2"Colorado Buff natural cleft cap stone 3. Cut Stone - Colorado Buff Cut Stone thin stone veneer 4", 8" and 12" heights -with a single Honed 4"band Colorado Flagstone 4301 North County Road 27 Loveland, CO 80538 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Citadel Type S. b. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Masonry Cement or Lafarge Masonry Cement. C. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement. d. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. E. Water: Potable. 2.3 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing,where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M,Type 304, 0.016 inch(0.4 mm)thick. ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Cementitious Dampproofing: Cementitious formulation recommended by ILI and nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anchors and attachments. B. Weep Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope,made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch(6 to 10 nun)in diameter. C. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m), self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180). 2.5 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies,Inc. b. Dominion Restoration Products. C. EaCo Chem, Inc. d. Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. e. Prosoco,Inc. 2.6 SEALANT A. Phylon WB by Tnemec: Apply Sealant to all stone caps and thin stone veneer applications as indicated on the drawings. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Cut, Split or Select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings. B. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. (522 sq. cm)in area. C. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated,but not less than the following: 1. Thickness of Rustic Stone: 2 inch(25 mm)plus or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm). 2. Thickness of Stone Caps: 1-1/2 inch 3. Thickness of Cut Stone: 1 inch D. Shape stone for type of masonry(pattern)as follows: ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Rustic Stone: Roughly square,random rubble 2. Cut Stone: Sawed-bed, broken-range ashlar with uniform course heights as indicated on Drawings and with random lengths. E. Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples. 1. Finish of Rustic Stone:Natural cleft 2. Finish of Stone Caps: Split face with sand-rubbed(honed)top and joints a. Finish exposed ends same as exposed faces 3. Finish of Cut Stone: Sand-rubbed(honed) 2.8 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270,Proportion Specification. 1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S. C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions. D. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a consistency similar to that of thick cream. 1. For latex-modified, portland cement, setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions. E. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency. F. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 7 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. 2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. 3. Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. C. Arrange stones: 1. Rustic Stone: in coursed rubble pattern with joint widths within tolerances indicated. Insert small stones into spaces between larger stones as needed, but kept to a minimum, to produce joints as uniform in width as practical 2. Cut Stone: in broken-range ashlar pattern with uniform course heights, random lengths, and uniform joint widths. D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance. E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. 1. Rustic Stone: Dry Stack appearance 2. Cut Stone: Lay walls with joints not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch (13 mm)at widest points. F. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. At multiwythe masonry walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and extend into or through inner wythe to comply with requirements in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." 2. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 6 inches, and insert in reglet 3. Terminate sheet metal flashing flush with masonry face at exterior, and turn flashing down to form a drip. 4. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch(13 mm)back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 5. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 6. Cut flexible flashing flush with wall face after completing masonry wall construction. H. Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate, including above shelf angles and at flashing. 1. Use wicking material to form weep holes. ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in stone sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches(600 mm) o.c. 4. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with exterior wall face after mortar has set. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(10 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch in 40 feet(13 mm in 12 m)or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m)or 1/2 inch in 40 feet(13 mm in 12 m) or more. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 1/2 inch in 40 feet(13 mm in 12 m)or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet(13 mm in 6 m)or 3/4 inch in 40 feet(19 mm in 12 m)or more. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER A. Install flashing over sheathing and behind weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing. B. Install lath over weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063. C. Install lath over unit masonry and concrete to comply with ASTM C 1063. D. Install scratch coat over metal lath 3/8 inch(10 mm)thick to comply with ASTM C 926. E. Coat backs of stone units and face of scratch coat or masonry backup with cement-paste bond coat, then butter both surfaces with setting mortar. Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess will be forced out the edges of stone units as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and scratch coat or masonry backup. F. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. 3.4 POINTING A. Tool joints,when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the following joint profile: 1. Joint Profile at Cut Stone: Smooth, flat face slightly below edges of stone. ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20,Revised 11,using job-mixed detergent solution. 3.6 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use. B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil- contaminated sand,by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm)of finished grade. END OF SECTION 044313.16 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes structural steel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and fabricator. B. Welding certificates. C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. D. Source quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. W-Shapes: [STM A 992/A 992M,ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50(345). C. Channels, Angles,M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon- steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish. B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy- hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon- steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel;AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight or Hooked. 2. Finish: Plain. E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554,Grade 36, straight. 1. Finish: Plain. F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Finish: Plain. G. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I,zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS Dl.l/Dl.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications,weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials(applied fireproofing). B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS Dl.l/Dl.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications,weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel tube railings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental railings fabricated from pipes and tubes. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(0.89 kN) applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(0.22 kN) applied in any direction b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color,texture, or design C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post,handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Wagner,R&B,Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks,rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL AND IRON A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 3. Provide flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring,patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage,but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut,reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 1. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. K. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch(6 mm)or less. L. Brackets, Flanges,Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. M. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. N. For railing posts set in concrete, provide sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 5. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 6. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes,by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. E. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting 1. Color: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet(2 mm in 1 m). PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm)of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 057500-DECORATIVE FORMED METAL PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work includes but is not limited to following: 1. Copper steel metal inverted seam roofing as indicated. 2. Internal concealed water-directing system—ALUMINUM 3. Flashing as indicated and/or required for complete watertight installation. 4. Associated matching accessories indicated or required. 5. Self-adhering membrane underlayment as indicated. 6. All concealed fasteners,gaskets and seals 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified including but not limited to following: 1. Section 072100—Thermal Insulation 2. Section 079200—Building Joint Sealants 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards COPPER ASTM B248 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip and Bar ASTM B 152 Specification for Commercially Pure Copper Sheet, Strip and Plate 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Finish metal panels to create a smooth,monolithic appearance. System to have internal concealed interlocking gutter system to control water infiltration through the inverted panel seams. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Sections 013300 the following: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data. 2. Samples: 4 ft square mockup of complete section of roof showing all components down to the decking. 3. Shop drawings: a. Show wall elevations and detail wall sections and transition points. b. Show siding panel layout,transitional corners,trim installation and panel attachment. C. Show profiles, details of perimeters,joint flashings and accessories that comply with Manufacturer's standard recommendations. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 d. Show details of weatherproofing at edges,terminations,transitional cor- ners, and penetrations of metal panel work. e. Include layout of fasteners and supports. £ Indicate flashings and closures. g. Describe all proposed details that deviate from what is shown on the plan. h. Detail to allow for expansion and contraction. i. All work points 4. Copy of proposed warranty including finish warranty. B. Submit in accordance with Section 017823: Operation and Maintenance Data instruc- tions for care and protection of the wall system during and after construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. To be"Specialist"and have a minimum of 10 years experience in supplying cus- tom metal work. 2. Accepted Manufacturer/Fabricator: Gordy's Custom Sheet Metal 1300 Mt.Massive Dr. Leadville, Co. 80461 Cell#970-319-2195 gssteadman@gmail.com 2. Acceptable product: Custom Inverted Seam by Gordy's Custom Sheet Metal. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. To be"Specialist: a. Installer must have successfully applied 5 projects of comparable size and complexity which reflect a quality and weather tight installation. b. Have been in business 5 years. C. Proof that workers performing the installation have a minimum 4 years experience in custom architectural metal work. d. Acceptable to the Manufacturer 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. In accordance with the following: 1. Protect against damage and discoloration. 2. Handle panels with non-marring slings. 3. Do not bend panels. 4. Store products in wood crates providing protection at the ends and edges. 5. Store panels above ground,with one end elevated for drainage. 6. Do not allow foreign material to come in contact with the surface of the panels while traveling or in storage. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 7. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent sur- faces. 8. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets,wipe dry with clean cloth, and allow to air dry. 9. Scratches, dents or dings visible on the surface will be cause for rejection of the product. Replacement of the panel at the cost of the contractor. 10. Protect the metal surface during fabrication, shipping and installation using a ul- traviolet resistant pvc film. Remove film after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a written 20 year Manufacturer's warranty covering material and workmanship. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with Specifications, and Manufacturer's data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: 1. Copper Alloy 2. Face sheet 0.032" 3. Gutter system Extruded aluminum 4. Stainless steel type AISI 310 for concealed fasteners. Finish: Dirty Penny B. Building Paper: FS UU-B-790, Grade B, Style 4. 2.03 A. Fabrication: 1. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels In continuous one-piece lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. 2. Fabricate related accessories from same material as panels. 3. All returns will have the drop and lock edges integral to the side returns. The drop and lock shall be produced to within 0.005"of the computer layouts. 4. Fabricate panels using computer controlled manufacturing equipment 5. Panels to have interlocking swedged ends. 6. Internal gutters will be continuous and draining to the base. 7. Panels will be protected with transparent pvc coating. 8. Dings, mars, and scratches on the surface will not be acceptable. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not in- stall until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Verify that members and/or substrate to receive panels are complete, accurately sized and located, in true plane, secure and otherwise properly prepared. 2. Substrates in which metal panel work is to be installed shall be level and true to avoid panel stresses. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Verify prior to fabrication. B. Protection: 1. Treat, or isolate with protective material, any contacting surfaces of dis-similar materials to prevent electrolytic corrosion. 2. Protect work of other trades against damage and discolorations caused by work of this Section. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces prior to applying joint sealant. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Specifications, and Manufacturer's directions. Where these may be a conflict,the more stringent requirements govern. B. Panel installation: 1. Follow panel manufacturer's directions. 2. Install panel seams as indicated on Drawings. 3. Do not stretch or compress panel side-lap interlocks. 4. Conceal edge flashings as detailed. 5. Secure panels without warp or deflection. 6. No exposed fasteners allowed. 7. Remove strippable protective film, immediately following panel installation. C. Allowable Erection Tolerance: 1. Maximum alignment variation: 0.25"in 40'. D. Flashing: Provide flashings,related closures, and accessories where indicated to pro- vide watertight installation. 1. Follow manufacturer's directions and accepted shop drawings. 2. Install flashings to allow for thermal movement. D. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Neat, square and true. Torch-cutting is not allowed. 2. Openings 6"and larger in any direction: Shop fabricate and reinforce to main- tain original load capacity. 3. No field cutting allowed. 3.04 CLEAN UP A. At completion of each day's work and at work completion,wipe panels and flashing clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, fittings or scraps to accumulate. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Including work of other sections, clean,repair, and touch-up or replace when directed, products which have been soiled, discolored or damaged by work of this section. C. Panel Damage and Finish Scratches: 1. Replace damaged panels or flashings as directed by the Architect. D. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. E. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding areas and ground DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with engineered wood products. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Wood sleepers. 5. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated on structural notes. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron(SBX)for sill plates. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing. 2. Species: a. Western woods (Douglas Fir); WCLIB or WWPA. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing. C. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay,honeycomb,knot-holes, shake, splits,torn grain, and wane. 1. Application: Exposed exterior and interior framing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish. 2. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde. B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2800 psi for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm actual-)depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi(13 700 MPa). C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. 1. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 2. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. 3. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. D. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I joists. 1. Material: All-veneer product glued-laminated wood or product made from any combination solid lumber,wood strands, and veneers. 2. Thickness: 1 inch(25 mm) 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) 1-1/4 inches(32 mm). 3. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board rim board plus grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size,provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine;No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods;No. 2 Common grade;NeLMA. 3. Northern species;No. 2 Common grade;NLGA. 4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade;WCLIB or WWPA. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or,if not indicated,not less than 3/4-inch(19-mm)nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M orof Type 304 stainless steel. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M,Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products,Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 5. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60(Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch(0.6 mm). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,nailers,blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. G. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated plywood. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated. B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. SHEATHING 061600 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1;Use Category UC3b. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.4 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 and ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." SHEATHING 061600 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. END OF SECTION 061600 SHEATHING 061600 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 062013 -EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood soffits. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring and blocking. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing and underlayment. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. B. Samples: For each type of product involving selection of colors,profiles, or textures. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Compliance Certificates: 1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp. 2. For preservative-treated wood that is not marked with treatment-quality mark. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species,moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. a. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.2 LUMBER SOFFITS A. Provide kiln-dried lumber soffits complying with DOC PS 20, factory coated with exterior primer compatible with topcoats specified B. Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar;NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA C. Size and Profile: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)into wood substrate. 1. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face fastening is required. 2. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized-steel or aluminum fasteners. B. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry. 3.5 SOFFIT INSTALLATION A. Install soffits to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Lumber Soffit: Install first course along edge of fascia trim, stagger joints at each course by at least one roof joist. END OF SECTION 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Latex-rubber waterproofing. 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete". 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings,penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Flashing sheet, 10 by 8 inches(250 by 200 mm). 2. Membrane-reinforcing fabric, 10 by 8 inches (250 by 200 mm). 3. Drainage panel,4 by 4 inches (100 by 100 mm). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416- 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 20-years experience in the production of cold fluid- applied waterproofing. C. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials and molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer. D. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) of wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness, texture, and execution quality. 1. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing and reinstall overlaying construction until mockups are approved. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C)above dew point. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch(1.6 mm)in width. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LATEX-RUBBER WATERPROOFING A. Two-Component, Unreinforced, Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Grace,W. R. &Co.;Procor. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Concrete Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated,water-based, acrylic latex sealer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Grace Construction Products;Procor Concrete Sealer. C. Liquid Detail Membrane: Manufacturer's standard, two-part polyurethane for detail fillets (cants),penetrations and general reinforcing. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Grace Construction Products; Bituthene Liquid Membrane Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer. D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. E. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing, complying with ASTM C 920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions. 1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to one side with or without a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded- plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Grace,W. R. &Co.;Hydroduct 220. 2.4 PROTECTION COURSE A. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced- asphaltic core,pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch(3 mm),nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch(6 mm)nominal, elsewhere. 2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for type of protection course. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Verify that waterproofing is compatible with adjacent dampproofing materials including, but not limited to,minimum material overlap,warranties, etc. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents,paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Prime substrate with manufacturer's recommended concrete sealer, based on expected surface and ambient temperatures,unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications,and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Provide liquid detail membrane cants (fillets) around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1471 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258,before coating surfaces. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat. B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898. 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Apply primer over prepared substrate. D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller,notched squeegee,trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases,with an average dry film thickness of 120 mils (3 mm). 2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m). E. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. Board Insulation or Molded-sheet drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications,install board insulation before installing drainage panels. 3.7 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed board insulation and/or insulation drainage panels from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Immediately after installation, provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 3.8 INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of<Insert address>, herein called the "Waterproofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work("work") on the following project: I. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. AND WHEREAS Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. failure of wall system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; b. faulty construction of walls, copings and other conditions and penetrations of the work; C. activity by others, including construction contractors,maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals,whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on waterproofing, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>,<Insert year>. 1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>. END OF SECTION 071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for insulation installed with waterproofing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,respectively,per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company(The). C. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. 2. Vertical Applications: Type IV,25 psi(173 kPa). 3. Horizontal(Exterior)Applications: Type V, 100 psi(690 kPa). B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm(7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws;with fender washers. D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type 1, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches (915 mm) in from exterior walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 4. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 072500 -WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building paper. 2. Building wrap. 3. Flexible flashing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated. Building paper is only for use behind stone veneer. B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. DuPont (E. 1. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek HomeWrap and HeaderWrap. C. Reemay, Inc.; Typar HouseWrap. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 50g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96/E 96M,Desiccant Method(Procedure A). C. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch(0.6 mm). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. DuPont(E. 1. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl Self Adhered Flashing. C. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-25 XL. d. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield. e. Advanced Building Products Inc.;Wind-o-wrap. £ Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thm-Wall Flashing. g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 25 or Fortiflash 40. i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus Self-Adhered Flashing or Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing. j. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap. k. Polyguard Products, Inc.;Polyguard JT-20 Tape or Polyguard JT-30 Tape. 1. Sandell Manufacturing Co.,Inc.; Presto-Seal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Building paper is only for use behind stone veneer. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. END OF SECTION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective film before shipping. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Alclad Finish: Metallurgically bonded surfacing to both sides, forming a composite aluminum sheet with reflective luster. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg Q. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C). 3. Products: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies, Inc.; Dri-Start "HR"High Performance Roofing Underlayment. b. Grace,W.R&Co.; "Ultra". B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m)minimum,rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed,with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. C. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch(13 mm)wide and 1/8 inch(3 mm)thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible,noncorrosive metal. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. F. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Forin seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. 2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts (4"x4") complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate from one of the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch(0.61 mm)thick. b. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch(0.56 mm)thick. B. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior,4-inch-(100-mm-)wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches(100 mm) beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 1. Fabricate from one of the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch(0.61 mm)thick. b. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch(0.56 mm)thick. 2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill,jamb, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (100 mm)beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50- mm-)high, end dams. Fabricate from one of the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch(0.81 mm)thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch(0.56 mm)thick. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch(25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)for nails and not less than 3/4 inch(19 mm) for wood screws. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers. C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill,jamb, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches(100 mm)beyond wall openings. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 079200—BUILDING JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 32 Section"Concrete Paving Joint Sealants"for exterior site work joint sealants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports. C. Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports. D. Field-adhesion test reports. E. Warranties. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food,provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. C. GE Advanced Materials- Silicones. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Type: Single component(S) or multicomponent(M). 3. Grade: Pourable(P) or nonsag(NS). 4. Class: 25. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic(NT). 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik,Inc. C. Lymtal, International, Inc. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pacific Polymers International,Inc. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. i. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. j. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Type: Single component(S)or multicomponent(M). 3. Grade: Pourable(P)or nonsag(NS). 4. Class: 50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T),Nontraffic(NT). 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik,Inc. C. May National Associates, Inc. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. f. Tremco Incorporated. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs within buildings. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete at buildings. b. Joints between different exterior finish materials. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior masonry and partitions. C. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters, and at food preparation areas. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 081113 -HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Apex Industries, Inc. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Commercial Door&Hardware Inc. 5. Concept Frames,Inc. 6. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7. Custom Metal Products. 8. Daybar. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 9. Deansteel. 10. de LaFontaine Industries. 11. DKS Steel Door&Frame Sys. Inc. 12. Door Components, Inc. 13. Fleming-Baron Door Products. 14. Gensteel Doors Inc. 15. Greensteel Industries,Ltd. 16. HMF Express. 17. Hollow Metal Inc. 18. Hollow Metal Xpress. 19. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing,Inc. 20. Karpen Steel Custom Doors &Frames. 21. L.I.F. Industries, Inc. 22. LaForce,Inc. 23. Megamet Industries,Inc. 24. Mesker Door Inc. 25. Michbi Doors Inc. 26. MPI Group,LLC (The). 27. National Custom Hollow Metal. 28. North American Door Corp. 29. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The). 30. Pioneer Industries,Inc. 31. Premier Products,Inc. 32. Republic Doors and Frames. 33. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc. 34. Security Metal Products Corp. 35. Shanahans Manufacturing Ltd. 36. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 37. Steward Steel; Door Division. 38. Stiles Custom Metal,Inc. 39. Titan Metal Products, Inc. 40. Trillium Steel Doors Limited. 41. West Central Mfg. Inc. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature- rise limits indicated,based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL l OC. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At the following door locations as tagged on the Floor Plans and Door Schedule: Door Numbers COI and CO2. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). C. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF 120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1,Full Flush. C. Core: Polyurethane. 3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 4. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch(1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF 120) coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,with throat reinforcement plate,welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors,with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,pitting, or surface defects;pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Inserts,Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames,provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) O.C. 5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6,the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated,mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean,pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.016 inch(0.4 mm)thick. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm),measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). C. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch(19.1 mm)plus or minus 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped,bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying,rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Counter doors. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 099600—"High-Performance Coatings"for finishing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEVASCE 7. 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. B. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and that exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. B. Bottom Bar for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated from metal to match curtain slats and finish. C. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl,rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 1. Removable Posts and Jamb Guides for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 2.2 HOOD A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 2.3 COUNTER DOORS A. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia for Counter Door: Welded sheet metal assembly of the following sheet metal: Galvanized Steel. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side(inside of room). B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock. 2.5 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weathertight installation,unless otherwise indicated. B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm)high. 2.6 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.7 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of door operator is indicated. B. Push-up Door Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf(111 N). 2.8 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Service Counter Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Overhead Door Company Series 650 or comparable product by one of the following: a. ACME Rolling Doors. b. Alpine Overhead Doors,Inc. C. AlumaTek,Inc. d. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. e. City-Gates. f. Cookson Company. g. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 -3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 h. Dynamic Closures Corp. i. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors,Inc. j. Mahon Door Corporation. k. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company,Inc. 1. Metro Door. m. QMI Security Solutions. n. Raynor. o. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. p. Wayne-Dalton Corp. q. Windsor Door. B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000. C. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/4-inch(32-mm) center-to-center height. E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise. Provide removable post(s) and jamb guides where shown on Drawings. F. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia for Counter Door: Galvanized steel. 1. Mounting: Interior face of wall or as shown on Drawings. G. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and chain lock keeper. 1. Locking Device Assembly: Interior bottom bar slide bolt, operable from inside only. H. Manual Door Operator: Push-up operation. 1. Provide operator with through-wall shaft operation. 2. Provide operator with manufacturer's standard removable operating arm. 1. Door Finish: Weather resistant anodized finish as selected by the Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 084226 -ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior swinging all-glass entrance doors. 2. All-glass sidelights. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For all-glass entrances. 1. Include plans, elevations, and sections. 2. Include details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of rail fittings. 3. Door hardware locations,mounting heights, and installation requirements. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish indicated. D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 084226 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. Concealed Floor Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of all-glass entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation,or other defects in construction. B. Structural Loads: 1. Deflection Limits: Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch(19 mm),whichever is smaller. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. 2. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh; C.R. Laurence Co,Inc. 2.3 METAL COMPONENTS A. Fitting Configuration: 1. Manual-Swinging,All-Glass Entrance Doors and Sidelights: Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom. B. Rail Fittings: 1. Material: Stainless-steel-clad aluminum. 2. Height: a. Top Rail: As indicated on drawings. b. Bottom Rail: As indicated on drawings. 3. Profile: Square. 4. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings. ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 084226 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed. D. Materials: 1. Stainless-Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304. a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish. 2.4 GLASS A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category 11 materials. 1. Class 1: Clear monolithic. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch(13 mm). b. Locations: As indicated on drawings. 2. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished. 3. Butt Edges: Flat ground. 4. Corner Edges: Lap joint corners with exposed edges polished. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and finish of rail fittings. B. Concealed Floor Closers and Top Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including cases, bottom arms, top walking beam pivots, plates, and accessories required for complete installation. See hardware schedule for basis of design product selection. 1. Swing: Single acting. a. Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle if any, or at angle selected. 2. Hold Open: Automatic, at angle selected. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Accessible Interior Doors:Not more than 5 lbf(22.2 N)to fully open door. C. Push-Pull Set: As indicated, included with selected Exit Device. D. Cylinders: Deadbolt included with selected Exit Device E. Exit Devices: UL 305. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, Type 2. 1. Function: Operation by push-pull when inside operator is locked down(dogged). 2. Latching: At threshold or floor plate. ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 084226 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. Style: Concealed bolt action mechanism hidden within interior of door handle. See hardware schedule for basis of design product selection. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill,or make other alterations to glass after tempering. 1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is installed,roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite. B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent possible. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Set units level,plumb, and true to line,with uniform joints. C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components. D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated. END OF SECTION 084226 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 084226 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 087100 -DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 084226 "All-Glass Entrances" for interior all glass entrance door hardware, including cylinders. C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below. Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements of this Section. 1. Thresholds,weather stripping and lock cylinders to be installed under other Sections. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. b. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity,function, and finish of each door hardware product. DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: 1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC) C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf(67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key,tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf(22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf(22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. C. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch(13 mm)high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers'products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers'names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"Article. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow- metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Bommer Industries, Inc. C. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. £ Lawrence Hardware Inc. g. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. PBB, Inc. i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.3 SELF-CLOSING HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA A156.17. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Bommer Industries, Inc. C. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Lawrence Hardware Inc. f McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. PBB, Inc. h. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 3. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. B. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Grade l; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule by the following: a. Best Access Systems;Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. 2.5 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1;with strike that suits frame. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule by the following: a. Best Access Systems;Div. of Stanley Security Solutions,Inc. 2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule by the following: a. Best Access Systems;Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. B. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.7 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. B. Keys: Nickel Silver. 1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock,provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. C. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.8 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Don-Jo Mfg.,Inc. C. Forms+ Surfaces. d. Hager Companies. e. Hiawatha, Inc. f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. h. Trimco. 2.9 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black&Decker Corp. company. f. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. j. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.10 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA Al 56.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products,Inc. C. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises, Inc. f. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. g. Zero International. 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products,Inc. C. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises,Inc. f. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 h. Zero International. 2.12 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. C. Don-Jo Mfg.,Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. £ Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. g. Trimco. 2.13 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction,provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.14 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. D. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. J. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. A schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor, do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware group, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors or for each single door. END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 GRFA PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 Hardware Set No.1 Concession Passage Door Item Qtv. Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 McKinney 9001 US 32D Satin Stainless Steel Full Mortise,Heavy Weight,Double Acting Spring Butt Hinge Push Plate 2 Rockwood 70E US 32D Satin Stainless Steel 6'x16"Push Plate,One per each side of door Metal Protective Trim Units(Kick) 2 Rockwood K1062 CSK,B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel 10'x34",ref detail for additional information on mounting and size Silencers 3 Trimco 1229A Grey Hardware Set No.2 Storage Room Entry Door Item Qtv. Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 McKinney T4A3386 US 32D Satin Stainless Steel Full Mortise,Heavy Weight,5-Knuckle,4-1/2"x 4-1/2"Ball Bearing Lockset 1 Best(Stanley) 47H Series US 32D1630 Satin Stainless Steel Storeroom Lock(ANSI F86);14 Lever with M Escutcheon Overhead Closer 1 Norton 9500 Series 626E Satin Chrome Parallel arm;Mount to interior of door Threshold 1 Pemko 17**AK Pemkote Skid Resistant Aluminum **Width and length to match doorjamb Door Gasket 3 Pemko P50BL Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Metal Protective Trim Units(Kick) 2 Rockwood K1062 CSK,B4E US 32D1630 Satin Stainless Steel 10'x34",ref detail for additional information on mounting and size Silencers 3 Trimco 1229A Grey Door Stop 1 Trimco 1211 US 32D Satin Stainless Steel Hardware Set No.3 Counter Coiling Door Item Qtv. Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Manufacturers Standard Hardware Reference Counter Door Specification Locking Mechanism Match Existing Counter Doors Hardware Set No.4 Box Office Ticket Office Door Item Qtv. Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Floor Closer 1 Dorma BTS80 Series 626(Satin Chrome) Barrier-Free;Integral hold-open feature Bottom Arm 1 Dorma 7422 Manfucurers Standard Manufacturer's standard for use with specified Floor Closer Top Pivot 1 Dorma 8062 Manfucurers Standard Manufacturer's standard for use with specified Floor Closer Exit Device 1 Dorma DG1100 630(Satin Stainless Steel) Deadbolt,Exterior Handle Type"A" DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087101-1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 092400 -PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork(stucco) on metal lath, and monolithic concrete. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated, control joints and expansion joints. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m). PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60(Z180)zinc coating. 2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z 180),hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 5. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 6. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants,manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads. E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21-mm)diameter,unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Color for Finish Coats: As selected by Architect. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N. 1. Color for Finish Coats: As selected by Architect. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328. D. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. F. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. 1. Color: Match Architect's sample. 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 2. Masonry Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. b. Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 4. Plastic Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 b. Brown Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 5. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 2. On Solid Surfaces,Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath. 3.3 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork, on masonry on concrete; 3/4-inch(19-mm)thickness. 1. Portland cement mixes. 2. Masonry cement mixes. 3. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 4. Plastic cement mixes. 5. Portland and plastic cement mixes. D. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents,blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 092900- GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies,provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch(15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 4. Locations: For use at all locations susceptible to contact with moisture but not direct contact with water, including but not limited to bathrooms, kitchens and mechanical rooms. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). For use at locations indicated on the drawings. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC;BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products;Acoustical Sealant GSC. C. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. d. Specified Technologies,Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Not Applicable 3. Level 3: At panels not scheduled to receive Levels 1 or 4. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 5. Level 5: Not Applicable. H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. 1. Remove and replace panels that are wet,moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 096513 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long,of each resilient product color,texture, and pattern required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1,not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in Interior Specification Sheets or comparable product by one of the following: RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. C. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Endura Rubber Flooring;Division of Burke Industries, Inc. e. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada)Ltd. f. Flexco,Inc. g. Johnsonite. h. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 1. Musson,R. C. Rubber Co. j. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. k. PRF USA, Inc. 1. Roppe Corporation,USA. M. VPI,LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I(solid,homogeneous) or Group II(layered). 3. Style: As indicated. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: As indicated on Interior Specification Sheet. E. Lengths: Cut lengths,48 inches or coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 099113 -EXTERIOR PAINTING 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on all exterior substrates. It is the intent of this Section that all exterior surfaces exposed to view are to receive paint,unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings or within this or other Sections. B. Related Requirements: I. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 2. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches(200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Product List: For each product indicated,include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials,from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F(10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tic coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. H. Previously Coated Surfaces: Maintenance painting will frequently not permit or require complete removal of all old coatings prior to repainting. However, all surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt, foreign matter,rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers must be removed to assure sound bonding to the tightly adhering old paint. Glossy surfaces of old paint films must be clean and dull before repainting. Thorough washing with an abrasive cleanser will clean and dull in one operation, or, wash thoroughly and dull by sanding. Spot prime any bare areas with an appropriate primer. Recognize that any surface preparation short of total removal of the old coating may compromise the service length of the system. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet. Allow to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359. If the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is required. A. Stucco: Must be clean and free of any loose stucco. If recommended procedures for applying stucco are followed, and normal drying conditions prevail,the surface may be painted in 30 days. The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9, unless the products to be used are designed to be used in high pH environments. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish,color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping,or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal,MPI#76. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry,matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5),MPI#81. B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss(Gloss Level 5),MPI#94. C. Aluminum Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum,MPI#95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior,matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat(Gloss Level 1),MPI#10. D. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: 1. 2 Coats: B46W00850 - U1traCrete Solvent Borne Texture Coating Smooth Extra White"Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System" END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 099123 -INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates including those listed below. The intent of this Section is that all interior surfaces exposed to view shall receive stain or paint,unless specifically noted otherwise: 1. Concrete. 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Aluminum(not anodized or otherwise coated). 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials,from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore&Co. 3. Benjamin Moore&Co. (Canada). 4. Bennette Paint Manufacturing Company,Inc. 5. Betonel Ltd. 6. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing. 7. California Paints. 8. Cloverdale Paint. 9. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings. 10. Columbia Paint&Coatings. 11. Conco Paints. 12. Coronado Paint. 13. Davis Paint Company. 14. Diamond Vogel Paints. 15. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 16. Durant Performance Coatings. 17. Duron,Inc. 18. Envirocoatings Canada Inc. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 19. Euclid Chemical Company. 20. Farrell-Calhoun. 21. Frazee Paint. 22. General Paint. 23. Hallman Lindsay Paints. 24. Hirshfield's,Inc. 25. ICI Paints. 26. ICI Paints(Canada). 27. Insl-x. 28. Kelly-Moore Paints. 29. Kwal Paint. 30. M.A.B. Paints. 31. McCormick Paints. 32. Microblend Technologies Inc. 33. Miller Paint. 34. Mills Paint. 35. PARA Paints. 36. Parex LaHabra Inc. 37. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc. 38. PPG Architectural Finishes,Inc. 39. Pratt&Lambert. 40. Rodda Paint Co. 41. Scott Paint. 42. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 43. Sico, Inc. 44. Southern Diversified Products,LLC. 45. Smith Paint Products. 46. Vista Paint. 47. Zinsser. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: I. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. 20 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior,MPI#4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3),MPI#139. B. Steel Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal,MPI#79. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2),MPI#13 8. C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized,water based,MPI#134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2),MPI#138] D. Aluminum(Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum,MPI#95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2),MPI#138. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System at all exposed public gypsum board substrates visible to the general public except kitchens: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior,institutional low odor/VOC,MPI#149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1),MPI#143. END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes. The intent of this Section is that all exterior and interior surfaces exposed to view shall receive stain or paint, unless specifically noted otherwise. 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Dressed lumber(finish carpentry). B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for standard paint systems on exterior substrates. 2. Division 09 Section Interior Painting" for standard paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches (200 mm) square or 8 inches(200 mm)long. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2,with the product proposed for use highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials,from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow,rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore&Co. 3. Benjamin Moore&Co. (Canada). 4. Bennette Paint Mfg. Co., Inc. 5. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing. 6. California Paints. 7. Cloverdale Paint. 8. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings. 9. Columbia Paint&Coatings. 10. Conco Paints. 11. Coronado Paint. 12. Davis Paint Company. 13. Diamond Vogel Paints. 14. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 15. Durant Paints Inc. 16. Duron,Inc. 17. Euclid Chemical Company. 18. Farrell-Calhoun. 19. Frazee Paint. 20. General Paint. 21. Hallman Lindsay Paints. 22. Hirshfield's,Inc. 23. ICI Paints. 24. ICI Paints(Canada). 25. Insl-x. 26. Kelly-Moore Paints. 27. Kwal Paint. 28. Life Paint Corp. 29. M.A.B. Paints. 30. McCormick Paints. 31. Miller Paint. 32. Mills Paint. 33. PARA Paints. 34. Parex LaHabra Inc. 35. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc. 36. PPG Architectural Finishes,Inc. 37. Pratt&Lambert. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300- 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 38. Rodda Paint Co. 39. SaverSystems. 40. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 41. Sico, Inc. 42. Target Coatings. 43. Vista Paint. 44. Zinsser. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Clear Wood Finishes,Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 2. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 3. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. D. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 10 percent for interior woodwork, 12 percent for exterior woodwork when measured with an electronic moisture meter. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. D. Exterior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces,undersides, and backsides of wood. a. For solid hide stained wood, stain edges and ends after priming. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 b. For varnish coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish. Prime undersides and backsides with varnish. 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color. Sand smooth when dried. E. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual,"to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames C. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs,ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, non-traffic surfaces, including wood trim, architectural woodwork, wood siding and wood-based panel products. 1. Semitransparent Stain System: a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent,matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent,MPI#13. END OF SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 123661 —SOLID-SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. One full-size solid-surface-material countertop, with front edge and backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in configuration specified. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: SOLID-SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. Refer to ID Specification Sheet for apron height. 2. Backsplash: 4"high, straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash. B. Countertops: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material. D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. 2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. B. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. C. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SSL 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in Interior Specification Sheet or comparable product by one of the following: a. Avonite Surfaces. b. E. 1. du Pont de Nemours and Company. C. Formica Corporation. d. LG Chemical, Ltd. e. Meganite Inc. f. Samsung Chemical USA,Inc. g. Swan Corporation(The). h. Transolid, Inc. i. Wilsonart International. J. DuPont. 2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full standard range. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. SOLID-SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS 123661 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. END OF SECTION 123661 SOLID-SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS 123661 -3 Landscape Forms, Inc. 431 Lawndale Avenue Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048 Toll Free (800) 521-2546 Phone (269) 381-0396 Fax (269) 381-3455 Website www.landscapeforms.com E-mail specify @landscapeforms.com Product Guide Specification Specifier Notes: This product guide specification is written according to the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) 3-Part Format, including MasterFormat, SectionFormat, and PageFormat, as described in The Project Resource Manual—CSI Manual of Practice, Fifth Edition. The section must be carefully reviewed and edited by the Architect to meet the requirements of the project and local building code. Coordinate this section with other specification sections and the Drawings. Delete all "Specifier Notes" after editing this section. Section numbers are from MasterFormat 2010 Edition. SECTION 12 93 00 Site Furnishings SECTION 05 52 00 Metal Railings RAIL SYSTEM Specifier Notes: This section covers Landscape Forms, Inc. "Jessie" rail system. Consult Landscape Forms, Inc. for assistance in editing this section for the specific application. PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rail System. 1.2 REFERENCES Specifier Notes: List standards referenced in this section, complete with designations and titles. This article does not require compliance with standards, but is merely a listing of those used. A. ASTM Testing Standards: 1. ASTM B 117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 2. ASTM D 522 – Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. 3. ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 4. ASTM D 2247 – Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. Jessie Rail System pg 1 05/14/2012 5. ASTM D 2794 — Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). 6. ASTM D 3359— Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 7. ASTM D 3363 — Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 8. ASTM G 155— Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials. B. ISO Testing Standards: 1. ISO 1520 — Paints and Varnishes — Cupping Test. 2. ISO 2815 — Paints and Varnishes — Buchholz Indentation Test. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, installation methods and available colors, styles, patterns and textures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including plans and elevations, indicating overall dimensions. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of materials, finishes, and colors. D. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacture of site furnishings since 1969. B. Product Support: Products are supported with complete engineering drawings and design patents. C. Base Worth: An installed base of products worth in excess of one hundred million dollars. D. Assets: Excess of twenty million dollars in assets. E. Production: Orders are filled within a 40-day schedule. F. Facility Operator: Welders and machine operators are certified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Keep materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging until installation. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty Information: -Products will be free from defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of three years from the date of invoice. -The warranty does not apply to damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, tampering, negligence, or abuse. - Landscape Forms, Inc. shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of any items found defective upon inspection by an authorized Landscape Forms service representative. -Purchasers should be aware that normal use of these high quality products can result in superficial damage affecting the finish. Scratches, nicks, and dents are to be considered normal wear and tear, and are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. PART2 PRODUCTS Jessie Rail System pg 2 05/14/2012 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Landscape Forms, Inc., 431 Lawndale Avenue, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. Toll Free (800) 521-2546. Phone (269) 381-0396. Fax (269) 381-3455. Website www.landscapeforms.com. E-mail: specify @landscapeforms.com. 2.2 BENCHES A. "Jessie" Rail System Specifier Notes: Specify quantity of each style. Each run must consist of at least one Basic Unit. Each expansion unit adds length in 48" increments. 1. Style: a. Basic unit- 106" length: Quantity: b. Expansion unit-48" length: Quantity: Specifier Notes: Choose one from each of the selections below. 2. Top of rail: a. Rail top b. Bar top 3. Infill option: a. Open, no infill b. Backrest c. Mesh Infill 4. Mounting: a. Surface Mount b. Embedded 2.3 MATERIALS A. Support post: Carbon steel plate, 5/8" thick. Top mounting plate is 1/4" thick carbon steel sheet, welded to support post. B. Splice lock: Type 319 or 356 ASTM B 26 aluminum casting. C. Hardware: Carbon steel Magni-coated screws. Specifier Notes: Delete if not required. D. Rail top: Constructed of 6061 aluminum extrusion. Intermediate sections and end caps are 1" x 3". E. Bar top: Constructed of 6061 aluminum extrusion. Intermediate sections and end caps are 1" x 12". F. Surface Mount Plate: 3/8" thick carbon steel plate, welded to support post G. Cover plate: Type 319 or 356 ASTM B 26 aluminum casting. Cover plate consists of two halves, bolted together with carbon steel Magni-coated screws. H. Backrest infill: Aluminum 6061-T6 flat bar, 4-1/2" wide x 1/2" thick I. Mesh infill: Panel is formed of%" #13F expanded steel, welded to a 5/8" x 7/16" carbon steel frame. 2.4 ACCESSORIES Jessie Rail System pg 3 05/14/2012 Specifier Notes: Specify anchor bolts for surface-mounted rails. Delete for embedded mounting. A. Anchor Bolts: Corrosion resistant recommended, not provided by the manufacturer. 2.5 RECYCLED CONTENT Specifier Notes: Recycled content provided below, delete materials not specified. Contact Landscape Forms for recycled content of other configurations. Post Consumer Pre Consumer Total Recycled Content Content Content Bar Top Basic unit Surf Mt Open 43% 38% 81% Bar Top Basic unit Surf Mt Mesh Infill 47% 36% 83% Bar Top Basic unit Surf Mt Backrest 45% 37% 82% Rail Top Basic unit Embed Open 52% 35% 87% Rail Top Basic unit Embed Mesh Infill 55% 34% 89% Rail Top Basic unit Embed Backrest 54% 34% 88% 2.6 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assembled rails. 2.7 FINISHES A. Finish on Metal: Landscape Forms, Inc. "Pangard II". 1. Primer: Rust inhibitor on ferrous supports. 2. Topcoat: Thermosetting TGIC polyester powder coat. UV, chip, and flake resistant. 3. Test Results: "Pangard II". a. Gloss Consistency, Gardner 60 Degrees, ASTM D 523: Plus or minus 5 percent from standard. b. UV Resistance, Color and Gloss, ASTM G 155, Cycle 7: Delta E less than 2 at 2.0 mils and less than 20 percent loss. c. Cross-Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D 3359, Method B: 100 percent pass. d. Flexibility Test, Mandrel, ASTM D 522: 3 mm at 2 mils. e. Erichsen Cupping, ISO 1520: 8 mm. f. Impression Hardness, Buchholz, ISO 2815: 95. g. Impact Test, ASTM D 2794: 60 inch-pounds at 2.5 mils. h. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: 2H minimum. i. Corrosion Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM B 117: Max. undercutting 1 mm. j. Humidity Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM D 2247: Max. blisters 1 mm. Specifier Notes: Specify color of metal. Consult Landscape Forms, Inc. for selection of standard colors and availability of custom colors. 4. Support Color: 5. Top Color: Specifier Notes: Delete if not required. 6. Backrest Color (if different from top color): 7. Mesh Infill Color (if different from support color): Jessie Rail System pg 4 05/14/2012 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Examinations: Examine areas to receive rails. 1. Verify that substrates are stable and capable of supporting the weight of items covered under this section. 2. Verify that substrates have been adequately prepared to securely anchor those items that will be surface mounted. 3. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. 4. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install rails in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Install rails level. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Finish Damage: Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. B. Component Damage: Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean rails promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed rails to ensure that, except for normal weathering, rails will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Jessie Rail System pg 5 05/14/2012 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 13 31 20 - TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to the Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes an exterior architectural tensile membrane canopy structure system. B. The tensile membrane structure contractor(hereafter referred to as "Subcontractor") shall be responsible for the detailing, fabrication, supply, and installation of the Work specified herein, some or all of which may be subcontracted by Subcontractor to others meeting the qualification requirements of Section 1.5. The intent of this specification is to establish in the first instance an undivided, single-source responsibility of the Subcontractor for all of the foregoing functions. C. Subcontractor's Work shall include,but not necessarily be limited to, the supply, fabrica- tion, shipment, and erection of the following principal items: 1. The architectural membrane as indicated on the drawings and in these specifica- tions. 2. Cables and end fittings. 3. Perimeter, catenary, and sectionalized aluminum clamping system. 4. Structural steel, including masts, trusses, struts, beams, and/or weldments, as in- dicated on the drawings. 5. Fasteners and gasketing. D. The architectural membrane used in these structures shall be polytetrafluoroethylene ("PTFE," such as Teflong) coated woven fiberglass. All references to "membrane" in this Section 13000,without exception, and whether singular,plural, or capitalized or not, are to such architectural membrane. E. Related Sections: The following Construction Specification Institute (CSI) MasterFor- matTM divisions contain requirements relating to this section: 1. Division 1: General Requirements. 2. Division 3: Concrete, for cast-in-place foundations. 3. Division 5: Metals, for structural metal framing, metal fabrications, expan- sion control systems, and shop-applied metal coatings. 4. Division 8: Doors and Windows, for skylights, clerestories, and/or glazed curtain wall systems. 5. Division 9: Finishes, for paints and coatings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. General: Except as otherwise shown or noted, all Work shall comply with the require- ments of the following codes and standards: 1. International Building Code(IBC),2012 edition. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC). a. AISC/ANSI 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings b. AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges C. AISC/ANSI 341 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings 3. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). a. ASCE 19: Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). a. ASTM A586: Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Struc- tural Strand b. ASTM A603: Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Struc- tural Wire Rope C. ASTM D4851-88:Standard Test Methods for Coated and Laminated Fab- rics for Architectural Use d. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Character- istics of Building Materials e. ASTM E108: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Cover- ings f. ASTM E136: Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C g. ASTM C423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method h. ASTM E424: Standard Test Method for Solar Energy Transmittance and Reflectance of Sheet Materials 5. American Welding Society(AWS). a. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code b. AWS 2.4: Symbols for Welding and Nondestructive Testing 6. Aluminum Association. a. Specifications for Aluminum Structures 7. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA). a. NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films 8. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC). a. Steel Structures Painting Manual,Volumes 1 and 2 1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide a structural tensile membrane system that complies with requirements specified herein by testing the Subcontractor's corresponding membrane system in accor- dance with the indicated test methods. B. Building Code Criteria: The tensile membrane structure shall comply with the Interna- tional Building Code, 2012 Edition. 1. Ground Snow Load: 144 psf 2. Snow Load Importance Factor: 1.0 3. Roof Live Load 20 psf,redicuble 4. Basic Wind Speed: 105 mph 5. Wind Load Importance Factor: 1.0 6. Wind Exposure Category: C 7. Design Mean Roof Height(s): 25 feet TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 C. Life Safety: All tensile membrane structures shall be detailed so that no life safety issue is created in the event of a loss of a part of the membrane. The tensile membrane struc- ture shall not rely on the membrane for structural stability. D. Fire Performance: Range of characteristics required of membranes: 1. Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84). a. Flame Spread 5 max. b. Smoke Generation(Tunnel Test) 5 max. 2. Fire Resistance of Roof Coverings(ASTM E108). a. Burning Brand Class A 3. Incombustibility of Substrates(ASTM E136). a. Substrate Noncombustible Pass 4. Flame Resistance (NFPA 701 Small Scale,UL 94). a. Flame Out 1 second after b. Char Length 0.25-inch max. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractor Qualifications: Fabrication and erection of the tensile membrane structure is limited to firms with proven experience in fabrication and construction of complex tensile membrane structures. Such firms, through their own experience and/or that of their qualified subcontractors, shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1. The Subcontractor shall have at least fifteen (15)years' experience in the successful fab- rication and erection of permanent, custom tensile membrane structures. 2. The Subcontractor shall have fabricated and erected at least fifty (50) PTFE-coated wo- ven fiberglass tensile membrane structures, with at least five (5) structures of similar size and complexity as this project. 3. The Subcontractor shall design, procure, fabricate and erect PTFE-coated woven fiber- glass tensile membrane as a tensile membrane structure. 4. The Subcontractor shall demonstrate it owns and operates a fabrication facility of ade- quate capacity and will maintain a staff experienced in the fabrication of PTFE-coated woven fiberglass tensile membrane structures that will undertake the fabrication of this project. Subcontractor shall demonstrate that the facility is ISO-certified and shall meet the specific requirements listed in Section 3 of this Specification. 5. The Subcontractor shall maintain an in-house Warranty and Service department to assist in repair and service calls. 6. The Subcontractor shall submit a Corporate Quality Control Manual describing the com- pany's complete quality assurance program. 7. The Subcontractor shall have ISO 9001:2008 registration in Design, Construction and in- stallation of fabric and cable based structures B. Qualified Subcontractor. 1. Birdair,Inc. ATTN: Thomas M. Connell,PE 65 Lawrence Bell Drive,Amherst,New York 14221 USA Phone(716) 633-9500 Fax(716)633-9850 Web Site www.birdair.com 1.6 SUBMITTALS TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 A. General: Notwithstanding any provisions of these specifications that may appear to be to the contrary, any and all submittals by the Subcontractor shall be subject to review, ap- proval, and adoption by the Project Engineer as part of the overall project design and en- gineering, and shall not create a contractual or other professional design relationship be- tween the Subcontractor and either the Project Engineer or the Owner. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, fabrication, installa- tion, and recommendations for maintenance. Include test reports showing compliance with project requirements where test method is indicated. 1. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples. C. Submittals With Bid: The General Contractor shall submit with its bid the following ma- terials from the Subcontractor: 1. Schedule indicating key milestone dates during the project. 2. Pre-qualification package including: a. Company background and years of experience b. Organizational chart and staff C.V. c. List of past project references d. Client recommendations e. Fabrication facility documentation: i) Background, including proof of ownership and years of operation ii) Physical address g. ISO certifications for Design and Fabrication facilities D. Shop Drawings: Subcontractor shall submit tensile membrane structure drawings defin- ing the completed structure, anchorage and connection details, interfaces with building construction,and general membrane seam arrangements. E. Quality Assurance Submittals. 1. Test Reports: Provide test reports from a qualified testing laboratory that show compliance of the Subcontractor's PTFE-coated woven fiberglass tensile mem- brane system with specification requirements, as follows: a. Physical test data of the actual fabric roll goods to be used in the project confirming conformance with specifications for the membrane. 2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by the Subcontractor certifying materials comply with specified characteristics, criteria, and physical requirements. F. Closeout Submittals. 1. Warranty: Project Warranty documents as described herein. 2. Record Documents: Project record documents for installed materials in accor- dance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Sec- tion. 3. Maintenance Manual: Submit two (2) copies of a maintenance manual for the tensile membrane structure to the Owner. The manual shall include a schedule for routine inspection, an inspection checklist, instructions for emergency repair and use of emergency repair materials, and warranty. During the system erection period, the Owner shall provide maintenance personnel to be trained in the use of the repair materials. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY,HANDLING,AND STORAGE A. General: Refer to the Conditions of the Contract for product handling provisions. B. Materials shall be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored, and protected in a manner that will avoid abuse, damage, and defacement. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General: Refer to the Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. After final payment, the Subcontractor shall furnish the Owner with a written Warranty, which warrants that the membrane, its perimeter attachment system, and the structural support system as supplied by the Subcontractor have been installed in accordance with the project specifications and will be free from defects in materials and workmanship that will impair their normal use or service. The Warranty shall start from the date of Sub- stantial Completion of the tensile membrane structure; which shall be the first date on which the entire tensile membrane structure is subject to design prestress conditions, and continue for a period of one(1)years thereafter. PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL MEMBRANE A. General: The membrane used in these structures shall be polytetrafluoroethylene ("PTFE," such as Teflon®) coated woven fiberglass. All references to "membrane" in this Section 13000, without exception, and whether singular, plural, or capitalized or not, are to such architectural membrane. B. The membrane shall meet the following general requirements: 1. Source Quality Control: The primary materials shall be obtained from a single manufacturer. Secondary materials shall be those recommended by the primary manufacturer. 2. Physical Characteristics: The following indicates a range of physical properties typical of PTFE Architectural Membranes. The determination of specific charac- teristics and selection of a membrane shall be derived from project engineering by the Project Engineer. a. Coated Fabric Weight(oz./sq.yd.): 45.5 nom. (ASTM 485 1) b. Thickness (mils): 36 nom. (ASTM 4851) c. Strip Tensile (lbs./in., avg.): 1. Dry,Warp 1025 min. avg. (ASTM 485 1) 2. Dry,Fill 950 min. avg. (ASTM 485 1) d. Strip Tensile,After Crease Fold (lbs./in., avg.): 1. Dry,Warp 800 min. avg. (ASTM 485 1) 2. Dry,Fill 775 min. avg. (ASTM 4851) e. Trapezoidal Tear(tbs./in., avg.): 1. Warp 100 min. avg. (ASTM 485 1) 2. Fill 130 min. avg. (ASTM 485 1) TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 f. Solar Transmission(%): 10 nom. (ASTM E424) g. Solar Reflectance (%): 73 nom. (ASTM E424) C. Materials. 1. Base Fabric: The yarns used shall be of the highest commercial quality, essen- tially free of broken fibers and fully suitable for coating. The fabric shall be wo- ven with uniform tension and crimp in the warp and fill yarns and free of defects deleterious to the coating process. 2. Fluorocarbon Coatings: The coating materials shall be fluorocarbon resins for- mulated specifically for architectural applications. These materials shall be ap- plied to form a weatherized barrier between the fiberglass yarns and the envi- ronment. The bulk of the coating shall be formulated dispersions of PTFE fluor- opolymer resin and additives to enhance abrasion and tear resistance, impart pigmentation, or modify solar transmission. The additives shall not constitute more than 20%by weight of the total coating or 25%by weight of any individual layer. The surface shall be totally a fluoroethylenepropylene ("FEP")resin to fa- cilitate heat welding. 3. After weaving, the base fabric shall be cleaned and primed to achieve optimum mechanical properties of the coated membrane. The coating, described above, shall be virtually free of mud cracks and pinholes. The coating shall be applied evenly to both sides of the fabric and the FEP fluorocarbon resin topcoat shall be of sufficient thickness to permit proper heat fusion of joints with the recom- mended die pressure and temperature. 2.2 CABLES AND END FITTINGS A. Materials. 1. All structural wire rope cables shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A603. 2. All structural strand cables shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A586. 3. All cables shall be coated to"Class A"zinc coating throughout. 4. All cables in contact with the membrane shall be white PVC coated. All other cables may be galvanized only. B. Fabrication. 1. Cable fabricator shall provide effective quality control over all fabrication activi- ties. Inspection of the place of fabrication may occur at any time to verify proper quality control. This inspection does not relieve the fabricator from meeting the requirements of this specification. 2. Cables that are designated to be prestretched shall be prestretched per ASTM A603 for wire rope and ASTM A586 for structural strand. Cables of the same type shall have the same modulus of elasticity. 3. All cables shall be manufactured to the following length tolerances at 70 degrees Fahrenheit(23 degrees Celsius): a. Length<70 feet(213 meters) '/4 inch(6.4 mm) b. Length 70 to 270 feet(32.3 to 82.3 meters) 0.03%of length c. Length>270 feet(82.3 meters) 1 inch(25.4 mm) 4. Cables shall have a continuous longitudinal paint stripe('/4 inch wide max.) along their top surface unless noted otherwise. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 5. Index markings shown shall be a circumferential paint stripe ('/4 inch wide max.). 6. All cables and end fittings shall be delivered clean and dry. 7. All swaged and speltered fittings shall be designed and attached to develop the full breaking strength of the cable. Thimble end fittings shall develop a mini- mum of 90%of the cable breaking strength. 8. Swaged end fittings, pins, nuts, and washers shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153. Any damage to the zinc coating shall be cleaned and painted with a gray zinc-rich paint per ASTM A780. 9. Speltered end fittings shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153. Any damage to the zinc coating shall be cleaned and painted with a gray zinc-rich paint per ASTM A780. 2.3 ALUMINUM CLAMPING SYSTEM A. Materials. 1. All structural aluminum clamping systems shall be ASTM alloy 6061-T6. 2. Bent plates shall be formed from ASTM alloy 6061 and then heat-treated to T6. 3. All structural"U straps" shall be stainless steel, Type 316. 4. All structural aluminum clamping shall have the following finish: a. Polyester thermosetting powder coating with a tri-glycidyl isocyanurate (i.e. TGIC) curing agent/hardener per American Architectural Manufac- turers Association(AAMA)2603 to a thickness of 3 mils,white in color. 5. Structural sheet aluminum shall be ASTM alloy 5052-H32. 6. Non-structural sheet aluminum shall be ASTM alloy 1100 series. B. Fabrication. 1. Aluminum fabricator shall provide effective quality control over all fabrication activities. Inspection of the place of fabrication may occur at any time to verify proper quality control. This inspection does not relieve the fabricator from meet- ing the requirements of this specification. 2. Fabricated aluminum shall have no sharp edges. 3. Stamp all parts with the appropriate mark number. 4. All fabricated aluminum shall be free of oil, grease, and machining chips. 5. Tolerances shall be as follows: a. Cross sectional dimensions +/- 10%, 0.03-inch(0.8 mm)max. b. Bolt hole locations +/- 1/32 inch(0.8 mm) c. Overall length +/- 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) 6. All welded joints shall conform to AWS D1.2. 2.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. General: The structural steel fabrication shall comply with the latest revision of all appli- cable codes, standards, and regulations including the following: 1. ASTM(as referenced). 2. AISC: "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3. SSPC: "Steel Structures Painting Manual,Volumes 1 and 2." 4. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints: "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 5. AWS D1.1 and AWS A2.4. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. In the event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations and the requirements of the referenced standards or these specifications, the provisions of the more stringent shall govern. C. Submittals. 1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. 2. Shop Drawings. a. The structural steel fabricator shall submit shop drawings to the Subcon- tractor for approval. b. The drawings shall show all shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connection holes,threaded fasteners,bolts, studs and spacing, etc. C. The drawings shall show all welds, both shop and field, by the currently recommended symbols of the AWS. d. A welding procedure must be submitted to the Subcontractor for ap- proval of welds that are not prequalified. e. Shop drawings shall be carefully checked before being submitted for ap- proval, and shall be submitted in the order in which they are needed for the execution of the work, well in advance and not all at one time. Sub- mitted drawings shall show all structural steel required for the work, whether or not indicated on the drawings. f. The fabricator shall not fabricate any material until after receipt of ap- proved drawings. g. The fabricator shall immediately make all corrections to his drawings as required by the Subcontractor and shall keep a satisfactory history of all changes by separately numbered and dated revision block on a conven- ient portion of each drawing affected. h. Certification of material conformance that includes chemical and physi- cal properties for all structural elements shall be submitted to the Sub- contractor. D. Materials. 1. Structural steel for plates and bars shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36 or ASTM A572, Grade 50,unless noted otherwise. 2. Structural pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B. 3. Structural tubing shall conform to ASTM A500 Grade B. 4. Structural bolts. a. High strength bolts:ASTM A325,unless noted otherwise. b. Common bolts and nuts:ASTM A307. c. Threaded rods: ASTM A36,unless noted otherwise. 5. Other materials: All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of structural steel, shall be provided and shall be new, free from rust, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the ap- proval of the Subcontractor. E. Accessories. 1. Base Plates and Anchor Bolts. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 a. Base plates supported on concrete, whether shop attached or shipped loose, shall be furnished and set on shims, leveling plates or leveling nuts. Grouting shall be by the General Contractor. b. Anchor bolt locations shall be furnished by the Subcontractor and used by the General Contractor to set the bolts. The General Contractor is to check carefully the setting of the bolts to their proper position prior to placing of concrete. Anchor bolts, provided by the General Contractor, shall have two (2) nuts and washers. Damaged threads shall be repaired or be cut to permit full tightening of nuts. F. Fabrication. 1. Workmanship: All members, when finished, shall be true and free of twists, bends, and open joints between the component parts. Members shall be thor- oughly straightened in the shop by methods that will not injure them, before be- ing worked on in any way. a. Properly mark materials, and match-mark when directed by the Subcon- tractor, for field assembly. b. Grind all edges and corners that could contact membrane to a minimum 1/16" (1.6mm)radius. 2. Connections. a. Connections shall be as indicated on the drawings. When details are not shown the connections shall conform to the requirements of the AISC. b. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all structural steel bolted connections,unless noted otherwise. C. Combination of bolts and welds in the same connection are not permit- ted,unless otherwise detailed. d. Welded Connections. 1. Definitions: All terms herein relating to the welds, welding and oxygen cutting shall be construed in accordance with the latest revision of"Standard Definitions of Welding Terms and Master Chart of Welding Processes"of the AWS. 2. Operators: Welds shall be made only by operators who have been previously qualified by tests, as prescribed in AWS D1.1 to perform the type of work required. 3. Welding equipment shall be of sufficient capacity and main- tained in good working condition, capable of adjustment in full range of current settings. Welding cables shall be adequate size for the currents involved and grounding methods shall be such as to insure proper machine operation. 4. No welding shall begin until joint elements are clamped in prop- er alignment and adjusted to dimensions shown on the drawings with allowance for any weld shrinkage that is expected. No members are to be spliced without prior approval. 5. All welding shall be done in accordance with the reference speci- fications,with the following modifications and additions: a. All field welding shall be done by manual shielded met- al-arc welding. b. All groove welds shall have complete penetration,unless otherwise specified on the drawings. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 C. The minimum preheat and interpass temperature re- quirements shall be as required per AWS D1.1. 6. Welding Sequence: Heavy sections and those having a high de- gree of restraint must be welded in a sequence with the proper preheat and post-weld heat treatment such that no permanent dis- tortion occurs. Submit a welding sequence for approval for these types of connections. 7. Oxygen Cutting: Manual oxygen cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch. Alternatively, an unguided torch may be used provided the cut is not within 1/2 inch of the fin- ished dimension and the final removal is completed by chipping or grinding to produce a surface quality equal to that of the base metal edges. The use of oxygen-cut holes for bolted connections or pin connections will under no circumstances be permitted, and violation of this clause will be sufficient cause for the rejection of any pieces in which oxygen-cut holes exist. 3. Tolerances: All tolerances shall be as per the AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" unless otherwise indicated. Limit variation in straightness to(member length)/960 measured in any direction for all members. 4. Paint System, Two-Coat; Zinc Polyurethane: a. Source Quality Control: Primary materials shall be obtained from a sin- gle manufacturer. Secondary materials shall be those recommended by the primary manufacturer. b. Surface Preparation and Prime Coat: 1. Surface preparation shall be commercial blast cleaning SSPC- SP-6, after all fabrication operations such as machining and welding are complete. There shall be a maximum of eight hours elapsed time between surface preparation and application of the prime coat. 2. Protect all drilled and tapped holes and/or threaded studs prior to painting such that all bolted connections can be made by subcon- tractor or membrane structure erector without first cleaning threads. 3. Primer shall be International Paint Interzinc 315 or approved equal, and shall comply with the composition and performance requirements of SSPC paint specification No. 20. 4. Primer shall be mixed and applied in accordance with manufac- turer's instruction and technical product datasheets. The dry film thickness shall be 2.5-3 mils. c. Finish Coat: 1. Finish coat shall be International Paint Interthane 870 series or approved equal, and shall comply with the composition and per- formance requirements of SSPC paint specification No. 36. 2. Finish coat shall be mixed and applied in accordance with manu- facturer's instructions and technical product datasheets. The dry film thickness shall be 4-5 mils. 3. Total system dry film thickness shall be 6.5-8 mils. d. Color: TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. The paint color shall be as specified on the drawings or selected by the Architect. e. Finish Quality: 1. Dry paint shall be uniform and continuous with no voids or pud- dles and shall not be broken by scratches or nicks. Although Birdair or the steel fabricator may witness the painting operation, this does not relieve the painting subcontractor of the responsi- bility for meeting the quality and workmanship requirements of this specification. f. Care and Handling: 1. Painting subcontractor shall make every reasonable effort to en- sure the painted steel is thoroughly dry and it is handles carefully to prevent aesthetic or structural damage. Nylon slings shall be used when handling painted steel. g. Certification: 1. Painting Subcontractor shall certify the paint manufacturer's name, paint identification, conformance with manufacturer's written instructions, and the paint dry mil thickness. G. Source Quality Control. 1. Testing. a. An independent testing laboratory paid for by the Owner shall perform testing and inspection of the structural steel and welding. All welds shall be tested by visual, dye penetrant, magnetic particle methods, or ultra- sonic methods in accordance with instructions from the Subcontractor. b. The Subcontractor and the testing laboratory inspector shall be permitted to inspect the work in the shop or field throughout fabrication and erec- tion. C. The inspector shall check for workmanship of steel, both in the shop and field, and check general compliance with the Contract Documents and steel shop drawings. The inspector shall record types and locations of all defects found in the work and measures required and performed to cor- rect such defects. d. The steel fabricator shall make all repairs to defective work to the satis- faction of the inspector and at no additional cost to the Subcontractor. e. The inspector shall submit reports of his inspection and test findings to the Subcontractor. He shall record all defects found with subsequent re- pair operations and submit reports to the Subcontractor. f. The work of the independent inspector shall in no way relieve the steel fabricator of his responsibility to comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. H. Product Handling and Protection: Use all means necessary to protect structural steel be- fore, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 1. Rejection and Replacement. 1. In the event of damage to the steel, immediately make all repairs and replace- ments necessary to the approval of and at no additional cost to the Subcontractor. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 11 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Any materials or welding rejected through inspection either in the shop, mill or field must be promptly replaced to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to, the Subcontractor. J. Qualifications of Steel Fabricator: The steel fabricator shall have not less than five (5) years' continuous experience in the fabrication of structural steel. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners used to secure clamp systems to curbs and cables, assemblage of clamp systems, and other fasteners as required to complete the work specified herein. B. Materials. 1. All work shall comply with the latest edition of ASTM standards and American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), as referenced herein. 2. Fasteners used in membrane clamping systems shall be stainless steel. Bolts and studs shall conform to ASTM F593, Type 304. Nuts shall conform to ASTM F594, Type 316. Washers shall be plain, narrow, and conform to AISI Type 18- 8. 3. All clamping systems subjected to relative movement between clamping and curb shall receive a split-ring lock washer conforming to AISI Type 18-8. 4. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, all other bolts and nuts shall con- form to ASTM A307-7613, zinc plated to conform to ASTM B633 Class Fe/Zn 8 type III. C. Source Quality Control: The manufacturer shall certify that all fasteners comply with the above referenced specifications. 2.6 GASKETING A. General: All work shall comply with the latest edition of ASTM standards, as referenced herein. B. Sponge Neoprene Gasketing: 1. Material. a. All sponge neoprene shall be of a cellular elastomeric compound of a firm grade,which has been manufactured in pre-formed shapes for use as gasket and sealing material, as specified in ASTM specification C509. b. Cellular elastomeric materials furnished to this specification shall be manufactured from natural or synthetic rubber, or mixtures of these,with added compounds of such nature and quality that,with proper curing, the finished product will comply with this specification. C. The cured compounds shall be suitable for use where resistance to sun- light,weathering oxidation, and permanent deformation under load are of prime importance. d. The manufacturing process shall be such as will ensure a homogeneous cellular material free of defects that may affect serviceability. e. The physical characteristics of the neoprene must meet or exceed ASTM C509, "Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gas- ket and Sealing Materials." f. Certification of material shall be provided that conforms to ASTM C509. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 12 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 C. Dense Neoprene Gasketing: 1. All neoprene material shall conform to ASTM D 2000M hardness Grade 60. The material shall be homogenous, free from defects and shall be compounded and cured to meet the requirements specified herein. 2. All neoprene shall be non-staining formulation and shall consist of at least 50% by weight of basic rubber hydrocarbon. Material shall not contain crude or re- claimed rubber. 3. The physical characteristics of the neoprene must meet or exceed the following physical test requirements when tested using the standard ASTM test slab can compression set plug(or approved equal): PROPERTY ASTM TEST METHOD UNITS a. Shore A Durometer D 2240 55-65 b. Tensile Strength(Min.) D 412 1,100 PSI C. Percent Elongation(Min.) D 412 300% d. Percent Compression Set(Max.)D 395,Method B, 35% 22 hrs at 212°F e. Heat Aging, Change from D 573, 70 hrs @ 212°F Original Properties: 1. Hardness Change(Max.) +15 Points Shore A 2. Tensile Strength(Max.) -15% 3. Elongation Change (Max.) -40% f. Flame Resistance Must Not Propagate Flame g. Temperature Range -30°C to 100°C h. Ozone Resistance D 1171,Method A, 72 hrs @ 38°C and 50 mPa Ozone i. Resistance to Oil Aging: D 471, 70 hrs @ 212°F Immersion in ASTM Oil No. 3 1. Tensile Strength(Max.) -70% 2. Elongation(Max.) -55% 3. Volume Change(Max.) +120% 2.7 MAINTENANCE KIT A. Architectural Membrane Maintenance Kit: The Owner shall be supplied with the following materials for emergency repair or maintenance. The materials shall be neatly packaged into a maintenance kit for storage by the Owner. B. QUANTITY DESCRIPTION 1. 6 12-inch diameter patch with FEP sheets 2. 12 5-inch diameter patch with FEP sheets 3. 12 4 inch x 8 inch rectangular patch with FEP sheets 4. 6 sq yds Outer Membrane 5. 200 ft FEP tape, 3 inches wide TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 13 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 6. 1 Soldering iron, 500W with wedge tip 7. 1 Tacking sealer, 3 inch x 5 inch die 8. 2 Insulating bearing blocks 9. 1 5/8 in. hole punch 10. 1 Utility knife 11. 50 Repair clips 12. 1 Spool of No. 36 nylon twine 13. 36 yds Cormar B29/4 x 15 Kevlar®thread 14. 1 Hand awl 15. 1 pkg C-29 needles 16. 1 Repair manual PART 3 -FABRICATION AND ERECTION 3.1 FABRICATION OF MEMBRANE PANELS A. General. 1. Membrane assembly shop drawings shall include all information necessary for the fabrication by the Subcontractor of the tensile membrane structure. They shall include size and shape of envelope, type and location of shop and field connec- tions, size,type, and extent of all heat-welded seams. 2. The Subcontractor shall take necessary care to plan and assemble the fabricated sections such that the assembly has no shop patches. Splices, if any, shall be pat- terned into a symmetrical and repetitive geometric arrangement within the as- sembly, shown on the shop drawings and, where feasible, hidden by structural members. 3. All fabricated joints shall have a minimum of 90% of the total strength of the coated membrane in strip tensile testing. All structural joints shall be fused in accordance with industry standards and shall maintain the integrity of the coat- ing. PTFE-coated woven fiberglass membranes shall be heat-sealed only. 4. Biaxial Test: At least one (1)representative sample of the outer membrane shall be biaxially test loaded. Membrane compensation in patterning shall be based upon the results of the biaxial test loading. 3.2 ERECTION OF MEMBRANE ASSEMBLIES A. Prior to installation of the membrane assemblies, the Subcontractor shall meet with the General Contractor to review the erection procedure and scheduling. The Subcontractor shall coordinate all work with other trades. B. No trade shall have access to, or work from the membrane, unless authorized by the Sub- contractor in writing. C. Erection of Structural Steel(or other structural supporting elements). 1. The Subcontractor shall employ a competent foreman to supervise all work of steel erection. This foreman shall be present at all times during the Subcontrac- tor's scope of work. 2. All precautions shall be taken to ensure an accurately located and completely safe and stable structure at all times. Adequate guy cables shall be used throughout the work and all erection bolts shall be drawn up tight. 3. All steel shall be accurately aligned before permanent connections are made. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 14 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 4. Temporary bracing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety. The bracing shall be located so it does not interfere with the erection of the ten- sile membrane structure, and can be removed as required during construction. a. The structure is to be self-supporting and stable after the building is fully completed. It is the Subcontractor's sole responsibility to determine the erection procedure and sequence and to ensure the safety of the building and its component parts during erection. This includes the addition of whatever temporary bracing, guys or tie-downs that may be necessary. Such materials shall be removed by the Subcontractor and remain his property after completion of the project. 5. Erection tolerances shall be specified in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," including those related to placement of anchor bolts,unless otherwise indicated. a. Tensile membrane structures (including individual membrane panels) are pre-engineered and pre-fabricated to fit a specific theoretical dimension. For those primary and secondary structural elements to which the mem- brane structure (including an individual membrane panel) is connected, the erected position of member working points, including those of canti- levered members, shall not vary from the theoretical model by more than 1" (25mm) in any direction, either individually, or cumulatively across a shipping piece. This includes but is not limited to: cable connection points,membrane panel edges, membrane bearing locations, intermediate splice points of field-spliced members, hardware connections,weldments and their anchorages. For arched members, include the three- dimensional location of the member midpoint as a working point for tol- erance measurement. b. The cumulative effect of dimensional steel discrepancies shall be such that the distance between membrane panel support points does not vary more than 1" (25mm) from the theoretical dimension within each mem- brane panel. C. All steel structures that support tensioned membrane must maintain an uninterrupted drainage path and a minimum constant slope of 5 degrees from all points of the membrane. d. In the event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations and the requirements of the referenced standards or these specifications, the pro- visions of the more stringent shall govern. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect work from damage and deterioration during installation. B. Upon completion of tensile membrane structure installation: 1. The Subcontractor shall clean all surfaces of the system's components in con- formance with the membrane manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Inspect the system and repair membrane panels that have become damaged. Re- pairs shall be executed in such a way that they are visually acceptable. TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 15 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6,2013 C. Further protection of the work and final cleaning, if necessary, shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 13000 TENSILE MEMBRANE STRUCTURES 133120 - 16 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 220500—COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Supports and anchorages. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Plumbing Fixtures to the architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE,TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. C. Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAgl,unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder- joint,plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized,plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. 2.7 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion,pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron"wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION- COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces,unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.5 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated,but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.8 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces,pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 7 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 8 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 220519—METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermometers. 2. Gages. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. C. Case: Die-cast aluminum, 7 inches long. D. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury filled, with magnifying lens. E. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. F. Window: Glass. G. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane,with locking device. H. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. METERS AND GUAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.2 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 2. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 6. WIKA Instrument Corporation. C. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3. D. Case: Liquid-filled type, stainless steel with 3-inch diameter. E. Element: Bimetal coil. F. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. G. Pointer: Red metal. H. Window: Glass. I. Ring: Stainless steel. J. Connector: Adjustable angle type. K. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.3 THERMOWELLS A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used. B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer. METERS AND GUAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.4 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. AMETEK, Inc.;U.S. Gauge Div. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. C. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 1. Case: Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch diameter. 2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red metal. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Ring: Metal. 9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. D. Pressure-Gage Fittings: 1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type. 2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water storage tank. B. Install liquid-filled-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each pump. C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: 1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions. 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. METERS AND GUAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump. 3.3 INSTALLATIONS A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. C. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable position. D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage. E. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment. F. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION 220519 METERS AND GUAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 220523 —GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves: 1. Copper-alloy ball valves. 2. Copper-alloy butterfly valves. 3. Bronze check valves. 4. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. 5. Bronze gate valves. 6. Bronze globe valves. B. See Division 21 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves. C. See Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.2 VALVES, GENERAL A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves. B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends,unless otherwise indicated. C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends,unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe,unless otherwise indicated. F. Valve Actuators: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 2. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves. G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. H. Valve Flanges: ASME B 16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B 16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B 16.24 for bronze valves. I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves;below 421 deg F for ball valves. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.3 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Jamesbury, Inc. £ NIBCO INC. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Flow-Tek, Inc. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Honeywell Braukmann. h. Jamesbury, Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Red-White Valve Corp. 1. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110. C. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats,and 400-psig CWP rating. D. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWT rating and blowout-proof stem. 2.4 COPPER-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flangeless, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line. C. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Mueller Steam Specialty. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red-White Valve Corp. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Single-Flange, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. C. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Mueller Steam Specialty. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red-White Valve Corp. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining suitable for potable water,unless otherwise indicated. C. Flangeless, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece stem. D. Flangeless, 175-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece stem. E. Flangeless, 200-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece stem. F. Flangeless, 250-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece stem. G. Single-Flange, 150-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or two-piece stem. H. Single-Flange, 175-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or two-piece stem. 1. Single-Flange, 200-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or two-piece stem. J. Single-Flange, 250-psig CWP Rating, Copper-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with one- or two-piece stem. 2.5 BRONZE CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Red-White Valve Corp. 3. Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 e. Grinnell Corporation. f Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell, Wm. Co. j. Red-White Valve Corp. k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 1. Milwaukee Valve Company. M. NIBCO INC. n. Red-White Valve Corp. o. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80. C. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. D. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. E. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. 2.6 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type I, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: a. Mueller Steam Specialty. 2. Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc. b. Flomatic Valves. C. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Mueller Steam Specialty. h. NIBCO INC. 3. Type III, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc. b. Flomatic Valves. C. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Multiplex Manufacturing Co. h. NIBCO INC. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 4. Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: a. Check-All Valve Mfg. Co. b. Grinnell Corporation. C. Metraflex Co. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. Mueller Steam Specialty. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or alloy seat. C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges. D. Type I, Class 250, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges. E. Type II, Class 125, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast- iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle. F. Type II, Class 250, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast- iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle. G. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and flanged ends. H. Type III, Class 250, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and flanged ends. I. Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and threaded ends. J. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and threaded ends. 2.7 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze,Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 h. Red-White Valve Corp. i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Solid-Wedge Gate Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell, Wm. Co. j. Red-White Valve Corp. B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80,with ferrous-alloy handwheel. C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge. D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge. E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge. F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. 2.8 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corp. i. Walworth Co. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 7 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corp. B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80,with ferrous-alloy handwheel. C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc. G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc. H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle,ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: I. Ball Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner. 4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze. 6. Swing Check Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 8 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150, ferrous alloy. 8. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125 minimum. 9. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type 1, Class 125, cast iron. 10. Gate Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125,bronze. 11. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type 1, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 12. Globe Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125,bronze. 13. Globe Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125,bronze-mounted cast iron. D. Sanitary Waste Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Swing Check Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 3, Class 125,bronze. 4. Swing Check Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, gray iron. 5. Gate Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125,bronze. 6. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 7. Globe Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125,bronze. 8. Globe Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron. E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing,NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded ends. 2. For Copper Tubing,NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 3. For Copper Tubing,NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping,NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping,NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 6. For Steel Piping,NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 9 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction. B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free- alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure,unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING 1. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 220523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 10 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 220529—HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. C. See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire- suppression piping. D. See Division 22 Section 'Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors. E. See Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: I. AAA Technology& Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Carpenter&Paterson, Inc. 3. Empire Industries, Inc. 4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 5. Grinnell Corp. 6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 7. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 8. PHS Industries, Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish,unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,jacket, or liner. 2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter&Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type 1 calcium silicate. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti,Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. C. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. C. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes,NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16,requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,NPS 3/4 to NPS 24,requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes,NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes,NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light(MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium(MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. C. Heavy(MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. 1. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 - 7 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP-58,Type 40,protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 - 8 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 - 9 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 220548—VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Housed spring mounts. 4. Elastomeric hangers. 5. Spring hangers. 6. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 7. Pipe riser resilient supports. 8. Resilient pipe guides. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:For each product indicated. B. Welding certificates. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic- restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co.,Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. D. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. E. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. I. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge- bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. I. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. 7. or failure. G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar. H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions. L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches. 2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component. B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component. E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. G. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque,using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component(unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. I. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 220548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 220553 —IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content,but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Black. C. Background Color: White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type,permanent-adhesive backing. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings,pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section"Interior Painting." B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. C. Pipe Label Color Schedule: I. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Sanitary Waste Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. END OF SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 220700—PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. C. Mineral fiber. d. Polyolefin. e. Polystyrene. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 21 Section"Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section"HVAC Insulation." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 8. Detail field application for each equipment type. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I11. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type 11, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. C. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. H. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553,Type V, without factory-applied jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas. b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations. I. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612,Type I11,without factory-applied jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas. C. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt. J. Mineral-Fiber,Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. C. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type 1, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, Grade A,with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity(k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. C. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning;Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. L. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Styrofoam. b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Insulco, Division of MFS,Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.;PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. C. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular-Glass Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33. C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. C. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. C. ITW TACC,Division of Illinois Tool Works; 5-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. E. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 97-13. F. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. C. ITW TACC,Division of Illinois Tool Works; 5-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C,Type Il. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. C. ITW TACC,Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries,Inc.; 55-40. f Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00. C. ITW TACC,Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. f Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-70. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 6. Color: White or gray. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire-and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type 1. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 7 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 6. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for equipment and pipe. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab. b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894. 2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 8 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. C. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW;Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. 2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. 3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 6. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. C. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 9 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2.9 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face,vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 10 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Winch in width. E. PVDC Tape: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 11 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1) GEMCO;Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.;Nylon Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. C. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO;Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-6- mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover. 4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 12 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C &F Wire. b. Childers Products. C. PABCO Metals Corporation. d. RPR Products, Inc. 2.11 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209,Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005;Temper H-14. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 13 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders,jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 1. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 14 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 15 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section 'Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings,Valves, Strainers,Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges,unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 16 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefln, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 17 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 18 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 19 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. 2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch thickness. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 20 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. 3.10 FINISHES A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -21 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field- applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. 2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heat-Exchanger (Water-to-Water for Domestic Water Heating Service) Insulation: Mineral- Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick. D. Domestic water, domestic chilled-water (potable), and domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. E. Domestic Hot-Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -22 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 F. Piping System Filter-Housing Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick. 3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber,Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type 1: 1 inch thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. B. Domestic Chilled Water(Potable): Insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber,Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type 1: 1 inch thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber,Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type 1: 1 inch thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. END OF SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -23 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 221 116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building. B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company. C. See Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. D. See Division 22 Section 'Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. B. Comply with NSF 61, 'Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be j oined. C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M,water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. E. AQUA PEX Tube: ASTM F876 and F877 and NSF Standard 14& 61. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought- copper fittings if indicated. 2.2 VALVES A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section 'Domestic Water Piping Specialties." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section"Barth Moving." 3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping,unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. D. Under-Building-Slab, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to Division 22 Section"Facility Water Distribution Piping." E. Domestic Water Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the Building: Use the following piping materials for each size range: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Steel pipe; gray-iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints. F. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. G. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Steel pipe; gray-iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast- iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated. D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section"Domestic Water Piping Specialties." E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers are specified in Division 22 Section"Domestic Water Piping Specialties." E. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free- alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure,unless otherwise indicated. C. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. 3.6 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's requirements. B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. B. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping using purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 221 119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Drain valves. 7. Water hammer arresters. 8. Pro Set trap Guards. B. See Division 22 Section"Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. C. See Division 22 Section 'Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers. D. See Division 22 Section 'Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic water piping. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig,unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Standard: ASSE 1001. 4. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough bronze. B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Woodford Manufacturing Company. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Standard: ASSE 1001. 4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME 131.20.7. 6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. C. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. C. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Standard: ASSE 1012. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 5. Size: NPS 3/4. 6. Body: Bronze. 7. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 8. Finish: Chrome plated. 9. B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 4. Standard: ASSE 1013. 5. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 6. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 9. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2- 1/2 and larger. b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2,matching backflow-preventer connection. C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Co. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 4. Standard: ASSE 1015. 5. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications,unless otherwise indicated. 6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 8. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 9. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 10. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2- 1/2 and larger. D. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. C. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 4. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test- procedure instructions. 2.3 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES A. Water Regulators: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Honeywell Water Controls. C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3. Standard: ASSE 1003. 4. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig. 5. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3. 6. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. 7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3. 2.4 BALANCING VALVES A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corp. 3. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 4. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 5. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 6. Body: Copper alloy. 7. Port: Standard or full port. 8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 9. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 10. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 11. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device. 2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch. C. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve. 2.6 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL,Inc. b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.;Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 3. Standard: AS SE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 4. Type: Metal bellows. 5. Size: AS SE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,joint construction, and basic installation requirements. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure- reducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump. G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. 1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure-reducing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. K. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 7 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: 1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow- prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves. C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. END OF SECTION 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 8 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 221316—SANITARY WASTE&VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30-foot head of water. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, 'Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; and"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564,rubber. B. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings. SANITARY WASTE&VENT PIPING 221316 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564,rubber sleeve. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping,unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. D. Underground, soil,waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." SANITARY WASTE&VENT PIPING 221316 - 2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. 1. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise indicated. SANITARY WASTE&VENT PIPING 221316 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves,unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Backwater valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: I. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feetm). H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. SANITARY WASTE&VENT PIPING 221316 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 221316 SANITARY WASTE&VENT PIPING 221316 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 SECTION 221319—SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATER VALVES A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB,Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 4. Standard: ASME Al 12.14.1. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Body: Cast iron. 7. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. 8. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless. 9. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang closed. 10. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field- installed cleanout at floor;replaces backwater valve cover. B. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. C. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 3. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 4. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain. 5. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.;Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 -2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 6. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 7. Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug. 8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.;Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 5. Size: Same as connected branch. 6. Type: Adjustable housing. 7. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 8. Clamping Device: Required. 9. Outlet Connection: Spigot. 10. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 11. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 12. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 13. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 14. Top Loading Classification: Heavy] Duty. 15. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access. 5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 6. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 7. Closure: Countersunk,brass plug. 8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 9. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw. 10. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze,wall-installation frame and cover. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.;Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 -4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing,with the following minimum weights and thicknesses,unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness. 3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness. B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,but not less than 1/4-inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than f- inch total depression. 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. 1. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor. J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 7 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6,2013 Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 8 land scapeformso t 'i in collaboration with y efficiency: s energy, erresources ight supports human health ptics ted light tion C hermal -- A extends LED Pedestrian and Area Lighting EEO General Description LEO is Landscape Forms most advanced and versatile LED lighting.LEO provides a great visual experience with advanced LED technology that delivers more lumens with less wattage. Warm white light mimics moonlight to support human and environmental health.Proprietary Awen"optics provide directional lighting and LEO's canopy design and all-aluminum construction dissipate heat for greater LED longevity.Offered with 4 standard pole heights, a simple clamping mechanism also enables LEO luminaires to be retrofitted to existing poles. Electrical 11OV-277V 50/60 Hz,Class 2 LED driver is standard and mounted within integrated cast aluminum cabinet.LEO luminaire ships complete with surge protection and terminal block for easy installation. Finish Pangard®II,offered exclusively by Landscape Forms,is a 19 step program of cleaning, priming,and powdercoating that produces the finest metal finish available for site furniture. In addition,Pangard®II contains no heavy metals and is free of Hazardous Air Pollutants. 22" diameter luminaire Type 4 Distribution Structure: LED Cartridge and driver housing are cast aluminum,pole is aluminum extrusion Lamp:54 Cree XP-E [l81 mm] 7" TM21 L70 Life:60,500h Drive Current:350mA Optic: Proprietary Awen"Optic Diffuser: Impact Modified Acrylyte® ] Power Supply:110V-277V [986mm 38 3/4" LED Driver:1 Dimmable TRC-075S21 ODT [766mm] BUG Rating:1311JOG1 301/4" IP Rating:IP66 [143mm] Weight:39 Ibs(luminaire) 5 1/2T EPA:1.143 ft2 [100mm] 4" [122mm] 4 3/4" fighting facts a Yrogrem of urn u.s.goE Light Output(Lumens) 2880 ; Watts 62.04 k [61 mm] Lumens per Watt{Efficacy) 46 `- �J Color Accuracy 80 Color Rendenng Index IrRI) 2 fc Light Color ti e e 0.5fc LM-79 Photometry Grid g equals spacing mounting height 2700K 3000K 45NK 6500K LEO Light Distribution and Spacing Ail'. Is&e ac—V°o IESM LM-713-�;A^'°,°f °°ft ate'a" LEO distribution is an IES Type 4 pattern and can meets or exceeds the IESNA DG-5 standard for Park r` reoKrcwr tvgerserQ-sfecet ebg.me u.s.vepnnme WE—gyg)00 r d�o a ids. walkways,Class I bikeways,and Residential sidewalks at 80'pole spacing,Intermediate sidewalks at 60'pole Visit—JlghthStaomoom for the Label Reler—e GUid& spacing,and Commercial sidewalks at 50'pole spacing.LEO,at 50'pole spacing,also meets the"Special R w�r .i n-XI)I Mu 112M"i t i Conditions"criteria where increased vertical illuminance levels are needed for safety by improving facial "wee'"'"""°°'.L-M'.Lt' o' recognition and peripheral detection of movement.Outside of North America,LEO meets CIE-136-2000 for an.amaoorer ft"Aww?m Residential Parks at 60'pole spacing,and City Center or Arcades at 50'pole spacing 25 7.6 20 Warranty 6.0 Six years(50,0O0hr)on LED cartridge and three years on finish and manufacturing defects. 16 To Order 4.8 Specify LEO light pole length,number and placement of luminaires.For luminaire only options,specify as a single or double,with an existing 4",5"or 6"round pole. 12 3.6 Pole clamps included.Select powdercoat color(s)for light and pole.Specify optional twist-lock receptacle and/or cover plate.LEO luminaires and poles ship separately. Anchor hardware is included with order. Other UL Listed,RoHS Pending International Dark Sky Pending O Patent#:US Pat Pending ©2012 Landscape Forms,Inc. ft m 28" diameter luminaire Type 4 Distribution Structure:LED Cartridge and driver housing If are cast aluminum,pole is aluminum extrusion [218mm] Lamp:96 Cree XP-E 81/2, TM21 L70 Life:60,500h Drive Current:350mA Optic: Proprietary Awen"Optic [1144mm] Diffuser:Impact Modified Acrylyte® 45" Power Supply:110V-277V [874mm] 341 LED Driver:2 Dimmable TRC-075S210DT BUG Rating:131U0G2 [183mm] 131 mm IP Rating: IP66 7114° Weight:61 Ibs(luminaire) F EPA:1.701 ft2 wer,�iala [17✓�mm] ■ ightingfacts� Light Output(Lumens} 5701 072e l%4^"] Watts 108.6 Lumens per Watt(Efficacy) 52 Color Accuracy 81 f Celer Rendering Index(CRI) Light Color iF (Bright White) LM-79 Photometry Grid spacing equals mounting height 2709K 3o0LK 45WK 65a0K LEO Light Distribution and Spacing All11s&e�t61ESW 00-7 esooe."op° M"1d°�" eltcr l 'Xr LEO distribution is an IES Type 4 pattern and can meets or exceeds the IESNA DG-5 standard for Park walk- anam11eo9cr tvgms seroLotr,4 U.S.oft-ii&Energy mot?rerrres. d..— ways,Class I bikeways,and Residential sidewalks at 120'pole spacing,Intermediate sidewalks at 100'pole Visit ghwgrecls.cem for the label Reference 0u;de, spacing,and Commercial sidewalks at 70'pole spacing.LEO,at 70'pole spacing,also meets the"Special Regebe9on Number 1"?4k64X1fi41i12121M2y Conditions"criteria where increased vertical illuminance levels are needed for safety by improving facial MolWll u ber.Lea 29' recognition and peripheral detection of movement.Outside of North America,LEO meets CIE-136-2000 for Tvw outdoor eraaYOedway AXgae Residential Parks at 120'pole spacing,and City Center or Arcades at 100'pole spacing landscapeforms.com I a n d s c a p e f or rn so 800.521.2546 269.381.3455 fax 431 Lawndale Avenue, Kalamazoo, MI 49048 LEO—Designs are Patent Pending Landscape Fonns is proud to specify FSC®and Green-e Metallic the world's most recycled material and is fully MIX certified paper.This paper meets the Forest Stewardship – oe�. s,,, a�,or�9. ecyclable.Consult our website for recycled content for Paper from Couni standards for responsible forest management and this product.Powdercoat finish on metal parts contains responsible sources is made using certified renewable energy. no heavy metals,is HAPS-free and has extremely low VOCs. FSC FSC®CO15782 6" RETROFIT DOWNLIGHTS • R• .t 13W(6inch) 07-1/16inch f6180mm ® F 0 i '0001� 4-11/16inch/120mm w J\ rn 7 a 3 13W 'D • 'D .'D • . -D T61m Color or Vounling('-W"-White Trim) ( D6AN131ECC0 BUAAWBB ) D6AN132ECC0.BIJAAWBI3) WATTS W 7 13 LUMENS PER WATT(EFFICACY) m/W 60 62 LIGHT OUTPUT Im 780 810 LIGHT COLOR(CCT) K 3,000 3,500 BEAM ANGLE 100 100 DIMMING Dimmable Dimmable TRIM White White IC RATED YES YES WET AND DAMP RATED YES YES COLOR ACCURACY(CRI) Ra 82 82 PRODUCT WEIGHT oz(g) 20.3(575) 20 3(575) RATING LIFE h 35,000 35,000 INPUT VOLTAGE(AC) y 120 120 DIMENSION Inch 07-1/16 X 3-11/16 07-1/16 X 3-11/16 MM 0180X94 0180X94 *Model No Nomenclature LGE-Size and Fixture Type-Wattage-CCT-Trim Color or Mounting("-W=White Trim) *The specification is subject to change without notice, 36-LG LED LIGHTING 0 PHOTOMETRIC DATA p r c @us ��*> FCc Diagram Luminance Intensity Distribution Cone Lux 11W(5inch) Beam width:8.32ft(2.536m) 90° W-451 -90° 29.83 FC in center 3.28ft(1.0ml 75° 75° Beamwidth:16.63k15.071m)7.43 FC in center 6.56ft 2.Om 60° Beam width:24.96k(7.607m)45° . FC in center 9.84ft(3.Om) Beam width:33.28k(10.143m) LGE-6RDL-13-30—W—RC 15° 6= 5° 1.86 FC in center (D6AN131ECCO.BUAAWAA) —CO/ciao cd/10001m C90/C270 13.12ft(4.0m) LGE-6RDL-13-30—W (D6AN131ECCO BUAAWBB) BeamAngle:2x52 Beam width:8.32ft12.536m) 90° -90° 30.95 FC in center 3.28ft(1.0m) 75 W30' -30* 75° Beam widthab.b3ft(5.O71m1 7.71 FC in center 6.56ft 2.Om 60° Beam width:24.96ft(7.607m1 45° 3.44 FC in center 9.84ft(3.Om) Beam width:33.28ft(10.143m) LGE-6RDL-13-35—W—RC 15 0° -15 1.95 FC in center (D6AN132ECCO,BUAAWAA) —c0/cla0 d/1000 1. -•-c90/c270 13.12ft(4.0m) LGE-6RDL-13-35—W Beam Angle:2x52 (D6AN132ECCO.BUAAWBB) *The specification Is subject to change without notice. LG LED LIGHTING_37 GMLinhtin9 Project: Ford Park Phase II 12V DC LEDTASKTM Type: Fixture Type L STANDARD OUTPUT Within cove surrounding Ford Wall FLEXIBLE LED LINEAR RIBBON Location: Contact Phone: 16.4 m 5 / ' PRODUCT DESCRIPTION -51"r 1 fifi + LEDTask is a flexible LED linear ribbon that conforms to straight, o° ® ® o ® ® ® o 12 curved and irregular architectural coves,bannisters,recesses,and 4 1 other constructs where even,energy saving LED illumination is speci- �z^gm fied. Available in a 5 meter(16.4')reel,LEDTask can be cut in the Ratlius: field to achieve virtually any custom installation. 180— Available in 5500K*Pure White,2700K*and 3500K*Warm White, Red,Blue,Green,Amber.and Purple. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Construction: LEDTask is a flexible LED ribbon that conducts power via the LTW series ribbon to power supply connec- tors. Included in each reel are 3 LTW-24 connectors and 1 LTW-24 affixed to start of reel. Electrical: Each of the 300 LED's per real(19 LED's per foot)are .08W,equalling 1.52 watts per foot. Total Amps per reel is 2. ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLIES 50,000 hr.life. Temperature: 2700K,3500K and 5500K. DIMMABLE MAGNETIC POWER SUPPLIES Power Supplies:See chart at right for complete descriptions and Cat. No. Description catalog numbers. Dimming: Yes with dimmable power supplies(see at right)utilizing LTP-2 2 Amp-Switchable- 120V Cord and Plug. low voltage magnetic on/off wall dimmer(by others). 12VDC @ 2 amps. Electronic. Mounting: 3M double stick mounting tape pre-affixed to LTP-6 6 Amp-Switchable- 120V Cord and Plug. LEDTask Flexible Ribbon. 12VDC @ 6 amps. Electronic. Connectors: LTH-2 2.1 Amp- 12V DC-25W Metal Chassis Hardwire See chart below Screw terminals Label: LIL#326687. LTH-4 4.2 Amp- 12V DC-50W Metal Chassis Hardwire American Lighting Association AR For LTH-50-DIM Screw terminals *Kelvin temperature(color)±200 LTH-60-DIM and S LTH-100-DIM LTH-8 8.5 Amp- 10OW Metal Chassis Hardwire FLEXIBLE LED RIBBON CONNECTORS Screw terminals and mounting feet. Electronic. Cat. No. Description LTH-16 16.7 Amp-20OW Metal Chassis Hardwire LTC-1 Ribbon to Ribbon Connector Screw terminals and mounting feet. Electronic. LTC-3 3" Flexible Ribbon to Ribbon Connector LTH-25 25 Amp-320W Metal Chassis Hardwire LTC-12 12" Flexible Ribbon to Ribbon Connector Screw terminals and mounting feet. Electronic. LTC-24 24" Flexible Ribbon to Ribbon Connector LTH-50-DIM Dimmable-Primary: 120VAC,60Hz, 0.33A LTC-36 36" Flexible Ribbon to Ribbon Connector Secondary: 12VAC, 12VDC,4A Max.5OW LTC-60 60" Flexible Ribbon to Ribbon Connector LTW-6 6" Flexible Ribbon to Power Supply Connector LTH-60-DIM Dimmable-Primary: 120VAC,60Hz, 0.33A LTW-24 24" Flexible Ribbon to Power Supply Connector Secondary: 12V AC/DC, 12VDC,4A Max.60W LTW-48 48" Flexible Ribbon to Power Supply Connector LTHM-100-DIM Dimmable-Input: 120VAC, 60Hz, LTW-60 48" Flexible Ribbon to Power Supply Connector Output: 12VDC 8A Max. 1 OOW, Nema 3R Enclosure ORDERING DETAIL For power supply dimensions,please see www.gmlighting.net Cat. Number Length Total LED's LED Wattage Total Amps Lumens per Ft.* Color LED Life LTR300-SO-27 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 68 2700K Warm White 50,000 hrs. LTR300-SO-WW 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 79 3500K Warm White 50,000 hrs. LTR300-SO-PW 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 131 5500K Pure White 50,000 hrs. LTR300-RD 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 9 Red 50,000 hrs. LTR300-BL 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 12 Blue 50,000 hrs. LTR300-GR 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 34 Green 50,000 hrs. LTR300-AM 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 10 Amber 50,000 hrs. LTR300-PR 5M/16.4' 300(19/ft.) .08W(1.52W/ft.) 2.0 0.4 Purple 50,000 hrs. *Kelvin temperature(color)±200. G MLightin� GM Lighting, )6 811 W.190th)4 • Unit F • Mw.gmli h 60448 Toll-Free:(866)671-0811 FAX: (708)478-2640 www.gmlighting.net e-mail: gmlightingllc @sbcglobal.net• Specifications subject to change without notice. ledtaskso-081112 Recessed wall luminaire Housing:Constructed of die cast and extruded aluminum with Type: integral wiring compartment.Mounting tabs provided. BEGA Product: Enclosure:One piece die cast aluminum louvered faceplate, 1/8"thick.Tempered etched glass.Faceplate is secured by two Project: (2)socket head,stainless steel,captive screws threaded into Voltage: stainless steel inserts in the housing casting.Continuous high Color: temperature O-ring gasket for weather tight operation. Options: Electrical:10.1 W LED luminaire, 11.3 total system watts,-30°C start temperature.Integral 120V through 277V electronic LED Modified: driver,0-10V dimming.The LED and driver are mounted on a removable plate for easy replacement.Standard LED color temperature is 3000K(available in 4000K;add suffix K4).Through Wiring: Maximum four(4)No. 12 AWG conductors(plus ground) suitable for 75'C.Provided with 1/2"NPT threaded conduit entries. Note:Due to the dynamic nature of LED technology, LED luminaire data on this sheet is subject to change at the discretion of BEGA-US.For the most current data,please refer to www. bega-us.com. Finish:These luminaires are available in four standard BEGA colors:Black(BLK;White(WHT);Bronze(BRZ);Silver(SLV).To specify,add appropriate suffix to catalog number.Custom colors supplied on special orders. UL listed,suitable for wet locations and for installation within 3 feet of ground.Type non-IC.Protection class:IP64. Luminaire Lumens:16 Tested in accordance with LM-79-08 B A C Lamps A B C 2197LED IO 10.1 W LED 113/4 21/2 41/4 BEGA-US 1000 BEGA Way,Carpinteria,CA 93013 (805)684-0533 FAX(805)566-9474 www.bega-us.com ©copyright BEGA-US 2012 Updated 10/12 �Y S One-sided • -• 5 y f ' + ill Y f F ,r 1 � . ; t\ Wall luminaires with one-sided or two-sided light output One-sided . Lamp Wall luminaires with shielded light sources and direct and indirect light output. Ideal for up/ Wall luminaires 2359LED 120 10.9W down lighting effects for interior and exterior applications.Available in two sizes for use with with LEDs or for ' lamps •' ' ADA LEDs or for compact fluorescent lamps. -cast aluminum 2296 P ADA ' Arranged individually or in groups,they are timeless design elements for a host of lighting - glass 2298 P- tasks for interior and exterior applications.The luminaires are especially suited for locations integral elec • •• temperature ... • ,..� _•• suffix K4) Two-sided light requiring luminaires with the same shape and light output in different directions. •, - .. • •- - . output 41, BEGA can supply you with suitable LED replacement modules for up to 20 years after the - - ' purchase of LED luminaires—see page 407. Further LED technical data,e.g. luminous flux, . M • Bronze ADA CRI and dimming are provided on the individual luminaire specification sheets,available at UL or CSA listed,suitable for wet locations _ page ,0. ADA 1 26WCFtriple-4p www.bega-us.com. Protection class IP65 ADA 1 42WCFtriple-4p 146 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this and the other sections of Division 26. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1: 1. Submittals 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Record Documents 4. Maintenance Manuals 5. Electrical Testing 6. Rough-ins. 7. Electrical installations. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 26 Section "ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT," for factory-installed motors,controllers,accessories,and connections. 2. Division 26 Section "BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS," for materials and methods common to the remainder of Division 26, plus general related specifications including: a. Access to electrical installations. b. Excavation for electrical installations within the building boundaries and from building to utility connections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section"SUBMITTALS." B. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of electrical related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus one copy of each submittal required,which will be retained by the Electrical Consulting Engineer. 1. Shop Drawings-Final Submittal: 1 additional blue-or black-line prints. 2. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item. 3. Samples: 1 addition as set. C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.04 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for: 1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements. 2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 1.05 ELECTRICAL TESTING A. When the installation is complete, and before Final Acceptance and Work Close Out,conduct the following tests of the electrical systems. Prepare a written report of values of all test readings and procedures together with together with all additional pertinent information and submit these to the Engineer for acceptance. Furnish all equipment, instruments, and personnel required for these tests. Inform the engineer of intention 48 hours prior to running any tests. B. Low Voltage Service and Distribution: 1. With all lighting and equipment turned on(insofar as practical), take load measurements at the main service and for all feeders leaving the main distribution center or panelboard. Take readings phase by phase. 2. Make an insulation resistance test on all phase bussing within the main distribution switchboard or panelboard with all fuses in place and switches or circuit breakers open. 3. Make insulation resistance test on all feeders leaving the main distribution center or panelboard. 4. Make insulation resistance test with a megger of minimum 500 volt potential. 5. Test the service ground: Resistance to ground should not exceed 5 ohms. Test method shall be the fall of potential method as outlined in Fink& Carroll's Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers. Test shall not be conducted within 24 hours of any precipitation. The area of the test shall not have been contaminated with any liquids which might affect the results. 6. Perform a test of the GFI tripping of the main breaker per NEC 230-95C in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in the presence of the local electrical inspector. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Tab#1 -Name,address and telephone number of each of the following: BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Electrical Contractor,include 24 hour emergency number b. General Contractor C. Architect d. Electrical Engineer e. Supplier of lamps and fuses. 2. Tab#2-Warranties and certificates a. All equipment warranties. b. A letter of certification that the generator and ATS have been properly installed and completely tested. 3. Tab#3 -Test Results. a. Service and feeder load tests. b. Ground test results C. Main breaker GFI test results d. Insulation resistance test results. 4. Tab 94-Shop Drawings. a. Approved shop drawings. b. A separate listing of lamps used with each fixture type. 5. Tab#5 -Operating procedures a. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. b. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. C. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Deliver products to the project properly identified with names,model numbers,types, grades, compliance labels,and other information needed for identification. 1.08 CERTIFICATION All equipment and equipment control panels will be year 2000 compliant. PART 2.00-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.1 PART 3.00-EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. 3.02 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials,and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction,to allow for electrical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in cast-in- place concrete and other structural components,as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate,and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements,refer conflict to the Architect. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb,parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing,maintenance,and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum of interference with other installations. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "ACCESS DOORS" and Division 26 Section"BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS." 12. Install systems,materials,and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 3.04 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (24 is Mechanical Division--26 is Electrical Division). While it is not the intent of this chart to allocate costs to specific contractors, it is common sense BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 to expect the costs of all work to be in some contractors price. Be sure costs are covered. Avoid duplication or omission by careful coordination with all subcontractors and the G.C. Don't assume! FURNISHED SET IN PLACE WIRED UNDER OR MTD. AND CONNECTED Equipment motors and thermal overloads, resistance heaters(3) 24 24 26 Magnetic starters and overload relays(3) 24 26(1) 26 Disconnect switches, fused or unfused,h.P. Rated switches,thermal overload switches and fuses,manual operating switches(3) 26(1) 26(1) 26 Thermostats,control relays,control trans- formers, solenoid valves(3) 24 24(2) 24(2) Note(1)If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, then wiring and connections only by Division 26. Note(2)If line thermostats, P.E. switches, Time switches, etc., carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts,piping, etc., They shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Note(3)The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Provide motors and equipment for only those current characteristics indicated on the drawings. It is the intent of this division to require complete systems per the contract documents. Coordinate all equipment requiring electrical power, regardless of voltage, with other trades, so that all systems are complete and operable. END OF SECTION 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 GROUNDING SECTION 260526 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No.4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. GROUNDING 260526-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger,unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power- distribution units. GROUNDING 260526-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units,piping, connected equipment, and components. C. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment,provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location,terminal cabinet,wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. D. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch- circuit conductors. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required,use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange,using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. GROUNDING 260526-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized,test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System; 5 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 GROUNDING 260526-4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 260529 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project,with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. B. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS 131.1/131.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT,ANCHORAGE,AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube&Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line,Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. C. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas &Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco,Inc. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening,LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening,LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type,hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC- PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 RACEWAYS,BOXES AND CABINETS SECTION 260533 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings,boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. EMT: ANSI C80.3. B. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous(Classified)Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. ENT: NEMA TC 13. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC,unless otherwise indicated. C. LFNC: UL 1660. D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3;match to conduit or tubing type and material. RACEWAYS,BOXES AND CABINETS 260533-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line,Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 BOXES,ENCLOSURES,AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. C. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. Plug-in devices in floor boxes shall be recessed in the box so plugs do not protrude above floor line. Floor box covers shall be brass. D. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round. Plug-in devices in floor boxes shall be recessed in the box so plugs do not protrude above floor line. Floor box covers shall be brass. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1,with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. G. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. RACEWAYS,BOXES AND CABINETS 260533-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: not permitted. 2. Concealed Conduit,Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures,Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 3R. B. Comply with the following indoor applications,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed,Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT from panel to local junction box within room,MC cable from local junction box to device. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: EMT. 5. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch] [3/4-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." RACEWAYS,BOXES AND CABINETS 260533-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits,for which fewer bends are allowed. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors,unless otherwise indicated. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement,place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-1b tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. 1. Install expansion joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. C. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. RACEWAYS,BOXES AND CABINETS 260533-4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change. 3. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section"Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. RACEWAYS,BOXES AND CABINETS 260533-5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS,BOXES AND CABINETS 260533-6 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type,with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment,unless otherwise indicated. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 C. Fasteners for Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. D. Warning label and sign shall include,but are not limited to,the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 mm)." 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify field- installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications,voice, and data wiring connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including,but not limited to,the following: a. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated,provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1- 1/2-inch-high label;where 2 lines of text are required,use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for screw attachment. C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. C. Disconnect switches. d. Enclosed circuit breakers. e. Contactors. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. C. Phase C: Blue. END OF SECTION 260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEFASCE 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Field quality-control reports. E. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. F. Operation and maintenance data. PANELBOARDS 262416-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosures: Flush-and surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door,mounted in transparent card holder. C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. D. Phase,Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed(Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. PANELBOARDS 262416-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1,power and feeder distribution type. D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock;keyed alike. E. Mains: as scheduled F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt- on circuit breakers. G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt- on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Receive,inspect,handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. PANELBOARDS 262416-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS 262416-4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles,receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 3. Communications outlets. B. See Division 27 Section"Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). WIRING DEVICES 262726-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass& Seymour/Legrand;Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass& Seymour). 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, Decora type: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). C. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass& Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through, Decora type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass& Seymour; 2084. 2.4 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V,20 A,Decora type: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole),2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way),2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). C. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC 1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). WIRING DEVICES 262726-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.5 WALL-BOX DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. B. Control: Continuously adjustable toggle switch with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472. C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module. 1. Dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. 2.6 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. All wall plates/wall switch interfaces shall be coordinated with the Audio Visual subcontractor. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces Smooth,high-impact thermoplastic 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover. 2.7 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Round with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish,unless otherwise indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable. 2.8 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. WIRING DEVICES 262726-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors,and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting,is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300,without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise,2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. WIRING DEVICES 262726-4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,multigang wall plates. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug,verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262726-5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. B. See Division 26 Section"Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. C. See Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches,photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights,methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists,the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2. Alternate Manufacturers Products: Submit a request to use alternate manufacturers products to the architectural for approval. Alternate manufacturer's products must be approved before including in bid. If necessary provide a separate line item for the alternate lighting product. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools unless otherwise specified. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows,unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.156 inchminimum unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass,unless otherwise indicated. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.3 BALLASTS A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; programmed start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 1. Sound Rating: A 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or as specified. 7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. B. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher,unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C,maximum. C. Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp continuously at 100% lumen output each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: Sealed,maintenance-free,nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-3 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed,maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 2.6 LAMPS A. Low-Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. B. T8 Programmed Start High Output Low Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life 30,000 hours,unless otherwise indicated. C. T5 Programmed Start Low Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life 20,000 hours,unless otherwise indicated. D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts,unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: '/2 inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, '/2 inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-4 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel 12 gage. E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage. F. Rod Hangers: 3/16 inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated,threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment,cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level,plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and aircraft cable for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. 1. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-5 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. B. See Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists,the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-1 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 1. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows,unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated,match finish process and color of pole or support materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-2 FORD PARK PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal,protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick,pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. END OF SECTION 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600-3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 321400-UNIT PAVING PART 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. New Concrete pavers set in aggregate/sand setting bed over concrete sub-slab. B. Edge restraints for unit pavers. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing. B. 6' x 6' mockup of specified unit paver,pattern,and color. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS A. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units resistant tofreezing and thawing when tested accord- ing to ASTM C 67,made from normal-weight aggregates. Manufacturer: Pavestone 9401 East 96th Avenue Henderson,Colorado 303 287 3700/303 525 3428 Contact:Kristen Holifield www.uavestone.com Style: City Stone III (60mm Thickness) Color: Buff/Charcoal Pattern: City Stone III-Stacked Sizes: Large Square: 298mm x 298mm x 60mm Note:Review with Landscape Architect and Pavestone Sales Rep prior to instal- lation 2.2 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS A.Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Section 033000"Cast-in-Place Con- crete" for normal-weight,air-entrained,ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 psi. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Site Verification of Conditions: 1. General Contractor shall inspect,accept and certify in writing to the paver installation subcontractor that site conditions meet specifications for the following items prior to in- stallation of interlocking concrete pavers. a. Verify that subgrade preparation,compacted density and elevations conform to specified requirements. b. Verify that geotextiles,if applicable,have been placed according to drawings and specifications. c. Verify that Concrete base materials,thickness,compacted density,surface tol- erances and elevations conform to specified requirements. d. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade,aggregate,cement-treated base materials to the Owner,General Contractor and paver installation subcon- tractor. e. Verify location,type,and elevations of edge restraints,utility structures,and drainage holes and inlets. 2. Do not proceed with installation of bedding sand and interlocking concrete pavers until subgrade soil and base conditions are corrected by the General Contractor or designated subcontractor. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify base is clean and dry,certified by General Contractor as meeting material,installation and grade specifications. B. Verify that base is ready to support sand and pavers and imposed loads. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Spread bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed to a nominal 1 in.(25 mm)thickness. Spread bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed rails,using the rails and/or edge re- straints to produce a nominal 1 in. (25 mm)thickness,allowing for specified variation in the base surface. 1. Do not disturb screeded sand. 2. Screeded area shall not substantially exceed that which is covered by pavers in one day. 3. Do not use bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface. B. Lay pavers in pattern(s)shown on drawings.Place units hand tight without using hammers.Make horizontal adjustments to placement of laid pavers with rubber hammers as required. C. Provide joints between pavers between[1/16 in. and 3/16 in. (2 and 5 mm)]wide.No more than 5%of the joints shall exceed[1/4 in.(6 mm)]wide to achieve straight bond lines. D. Joint(bond)lines shall not deviate more than fl/2 in. (±15 mm)over 50 ft. (15 m)from string lines. E. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers or edge units. F. Cut pavers to be placed along the edge with a masonry saw. G. Adjust bond pattern at pavement edges such that cutting of edge pavers is minimized.All cut pav- ers exposed to vehicular tires shall be no smaller than one-third of a whole paver. Cut pavers at edges as indicated on the drawings. H. Keep skid steer and forklift equipment off newly laid pavers that have not received initial compac- tion and joint sand. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 L Use a low-amplitude plate compactor capable of at least minimum of 4,000 lbf(18 kN)at a fre- quency of 75 to 100 Hz to vibrate the pavers into the sand.Remove any cracked or damaged pav- ers and replace with new units. J. Simultaneously spread,sweep and compact dry joint sand into joints continuously until full. This will require at least 4 to 6 passes with a plate compactor.Do not compact within 6 ft(2 m)of un- restrained edges of paving units. K. All work within 6 ft. (2 m)of the laying face must shall be left fully compacted with sand-filled joints at the end of each day or compacted upon acceptance of the work. Cover the laying face or any incomplete areas with plastic sheets overnight if not closed with cut and compacted pavers with joint sand to prevent exposed bedding sand from becoming saturated from rainfall. L. Remove excess sand from surface when installation is complete. M. Allow excess joint sand to remain on surface to protect pavers from damage from other trades. Remove excess sand when directed by[Architect]. N. Surface shall be broom clean after removal of excess joint sand. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The final surface tolerance from grade elevations shall not deviate more than f3/8 in.(f10 mm) under a 10 ft(3 m)straightedge. B. Check final surface elevations for conformance to drawings. C. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in.to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm)above adjacent drainage in- lets,concrete collars or channels. D. Lippage:No greater than 1/8 in.(3 mm)difference in height between adjacent pavers. 3.05 JOINT SAND STABILIZATION A. Apply joint sand stabilization materials between concrete pavers in accordance with the manufac- turer's written recommendations. 3.06 PROTECTION A. After work in this section is complete,the General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION UNIT PAVING 321400 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 328400 -PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED - Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the installation of an underground landscape irrigation system including the following: A. Static pressure verification and coordination of irrigation system installation with land- scape material installation. B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials,refilling and compacting trenches. C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to piping, water meters, backflow preventer assemblies, valves, fittings,heads, controllers and wiring, and final adjustments to insure complete coverage. D. Water connections. E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials. F. Clean-up, Consultant Reviews, and Project Acceptance. G. Tests. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Examine all sections related to project work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 01 - General requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordi- nances,rules, and regulations. B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more strin- gent requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) -UL Wires and Cables. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications -Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To dem- onstrate ability and experience necessary for this Project, submit if requested by Owner, prior to contract award the following: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Pro- ject. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location. C. Owner. d. Brief description of work and project budget. B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping,backflow preventer(s), and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumb- er(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are mini- mums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, re- filling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to re- view in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment,materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be noti- fied no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified rep- resentatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, in- cluding but not limited to Architect, Consultant, Contractor's Superintendent, and In- staller. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all par- ties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.05 SUBMITTALS -Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract. A. Materials List - Submit three copies of a complete materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appro- priate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction. B. Record Drawings (As-Builts): 1. At onset of irrigation installation secure Autocadd files of original irrigation design from Owner, IF THEY EXIST(Contractor responsible for verification with Owner). At the end of every day,revise as-built prints for work accomplished that day in red ink. As-built field prints shall be brought up-to-date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson. A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly as-built drawings. Indicate non- pressure piping changes on as-builds. Upon completion of Project, submit for re- view,prior to final acceptance, final set of as-built mylars and an Autocadd disk copy. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners, side- PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 walk,road intersections or permanent structures), location of following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along routing). C. Sprinkler control valves. d. Quick coupling valves. e. Manual drains and stop and waste valves. f. Drip line blow-out stubs. g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline. h. Gate valves. i. Control wire and data cable splices j. Water meters k. Locations of all sleeving including size, quantity and depth of new sleev- ing 1. Flow sensors m. Master valves 2. Owner's Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Con- tractor if the as-built drawings are not current, and processing of pay request will not occur until as-builts are up-dated. C. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winterization procedures and start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate controller/watering operation instruction with Owner maintenance personnel. 1. Controller Charts: a. Do not prepare charts until Consultant has reviewed record (as-built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting of controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. 2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller. C. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color drawing over entire area of coverage. d. Following review of charts by Consultant, they shall be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20-mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of irrigation system. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packag- ing containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents, instruc- tions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.07 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees,plants,monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfac- tion of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings,walks,walls, and other property from damage. Flare and bar- ricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building mate- rial surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees: 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and lar- ger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, ex- cept directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all costs of such re- pairs unless other arrangements have been made. 2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities that were not staked are encountered and dam- aged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer. If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at Contractor's expense unless other arrangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 original condition. 1.08 WARRANTY/GUARANTY: -Manufacturer shall warrant materials against defects for a period of two years from date of Substantial Completion. Installer(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period. A. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during guaranty period shall be repaired at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged property. B. Expenses due to vandalism before substantial completion shall be borne by Contractor. C. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas during warranty period, so as not to hamper proper operation of irrigation system. 1.09 MAINTENANCE: A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance: 1. Two Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and adjusting each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied on this Project. 2. One eight foot valve key for operation of stop and waste valve. 2. Two six foot valve keys for operation of gate valves. 3. Two keys for each automatic controller. 4. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed. 5. Two aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves. 6. One hand-held Rainmaster Promax maintenance radio kit (complete) include transmitter, receiver, cables, etc, or similar comparable equipment depending on the system installed. B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Consultant. Reopen, operate, and adjust system malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of notification by Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.0 PIPES, TUBES,AND FITTINGS A) Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe,tube, and fitting ma- terials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B) Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L(ASTM B 88M, Type B),water tube, annealed tem- per. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22,wrought- copper solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150,with solder joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy,hexagonal-stock body,with ball-and- socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. C) PE Pipe with Controlled ID: ASTM F 771,PE 3408 compound; SIDR 11.5. 1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609,nylon or propylene plastic with barbed ends. Include bands or other fasteners. D) PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785,PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80. 3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends. E) PVC Pipe,Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 40. 2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends.. 2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A) Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110,rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)thick unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B) Metal,Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1,carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C) Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M,BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. D) Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32,lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E) Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. F) Plastic,Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping sys- tem manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A) PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B) PVC Pipe,Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241,PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21. 2.3 MANUAL VALVES A) Curb Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Mueller Co.;Water Products Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C800. b. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller Pressure Rating: 150 psig(1035 kPa). c. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50)Pressure Rating: 150 psig(1035 kPa). d. Body Material: Brass or bronze with ball or ground-key plug. e. End Connections: Matching piping. f.Stem: With wide-tee head. B) Curb-Valve Casing: 1. Standard: Similar to AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings. 2. Top Section: Telescoping, of length required for depth of burial of curb valve. 3. Barrel: Approximately 3-inch(75-mm) diameter. 4. Plug: With lettering "WATER." 5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve. 6. Base Support: Concrete collar. C) Shutoff Rods for Curb-Valve Casings: Furnish one steel tee-handle shutoff rod with one point- ed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve for Project. D) Brass Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Legend Valve. b. NIBCO INC. c. Red-White Valve Corporation. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig(1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig(4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f.Ends: Threaded or solder joint if indicated. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 i.Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j.Port: Full. E) Bronze Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Legend Valve. b. NIBCO INC. c. Red-White Valve Corporation. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. F) Plastic Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. KBI(King Bros. Industries). b. Legend Valve. c. NIBCO INC. d. Spears Manufacturing Company. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-122. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig(1035 kPa). c. Body Material: PVC. d. Type: Union. e. End Connections: Socket or threaded. f.Port: Full. G) Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO INC. b. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. Class: 125. c. CWP Rating: 200 psig(1380 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM B 62 bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. e. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. £Stem: Bronze,nonrising. g. Disc: Solid wedge;bronze. h. Packing: Asbestos free. i.Hand wheel: Malleable iron,bronze, or aluminum. H) Iron Gate Valves,Resilient Seated: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Mueller Co.;Water Products Division. b. NIBCO INC. c. Danfoss F1owMatic 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C509. OR AWWA C515 b. Pressure Rating: 200 psig(1380 kPa)minimum. c. Body Material: Ductile or gray iron with bronze trim. d. End Connections: Mechanical joint or push-on joint. e. Interior Coating: Comply with AWWA C550. f.Body Design: Nonrising stem. g. Operator: Stem nut. h. Disc: Solid wedge with resilient coating. 1) Iron Gate Valve Casings: 1. Standard: AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings. 2. Top Section: Adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve. 3. Barrel: Approximately 5-inch(125-mm) diameter. 4. Plug: With lettering "WATER." 5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve. 6. Base Support: Concrete collar. J) Operating Wrenches for Iron Gate Valve Casings: Furnish one steel tee-handle operating wrench with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut for Project. K) Iron Gate Valves,NRS: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Legend Valve. b. NIBCO INC. c. Red-White Valve Corporation. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. e. Danfoss F1owMatic 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig(1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: All bronze. f.Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 3. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig(1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: All bronze. f.Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A) Backflow Requirements, inspections and Tests: Backflow prevention devices shall be selected from a list of approved devices set forth by the State of Colorado and Town of Vail. Reduced Pressure Assemblies (RP)will be the only accepted styles of backflow prevention devices. This section shall be approved by the local water purveyor prior to installation. B) Backflow Prevention Location: Backflow is an existing installation within the"Ticket Sales Office"mechanical room. Any modification to existing installation to be approved by owner's representative prior to work being executed. C) Up to 2"taps shall be a FEBCO 825 Series,reduced pressure backflow preventer. It will be sized in accordance with manufacture's recommended velocities,but no velocities shall exceed the normal industry practice of 7.5 feet per second through the backflow device. For 3"Taps and larger the backflow device shall be a FEBCO 880V reduced pressure backflow preventer. It will be sized according to manufacturer's recommend velocities,but no velocities shall ex- ceed normal industry practice of 7.5 feet per second through device. 2.5 CHECK VALVES A) Brass Spring Check: 1. Manufacturers: a. Simmons Manufacturing 2. Description: a. Lead free. b. Silicon bronze cast body. c. Silicon bronze cast poppet. d. Sizes from V to 6" FPT. e. Working pressure—400 PSI. f.Buna-N O-ring, stainless steel spring washer and lock nut. B) PVC Spring Check: 1. Manufacturers: a. Matco-Norca,La Palma, CA. b. NDS Flow Control. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Description: a. Body, spigot, connector seat, cup—PVC. b. Seal,EPDM. c. Spring, stainless steel adjustable from 2-5 lbs. d. Working pressure—200 PSI. e. Stress up to 2". 2.6 MASTER CONTROL VALVES: A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Rain Bird Corporation. B) Description: 1. The electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC 50/60 Hz(cycle/sec) solenoid actuated globe/angle pattern design having a flow rate of 60-300 GPM's with a pressure loss not to exceed 4.9 PSI. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 200 psi(13,8 Bars). 2. The valve body and bonnet shall be a combination of heavy cast red brass body and heavy-duty, glass-filled UV-resistant nylon bonnet and have stainless steel bolts. The dia- phragm shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber. 3. The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control(internal and external bleed)to manually open and close the valve without electrically energizing the solenoid. The valve's internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve box. 4. The solenoid shall require 24 VAC 50/60 Hz power and open with 19.6 VAC minimum at 200 psi(13,8 Bars). At 24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed 0.41 amps. Av- erage holding current shall not exceed 0.28 amps. 5. The valve shall have a brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or shut- off of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1 minute at 200 psi(13,8 Bars) and less than 30 seconds at 20 psi(1,4 Bars). 6. The BPES valve shall have a self-cleaning stainless steel screen designed for use in dirty water applications. All BPES valves include scrubber feature. 7. The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. C) Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Size: See plans. 2. Design Flow Rate: See plans. 3. Design Inlet Pressure: See plans. 4. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: See plans. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 11 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A) Bronze,Automatic Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. b. Netafim USA. 2. Description: Cast-bronze body,normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow ad- justment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. B) Plastic,Automatic Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: Molded-plastic body,normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow ad- justment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 2.8 TRANSITION FITTINGS A) General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with,piping to be joined. B) Transition Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Smith-Blair,Inc; a Sensus company. b. Viking Johnson. 2. Description: AWWA C219,metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping. C) Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Spears Manufacturing Company. b. 2. Description: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimen- sions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end. D) Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 12 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO INC. b. Spears Manufacturing Company. 2. Description: MSS SP-107, PVC four-part union. Include one brass threaded end, one solvent-cement-joint plastic end,rubber O-ring, and union nut. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A) Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter dial, dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet. 2.10 SPRINKLERS A) General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure. B) Plastic,Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: a. Body Material: ABS. b. Nozzle: ABS. c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Flow: See plans. b. Pop-up Height: See plans. c. Arc: See plans. d. Radius: See plans. e. Inlet: See plans. C) Plastic,Pop-up Spray Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: a. Body Material: ABS. b. Nozzle: ABS. c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 13 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. e. Pattern: Fixed,with flow adjustment. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Nozzle: ABS. See plans. b. Flow: See plans. c. Pop-up Height: See plans. d. Arc: See plans. e. Radius: See plans. f.Inlet: See plans. D) Plastic Shrub Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird-1400 series bubblers. 2. Description: a. Body Material: ABS or other plastic. b. Pattern: Fixed flow. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Configuration: See plans. b. Flow: See plans. c. Arc: See plans. d. Radius: See plans. e. Mounting Height: See plans. f.Inlet: See plans. 2.11 SWING JOINTS A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Lasco Fittings,Inc. 3. Spears Manufacturing B) Description: Factory-fabricated,pressure rated to 315 PSI at 73 degrees F when tested in ac- cordance with ASTM D3139. Rigid PVC construction,ASTM D1784,NTP threads per ASTM D2464 and ASTM D2466. Each orating joint shall be sealed with a Buna rubber O- ring installed in pre-compressed sealing groove free of parting lines to prevent leakage. 2.12 QUICK COUPLERS A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the fol- lowing: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 14 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Rain Bird Corporation. B) Description: Factory-fabricated,bronze or brass,two-piece assembly. Include coupler water- seal valve;removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted,rubber-covered cap;hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. 1. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include one matching key. 2.13 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Agrifim. 2. Maxijet, Inc. 3. Netafim USA. 4. Rain Bird Corporation. B) Freestanding Emitters: Device to deliver water at approximately 20 psig(138 kPa). 1. Body Material: PE or vinyl,with flow control. 2. Riser to Emitter: PE or PVC flexible tubing. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Flow: See plans. b. Tubing: PE or PVC: See plans. c. Mounting Height: See plans. C) Drip Tubes with Direct-Attached Emitters: 1. Tubing: Flexible PE or PVC with plugged end. 2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig(138 kPa). a. Body Material: PE or vinyl,with flow control. b. Mounting: Inserted into tubing at set intervals. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Tubing Size: See plans. b. Length: See plans. c. Emitter Spacing: See plans. d. Emitter Flow: See plans. D) Drip Tubes with Remote Discharge: 1. Tubing: Flexible PE or PVC with plugged end. 2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig(138 kPa). a. Body Material: PE or vinyl,with flow control. b. Mounting: Inserted into tubing at set intervals. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 15 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Tubing Size: See plans. b. Length: See plans. c. Emitter Spacing: See plans. d. Emitter Flow: See plans. e. Branch Tubing Size: See plans. f.Branch Tubing Length: See plans. E) Off-Ground Supports: Plastic stakes. F) Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing,NPS 3/4(DN 20),with corrosion- resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig(138 kPa). G) Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing,with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capac- ity required for devices downstream from unit. H) Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing,with corrosion-resistant internal parts. 1) Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing,with corrosion-resistant internal parts. 2.14 CONTROLLERS A) Description: The Rain BirdTM PAR+ESD Satellite Controller with LINK 450-470MHz UHF Radio communication B) The Rain BirdTM PAR+ESD Satellite Controller specifications include but are not limited to: 1. Microprocessor-based, solid-state controllers. 2. Controller shall be capable of activating up to 72 individual stations. 3. Controller shall be a stand-alone controller, or as a satellite controller operated under Rain Bird central control. 4. Controller shall be a stand-alone controller with the capability of 72 addresses. 5. Controller shall have the capability of adding a central control Interface Board, 6. Controller shall be housed in a sturdy, heavy duty temperature and chemical resistant, injection-molded high-impact resistant,plastic pedestal enclosure. a. The pedestal enclosure shall be 34-3/4" (883mm) tall, 17" (432mm) wide and 21" (533mm) deep. b. The enclosure shall be complete with mounting template and hardware for bolting to a poured concrete base. c. The top cover shall have a key-operated lock. d. The plastic enclosure shall have a front and a back removable panel for convenient access to both compartments of the pedestal for installation. The pedestal enclosure shall be gray in color PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 16 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 7. Controller shall be UL&C-UL listed, CE approved and C-Tick compliant a. Controller units shall be capable of operating under the following power requirements 50/60 Hz frequency: 1) 115 VAC Nominal [98-132 VAC], 2) 220 VAC Nominal [208-232 VAC] 3) 240 VAC Nominal [225-255 VAC] 8. The transformer shall be capable of stepping down 115/220/240 VAC input power to 26.5 VAC output power for the operation of solenoid remote control valves and/or valve-in- head sprinklers. 9. The transformer shall be rated at 5.25 AMP capacity for operating a maximum of sixteen (16) standard Rain Bird solenoids at one time at 60 Hz, or twelve (12) standard Rain Bird solenoids at one time at 50 Hz. a. Transformer connector shall have two "pigtails" pre-installed into the power connector to facilitate wiring to primary power. b. For operation at 120 VAC, one wire shall be plugged into the common terminal and the other into the neutral terminal. c. For 220/240 VAC operation, these same positions correspond to the two hot terminals. d. The mounting bracket shall be capable accommodating conduit diameters of up to one inch. 10. Each unit shall have a circuit breaker that can be reset,rated 5.25 AMPS. a. All controllers shall be grounded to 10 OHM or less. b. The unit shall use relays and metal oxide varistor (MOV) surge arrestors to electrically isolate the circuitry from field noise, while providing a physical gap to protect against surge damage from coming in on the field wiring. c. The panel which houses the Main Logic Board shall have a detachable harness that connects to the Power Interconnect Board in the pedestal base, allowing for quick removal of the panel assembly. d. The controller shall use EPROM chips assembled on a carrier socketed on the printed circuit boards to allow easy upgrade of the controller software. 11. The OSM-S shall be installed in the pedestal base with harnesses that daisy chain the OSM-S together. a. The harnesses shall allow for easy field upgrades to increase total capacity up to 72 stations. The OSM-S shall have standard station switches with AUTO, OFF and ON positions. b. Plastic pedestal models shall have up to three 24-station terminal boards available to facilitate field wire installation. c. Each board in turn shall have its own preinstalled 18-gauge wire harness, with the other ends of the harnesses prewired in groups of eight into connectors for quick and simple connection to the OSM-S. 12. The panel assembly of the controller shall have a sealed and sloped keypad and display to keep moisture and contaminants away from the critical electronic components of the unit. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 17 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. A clear, 32-character (two lines of 16 characters each) alphanumeric crystal display shall be used to show the operational information and diagnostic data of the controller in an easy to read manner. b. Indicating LEDs shall give a visual indication of the active schedules and the central control status. c. The control panel shall have 20 large, raised buttons with clear, descriptive icons and English labeling to facilitate local programming. 13. The controller shall have eight (8) user-selected languages: English, French, German, Italian, Japanese,Portuguese, Spanish and Dutch. a. A language display shall act as a prompt. 14. In stand-alone mode, the controller units shall have six (6) automatic and two (2) multi- manual schedules available. a. Each of the independent schedules shall have the capability of up to 12 start times per day. b. Schedules with overlapped start times shall automatically"stack". c. Water budgeting for each independent schedule shall be user-selectable from 0 to 200%in 10%increments,to allow automatic changes to operating times of stations within the schedule without separately reprogramming each station. d. Each individual station shall allow for the setting of operation times from one (1) minute to 120 minutes maximum time, in one(1)minute increments. 15. The CONTROL mode shall provide for four(4)controller control modes: a. "OFF"-for rain shut-down b. "MANUAL"-for manual starts only to operate c. "LOCAL"-to operate the controller in stand-alone mode only d. "MAXI" -for central control operation 1) MAXI shall be selected to allow the PAR+ES controller to respond to the Rain Bird central computer program. 2) This feature will only be active if the Maxi Interface Board is installed. Under central control, the controller shall ignore any of its own individual LOCAL programming unless a loss of control communication from the central is detected. 3) Under LOCAL operation the controller shall be programmed for its desired operation at the controller itself. 4) In the MANUAL mode, the controller shall be capable of manual operation only with no LOCAL or Maxi (central control) schedules capable of operating. 5) Under the OFF "rain shut-down" condition, scheduled irrigation activity will not be initiated at the controller. 16. The Controller shall be capable of multi-station operation, simultaneously operating up to six(6) automatic schedules with a limit of twelve solenoids (at 50Hz)or sixteen solenoids (at 60 Hz)operating at one time. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 18 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Multi-station programming shall be accomplished by having the capability to as- sign any station to one of six(6)different schedules. b. The controller shall have the capability to operate one station from each of these six(6) schedules simultaneously. c. All stations within a given schedule shall line up and operate in sequence one after the other. Any given station may be assigned to more than one schedule. d. The controller shall be capable of operating two(2)multi-manual programs,M1 and M2 17. Under central control operation, all station timing(for the 16-72 individual stations) of the controller unit shall be done from the central control unit and NOT according to the LOCAL schedules that may be programmed at the controller itself. a. A controller with more than 24 stations shall be assigned to two(2) (25 to 48 sta- tions) or three (3)(49 to 72 stations) different central control channels. b. When operating in central control mode,the programming on the controller unit it- self shall be functional only in case of an emergency, should the communication link between the controller and the central be lost. c. The change over from"central control"MAXI mode to the"stand-by"LOCAL program shall take place automatically when communication is lost between the central and the satellite. It will not require a trip to the field to set each controller unit to"stand-by"LOCAL mode of operation. 18. The controller,when operated by the central control, shall be capable of RANDOM ACCESS or operation of the individual stations and is not required to be operated in nu- merical sequence. a. Any of the stations may be repeated anywhere within the schedule's cycle of op- eration, as often as desired and for a different amount of time on each repeat. b. It also shall be possible to place any individual station of a controller in as many different schedules as may be desired. c. There will be no limit or restriction as to the number of individual scheduled cycles a given station may be scheduled in at any time. 19. The built-in,back-up program and nonvolatile memory shall maintain schedules and time- of-day during a power outage for up to 10 years. 20. The controller shall be a two-wire path decoder based control system. a. Output power for the decoders shall be adjustable from the controller b. Inrush and holding current values shall be adjustable from the controller. 21. Central Control Interface-MIM-LINK a. The interface shall be a Rain BirdTM "MIM-LINK" interface with all solid-state electronic circuitry and two-way 450-470MHz UHF radio frequency receiver. b. It shall provide the necessary interface between the computer and the LINK field satellite controllers. c. The interface shall provide true two-way radio communication from the computer out to the LINK field satellite controllers and "feedback" radio communication from the LINK field satellite controllers to the computer. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 19 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 d. Each interface shall be capable of controlling up to 112 LINK channels within a maximum of four(4)groups. e. Status lights shall indicate activity on the various groups as to LINK satellites being operated and individual stations in operation on each of these satellites. £A memory switch shall provide for visual past performance operation in the field g. The MIM-LINK interface shall have the capability of manually operating any stations of any satellites directly from the MIM-LINK. h. The MIM-LINK interface shall be complete with 117/220 VAC power supply cord and an RS-232-C communication cable to be connected between the interface and the serial port of the computer. i.The MIM unit shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with rust preventative plating and a"baked-on"enamel finish. j.The unit shall be mounted near the central computer. k. The MIM_LINK shall have a power supply fuse. 22. The model, location and number of PAR+ES controllers shall be as shown on the drawings or as instructed and shall be as manufactured and furnished by Rain Bird Corporation,Azusa, California, 91702,U.S.A. C) Irrigation decoder specifications include but are not limited to: 1. The decoder addresses shall be pre-coded to eliminate confusion associated with user- defined decoder addressing. 2. The decoders shall be fully encapsulated creating a completely waterproof seal. 3. The field decoder shall be black in color for North America and black outside of North America. 4. The line surge protector decoder shall be yellow in color. 5. The sensor decoder shall be green in color. 6. The decoders mounting shall be recommend to be placed in a valve box but shall be direct burial capable. 7. The decoder electrical input shall be: a. Nominal Voltage: 34 Vpp(24V AC) from two wire line b. Minimum Voltage: 21 Vpp(15V AC) c. Maximum Voltage: 36 Vpp (25V AC) 8. The maximum 14 gauge cable run shall be: a. Star: 2.4 miles b. Loop: 9.6 miles PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -20 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 Maximum Critical Path Lengths for 2-Wise Paths Max.Length For Critical Path Ohms per 1000'or Nominal Ohms per Km (per Star Loop Wire Size conductor)Miles Km Miles Km Miles 2.5 mm2 7.5 Ohms/Km 3.00 1.86 12.00 7.46 14 AWG 2.58 Ohms/1000' 2.66 1 1.65 10.63 6.61 12 AWG 1.62 Ohms/1000' 4.23 2.63 1 16.93 10.52 9. The decoder/solenoid wires shall have a maximum electrical resistance of 3 ohms. 10. The maximum decoder/solenoid 14 gauge cable run shall be a maximum of 456 feet. 11. Wiring for the decoders shall be a Maxi-Cable TM(double jacketed)wire. 12. The environment shall be: a. Working Range: 32°to 122°F (0°to 50° C) b. Storage Range: -4°to 158°F (-20°to 70° C) c. Humidity: 100% 13. Shall have five different field decoder options to allow the user to choose the precise amount of landscape irrigation control needed. a. Rain Bird TM FD 101 Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and valve. b. Rain BirdTM FD102Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and valve or pair of valves. c. Rain Bird TM FD202Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and 2 valves or 2 pair of valves. d. Rain BirdTM FD40IGolf field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 4 individual valves. e. Rain BirdTM FD60IGolf field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 6 individual valves. 14. Rain BirdTM FD 101 Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and valve specifications include but are not limited to: a. Power Draw: 0.5mA(idle), 18 mA(per active solenoid) b. Dimensions: Length: 2.77 in. (70 mm),Diameter 1.5 in. (40 mm) c. Solenoids: 1 with individual control d. Wires: Blue to cable,white to solenoid e. Surge protection shall be required every 500 ft. f.The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. 15. Rain BirdTM FD102Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and valve or pair of valves specifications include but are not limited to: a. Power Draw: 0.5mA(idle), 18 mA(per active solenoid) b. Dimensions: Length: 3.35 in. (85 mm),Diameter 1.77 in. (45 mm) c. Solenoids: 1 or two simultaneously d. Wires: Blue to cable,white to solenoid PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -21 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 e. Surge protection shall be required every 500 ft. f.The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. 16. Rain Bird TM FD202Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and 2 valves or 2 pair of valves specifications include but are not limited to: a. Power Draw: 1.OmA(idle), 18 mA(per active solenoid) b. Dimensions: Length: 3.35 in. (85 mm),Diameter 1.97 in. (50 mm) c. Solenoids: 1 to 4 simultaneously d. Wires: Blue to cable,white and brown to solenoids e. Surge protection shall be required every 500 ft. £The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. 17. Rain BirdTM FD401 Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 4 individual valves specifications include but are not limited to: a. Power Draw: 1.0mA(idle), 18 mA(per active solenoid) b. Dimensions: Length: 3.94 in. (100 mm),Diameter 2.56 in. (65 mm) c. Solenoids: 1 to 4 with individual control d. Wires: Blue to cable, color coded to solenoids e. Surge protection shall be built into the decoder. £The decoder shall have an input fuse of 300-500mA,thermal. g. The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. 18. Rain BirdTM FD60IGolf field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 6 individual valves specifications include but are not limited to: a. Power Draw: 1.OmA(idle), 18 mA(per active solenoid) b. Dimensions: Length: 3.94 in. (100 mm),Diameter 2.56 in. (65 mm) c. Solenoids: 1 to 6 with individual control d. Wires: Blue to cable, color coded to solenoids e. Surge protection shall be built into the decoder. £The decoder shall have an input fuse of 300-500mA,thermal. g. The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. 19. The Rain BirdTM LSP 1 Golf Line Surge Protector decoder specifications include but are not limited to: a. The line surge protector decoder shall be grounded on a two-wire path every 500 feet(150 meters) or every 8 decoders,whichever is smaller. b. The LSP 1 Golf Line Surge Protector decoder shall be placed on a two wire path with FD 101 Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and valves, FD 102Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and valve or pair of valves, and FD202Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and 2 valves or 2 pair of valves. c. The LSP 1 Golf Line Surge Protector decoder shall be used for surge protection only, and shall not have a decoder address. d. The LSP1Golf Line Surge Protector decoder shall protect against 40V, 1.5kW trasil. 20. The Rain BirdTM SD-210Golf Sensor Decoder specifications include but are not limited to: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -22 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. The SD-210Golf Sensor Decoder shall bean interface to flow sensors. b. When the SD-210Golf Sensor Decoder is wired to a flow sensor it shall monitor the current flow rate at a flow monitor by sending a pulse signals to the controller. 2.15 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A) Plastic Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. 2. Description: Box and cover,with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for in- stalling flush with grade. a. Size: As required for valves and service. b. Shape: Rectangular. c. Sidewall Material: PE. d. Cover Material: PE. e. Lettering: "VALVE BOX." 3. All lids shall be branded with the application/appurtenance that is located in the box, in- cluding,but not limited to, zone numbers,isolation valves, air vents, drain valves, quick connects, and wire junction box. B) Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch(19 mm)minimum to 3 inches(75 mm)maximum. 2.16 WIRE CONNECTORS—LOW VOLTAGE A) Manufacturers: 1. 3M DBY/R Pre-Filled Wire Connector B) Description: 3MTM Direct Bury Splice Bulk DBR/Y-6 is a premium moisture-resistant connec- tor that is used to electrically connect and moisture seal thicker insulation wire. Consists of a 3MTM Spring Connector R/Y and a high impact,UV-resistant tube prefilled with moisture- resistant grease. UL-listed for direct bury and rated for 600V. 100/box bulk. 1. Agency Approvals: U L 2. Conductor Sizes: 10 AWG, 18 - 10 AWG, 18 AWG 3. Connection Type: Wire 4. Connector Style: Direct Bury 5. EU RoHS Compliant: Yes 6. Flame Retardant: UL-94 V-2 7. Maximum Wire Gauge: 10 AWG PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -23 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 8. Minimum Wire Gauge: 18 AWG 9. Operating Temperature Range(Celsius): -40 Degrees C to 105 Degrees C 10. Operating Temperature Range(Fahrenheit): -40 to 221 Degree Fahrenheit 2.17 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE A) Control wiring shall be either direct burial or installed in conduit. 1. Direct Burial: a. Conductor construction is soft drawn bare copper meeting the requirements of ASTM Specification B-3. No. 14 AWG minimum. The insulation is a linear low density,high molecular weight polyethylene for systems applications of up to 600 volts. b. Application: Suitable for use as power and control wire for irrigation systems. c. Conductor: Soft drawn bare copper(ASTM Specs. B-3 and B-8), Solid(No. 14 AWG minimum). d. Insulation: Polyethylene(PE) e. Temperature: 75°C f Voltage: 600 volts g. Conductor size: No. 14 AWG minimum; insulation thickness: 0.045 h. Material must be able to pass the following tests without showing signs of degra- dation: (i) Cold Bend—The insulation shall not show any cracks when sample is bent around a 3X mandrel after being subjected to-25°C for four(4)hours. i.Electrical—AC test voltage, 60 seconds at 7500 volts. j.Mechanical Water Absorption—Insulation shall not absorb more than 25 mg mass of water per square inch. k. Sunlight Resistance Test—Samples conditioned for 300 hours of carbon-arc or xe- non-arc exposure. 2. Conduit Wire–THWN Wire: a. Conductor construction is soft drawn bare copper meeting ASTM Specifications B-3 and B-787,No. 14 AWG minimum. b. The insulation is a high quality polyvinylchloride(PVC)with a nylon jacket for systems applications of up to 600 volts and conductor temperatures up to 75°C. c. Application: Suitable for use as power wire for irrigation systems,when buried in conduit. d. Conductor: Soft drawn bare copper meeting applicable ASTM Specifications. e. Solid(No. 14 AWG minimum). f.Insulation: Polyvinylchloride(PVC) g. Jacket: Nylon h. Temperature: 90°C i.Voltage: 600 volts B) Feeder-circuit cables:No. 14 AWG minimum,between building and controllers. C) Controller to Decoder Communications Path 1. Communication wire between the controller and the Decoder must utilize MAXI wire communication. Specifications shall be as follows: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -24 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. MAXI Wire,Hardwire Communications: the MAXI Type Communication wire for the Two-Wire paths shall be double jacketed,two-conductor cable intended for control of the Communications Signal and Feed-back Signal for the Rain Bird Central Computerized Control Systems. The cable shall be suitable for direct bur- ial in the earth and also may be installed in ducts or conduits. b. Conductors: the Conductors shall be tin coated(for good mechanical bonding), soft drawn, annealed solid copper conforming to the requirements of ASTM-33. Each conductor shall be insulated with 4/64"(minimum)thick PVC conforming to the requirements of U.L. Standard#493 for thermoplastic insulated underground feed- er cables(TYPE UF). 2. The two(2) conductors shall be color coded with one conductor black and the other red. Both conductors shall be of the same size and shall be of sizes as specified and/or shown on the drawings and a required for the proper operation of the Satellite and Decoder units connected to it. 3. The wire manufacturer(not the wire broker) shall certify in writing, for each shipment, that the insulated conductors have been tested for and meet the requirements of U.L. Stan- dard#493 for thermoplastic-insulated,underground feeder cables (TYPE UF). He shall also certify in writing that the individual conductors have a minimum insulation thickness of 4/64"throughout the entire length of the cable and that the finished cable meets the fol- lowing requirements of the same standard: a. Dielectric Voltage Withstand Test: 5000V for 60 Seconds b. Tension and Elongation Test: 300 lbf,no separation c. Impact Test: 6000V after the impact d. Crushing Resistance Test:an average of no less than 4500 lbf flat e. Crushing Resistance Test:an average of no less than 1200 lbf edge f.Cold Bend Test: No Cracks 4. Water Absorption: In addition, each shipment of cable shall include a current dated listing card from the Underwriters showing the MANUFACTURER'S U.L. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER-as evidence that the MANUFACTURER is approved to manufacture thermo- plastic insulated underground feeder cable in accordance with the U.L. Standard#493. 5. Outer Jacket: the two (2) conductors shall be laid parallel and covered with a Solid Color, HIGH DENSITY, sunlight resistant polyethylene outer jacket, of the color coding speci- fied and conforming to the requirements of ICEA 5-61-402 and NEMA WC 5. The MINIMUM jacket thickness,when measured at any point in contact with the PVC insula- tion of the copper conductor and to the outer surface of the outer jacket, shall be 3/64" thick. The outer jacket shall be PRESSURE EXTRUDED so as to COMPLETELY FILL the interstices between the two insulated wires. The polyethylene outer jacket shall con- form to the following: 6. The entire outer polyethylene jacket shall be of the color specified for easy identification of the Two-Wire path. Each Two-Wire Path on the system shall have a different color outer jacket for easy identification after installation and for easily distinguishing between the various Two-Wire paths on the system. Standard colors for the outer jacket color- coding shall be White,Red, Green,Blue,Yellow, Orange and Black. 7. The MAXI®Type Cable SHALL be marked on the jacket as follows -MAXI TYPE COMMUNICATION CABLE -2/C ##AWG, along with the manufacturer's name and PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -25 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 identification number(which is mandatory) and other designations, such as,voltage rat- ing, etc., as may be appropriate. The wire shall not be marked with any other designation, except as noted above.The manufacturer shall also certify in writing that the POLYETHELENE outer jacket is of minimum thickness (3/64")throughout the entire length of the cable and that it does meet and conform to the requirements of ICEA S—61 —402 and NEMA WC 5 as outlined above for both Electrical Properties and Physical Properties. 8. The cable shall be shipped on non-returnable wood reels, in the lengths and color-coding outer jacket color as specified. 9. The MAXI Type Communication Cable, for the Two-Wire Paths of the various Rain Bird control systems shall meet or exceed the above specifications in all respects and all written certifications from the manufacturer shall be supplied with the wire as outlined and called for in these specifications. D) SURGE PROTECTION FOR THE TWO-WIRE PATH 1. An LSP-1 Surge Arrestor shall be installed on the 2-wire communication path at each con- troller location. The LSP-1 shall detect and transfer voltage surges of 60 volts or higher traveling along the 2-wire path to a local grounding system via the dedicated grounding wires provided at each end of the device. The LSP-1 Surge Arrestor shall be mounted in the stainless steel mounting bracket in the pedestal of the satellite unit or other suitable lo- cation. A local grounding system(ground rods,plates, cables, or combination)with a ground resistance of ten(10) ohms or less shall be provided at each LSP-1 location. 2. The surge arrestor shall be as manufactured and furnished by Rain Bird Corporation. E) Wire splicing: 1. Wire splicing shall be avoided if possible. 2. Splicing materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-type con- nector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. 3. Splices shall incorporate the following items: a. A solid mechanical connection of the copper conductors. b. Electrical insulation of the mechanical connection. c. A means to waterproof the insulated connection. d. "Strain Relief' to prevent the connection from coming apart. F) Wire conduit: 1. Conduit size and location shall be according to the electrical engineering plans by others. 2. Communication cable and branch circuit cables shall be in separate conduits. G) Grounding: 1. Ground all wire systems in accordance with the latest version of the American Society of Irrigation Consultants Guideline 100 for Earth Grounding Electronic Equipment in Irriga- tion Systems. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -26 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Rain Bird warranties controllers, decoders and ancillary products used on a two-wire path only when connected to a grounding system with a ground resistance of ten(10) ohms or less. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS,LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION A. Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan,the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation equipment, as necessary, at Contractor's expense. B. Contractor is responsible to notify Consultant of any field conditions that conflict with di- rected work. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of these conditions, Contractor will be held responsible for all costs associated with system adjustments required due to the change in field conditions. 3.02 STATIC PRESSURE VERIFICATION-Contractor shall field verify the static pressure at the project site,prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, and submit findings, in writing,to Consultant. If Contractor fails to verify static water pressure prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, Contractor shall assume responsibility for all costs required to make system operational and the costs required to replace any damaged landscape material. Damage shall include all required material costs, design costs and plant replacement costs. 3.03 INSPECTION: - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be per- formed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Grading operations,with the exception of final rg ading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation system begins. B. Underground Utilities shall be installed prior to installation of irrigation system. If irriga- tion installation takes place prior to utility installation, Contractor shall notify Owner of this condition in writing prior to commencement of irrigation installation. 3.04 PREPARATION: A. Staking shall Occur as Follows: 1. Mark,with powdered lime,routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few zones. Contact Consultant 48 hours in advance and request review of stak- ing. Proposed locations of all trees shall be field staked by Contractor and ap- proved by Owner/Landscape Architect prior to Consultant review of irrigation staking. Consultant will advise installer as to the amount of staking to be pre- pared. Consultant will review staking and direct changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -27 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Contractor shall contact Consultant if field spacing varies by+/- 10%of the spac- ing shown on the irrigation plans. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of vari- ances exceeding 10%, Contractor assumes full responsibility for the costs associ- ated with any required system modifications deemed necessary by the Consultant or Owner. 3. If Project has significant topography, freeform planting beds, or other amenities, which could require alteration of irrigation equipment layout as deemed neces- sary by Consultant, do not install irrigation equipment in these areas until Con- sultant has reviewed equipment staking. B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D1557. C. Trenching - Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Draw- ing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. 1. Clearances: a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger- Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inch- es minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Mini- mum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 5 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench. b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches. C. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance between each line and not less than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades. 2. Pipe and Wire Depth: a. Pressure Supply Piping- 18 inches from top of pipe. b. PVC Sleeving- 18 inches from top of pipe. C. Non-pressure Piping(rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe. d. Non-pressure Piping(pop-up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. e. Control Wiring/Data Cable - Side of pressure main or at 18 inch depth if installed in a separate trench with no mainline piping.. f. Drip Tubing- 12 inches from top of pipe. g. Emitter Tubing(Micro-tubing) - 8 inches from top of pipe. 3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precau- tions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 4. Vibratory Plow—Not an acceptable method of installation for irrigation piping and/or wiring. 3.05 INSTALLATION - Locate other equipment as near as possible to locations designated. Con- sultant shall review deviations prior to installation. A. PVC Piping - Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and con- traction. Do not install pipe when air temperature is below 40—F. Place manual drain PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -28 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping to insure complete drainage of system. When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. 1. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe -Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accor- dance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drip Tubing: 1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturers recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blow-out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. C. Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches. b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench. C. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using 3M DBY connectors or similar dry splice method. e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box. f. Install one control wire for each control valve. g. Run two spare #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one common wire from controller pedestal to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: a. Provide 120 volt power connection to automatic controller. b. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and authori- ties having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be per- formed by licensed electrician. D. Automatic Controller: 1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence. 3. Owner shall approve final location of controller prior to installation. 4. Each controller shall be a dedicated separate ground wire and grounding rod as detailed. 5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid galvanized with appropriate fittings. All PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -29 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 below ground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. E. Electric Control Valves - Install cross-handle four inches below finished grade. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box sides. Install each remote control valve in a separate valve box. Install individual valve box flush with grade. F. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on swing joint assemblies plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 10 degrees. G. Drip Valve Assemblies-Install drip valve assembly as necessary. H. Drip Emitters- Stake all surface emitters and with acceptable tubing stakes. 1. Drain Valves - Install one manual drain valve on pressure supply line directly down- stream of backflow preventer. Provide a three cubic foot drainage sump for drain valve. J. Valve Boxes: 1. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed. Valve box extensions are not acceptable except for master valves and flow sensors. Install gravel sump af- ter compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box af- ter valve box is backfilled and compacted. 2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 1/8 inch into valve box lid. K. Gate Valves -to be determined if necessary. L. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkler heads where designated on Drawings or where staked. Set to finish as detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on Drawing unless re-staked as directed by Consultant. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer. Install heads on swing joints or riser assem- blies as detailed. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage. Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended sprinkler head coverage,piping, or other equipment. Consultant may request nozzle changes or ad- justments without additional cost to the Owner. M. Backflow Preventer-to be determined if necessary or re-use existing. N. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Backfill shall not be done in freezing weather except with review by Con- sultant. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement after backfilling is com- pleted. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk-through of system by Consultant. 1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes. Backfill material shall be free of rubbish,vegetable matter, frozen ma- terials, and stones larger than 1 inch in maximum dimension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable backfill if excavated material is unac- ceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade require- PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 30 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 ments. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excava- tions shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods: a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within 20'-0" of building or foundation walls. O. Piping Under Paving: 1. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with sand(a layer 6"below pipe and 6" above pipe). 3. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in ac- cordance with ASTM D155-7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations. 5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, bor- ing, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permis- sion to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner. P. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Flushing-After piping,risers, and valves are in place and connected,but prior to installa- tion of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush pip- ing system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Consultant. Arrange for presence of Consultant 48 hours in advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI,whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident dur- ing the test period. 3. Leaks -Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. C. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 31 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through and addi- tionally, open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Consultant to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed, prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule separate walk-through if neces- sary. 7. Supply Consultant with prints of irrigation as-builts prior to scheduling substan- tial completion walk-through. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Consultant that Owner has received all accessories, charts, re- cord drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through to insure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Consultant shall be reworked to complete satis- faction of Consultant. 5. If after request to Consultant for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Consultant finds items during walk-through which have not been prop- erly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk- throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Con- tractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Consultant to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents. 3.07 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at pro-per and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for op- timum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure+/-7%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water distribution as determined by Consultant, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise noted on Construction Plans or directed by Consultant. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 32 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.08 CLEANING-Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dispose of, off-site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system. END OF SECTION PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 33 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 328400 -PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED - Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the installation of an underground landscape irrigation system including the following: A. Static pressure verification and coordination of irrigation system installation with land- scape material installation. B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials,refilling and compacting trenches. C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to piping, water meters, backflow preventer assemblies, valves, fittings,heads, controllers and wiring, and final adjustments to insure complete coverage. D. Water connections. E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials. F. Clean-up, Consultant Reviews, and Project Acceptance. G. Tests. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Examine all sections related to project work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 01 - General requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordi- nances,rules, and regulations. B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more strin- gent requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) -UL Wires and Cables. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications -Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To dem- onstrate ability and experience necessary for this Project, submit if requested by Owner, prior to contract award the following: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Pro- ject. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location. C. Owner. d. Brief description of work and project budget. B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping,backflow preventer(s), and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumb- er(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are mini- mums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, re- filling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to re- view in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment,materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be noti- fied no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified rep- resentatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, in- cluding but not limited to Architect, Consultant, Contractor's Superintendent, and In- staller. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all par- ties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.05 SUBMITTALS -Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract. A. Materials List - Submit three copies of a complete materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appro- priate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction. B. Record Drawings (As-Builts): 1. At onset of irrigation installation secure Autocadd files of original irrigation design from Owner, IF THEY EXIST(Contractor responsible for verification with Owner). At the end of every day,revise as-built prints for work accomplished that day in red ink. As-built field prints shall be brought up-to-date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson. A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly as-built drawings. Indicate non- pressure piping changes on as-builds. Upon completion of Project, submit for re- view,prior to final acceptance, final set of as-built mylars and an Autocadd disk copy. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners, side- PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 walk,road intersections or permanent structures), location of following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along routing). C. Sprinkler control valves. d. Quick coupling valves. e. Manual drains and stop and waste valves. f. Drip line blow-out stubs. g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline. h. Gate valves. i. Control wire and data cable splices j. Water meters k. Locations of all sleeving including size, quantity and depth of new sleev- ing 1. Flow sensors m. Master valves 2. Owner's Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Con- tractor if the as-built drawings are not current, and processing of pay request will not occur until as-builts are up-dated. C. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winterization procedures and start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate controller/watering operation instruction with Owner maintenance personnel. 1. Controller Charts: a. Do not prepare charts until Consultant has reviewed record (as-built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting of controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. 2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller. C. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color drawing over entire area of coverage. d. Following review of charts by Consultant, they shall be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20-mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of irrigation system. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packag- ing containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents, instruc- tions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.07 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees,plants,monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfac- tion of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings,walks,walls, and other property from damage. Flare and bar- ricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building mate- rial surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees: 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and lar- ger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, ex- cept directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all costs of such re- pairs unless other arrangements have been made. 2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities that were not staked are encountered and dam- aged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer. If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at Contractor's expense unless other arrangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 original condition. 1.08 WARRANTY/GUARANTY: -Manufacturer shall warrant materials against defects for a period of two years from date of Substantial Completion. Installer(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period. A. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during guaranty period shall be repaired at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged property. B. Expenses due to vandalism before substantial completion shall be borne by Contractor. C. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas during warranty period, so as not to hamper proper operation of irrigation system. 1.09 MAINTENANCE: A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance: 1. Two Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and adjusting each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied on this Project. 2. One eight foot valve key for operation of stop and waste valve. 2. Two six foot valve keys for operation of gate valves. 3. Two keys for each automatic controller. 4. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed. 5. Two aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves. 6. One hand-held Rainmaster Promax maintenance radio kit (complete) include transmitter, receiver, cables, etc, or similar comparable equipment depending on the system installed. B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Consultant. Reopen, operate, and adjust system malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of notification by Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. General Piping: 1. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention unit) - Type "k" Hard Copper. 2. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Class 200 PVC BE 3. Non-pressure Lines - Class 200 PVC BE(1"minimum diameter) 4. PVC Sleeving-Class 160 PVC. 5. Drip Tubing-Toro Dura-Pol EHD 1645 3/4"with .050 inch wall thickness. 6. Emitter Tubing-As recommended by emitter manufacturer. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper Pipe -Type K,hard tempered. 2. Fittings -Wrought copper, solder joint type. 3. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cad- mium and solidus at 1125—F and liquids at 1145—F. C. Brass Pipe and Fittings: 1. Brass Pipe - 85%red brass,ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. 2. Fittings -Medium brass, screwed 125-pound class. D. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. Identification Markings: a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings: 1) Manufacturer's name. 2) Nominal pipe size. 3) Schedule of class. 4) Pressure rating. 5) NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval. 6) Date of extrusion. 2. Solvent Weld Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) com- pound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1. a. Fittings - Standard Wright, Schedule 40, injection molder PVC; comply- ing with ASTM D1784 and D2466, cell classification 12454-B. 1) Threads-Injection molded type(where required). 2) Tees and ells - Side gated. b. Threaded Nipples-ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. C. Teflon Tape — All PVC male threaded fittings and nipples, excluding marlex fittings, shall receive wrapping of Teflon tape applied to threaded surfaces per pipe manufacturer's recommendations. d. Joint Cement and Primer - Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings. E. Drip Irrigation Systems: 1. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 122111C. 2. Fittings- Type and diameter recommended by tubing manufacturer. 3. Drip Valve Assembly-Type and size shown on Drawings. a. Wye Strainer-Plastic construction with 200 mesh nylon screen b. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted) without attachment to dia- phragm. C. Pressure Reducing Valve-Plastic construction. 4. Emitters - Single port,pressure compensating,press on type by Irritrol. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 F. Gate Valves: 1. Gate Valves - Brass construction; solid wedge, IPS threads, and non-rising stem with wheel operating handle. G. Quick Coupling Valves - Brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 PSI; operable with quick coupler. Equip quick coupler with locking rubber cover. H. Valve Boxes: 1. Gate Valves, Quick Coupling Valves, Drain Valves,Drip Line Blow-out Stubs, and Wire Splice or Stub Box- Carson Brooks#910-10,box if necessary per the system to be installed. 2. 1 inch through 2 inch Control Valves,Master Valves and Data Cable Splice box- Carson Brooks#1419-12 box if necessary per the system to be installed. 3. Drip Valve Assemblies and Flow Sensors - Carson Brooks #1220-12 box if nec- essary per the system to be installed. I. Electrical Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage: a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger,if required to operate system as designed. b. Electrical Common Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger, if required to operate the system to be installed. C. Wire Colors: 1) Control Wires-Red. 2) Common Wires-White. 3) Master Valve Wires -Blue. 4) Spare Control Wires-Black. 5) Spare Common Wires -Yellow. d. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Consultant. e. Control Wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M DBY direct bury splice. f. Data Cable—Rainmaster EV-CAB-SEN or approved equal with 3M Gel- type connections installed within Preformed Super Serviseal Splice Kit. 2. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of equipment serviced. J. Automatic Controller- Size and type to be determined; mount in same general vicinity of existing controller.. K. Electric Control Valves- Size and type to be determined L. Sprinkler Heads- Size and type to be determined. M. Backflow Preventer- Size and type to be determined;Brass construction. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS,LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION A. Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan,the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation equipment, as necessary, at Contractor's expense. B. Contractor is responsible to notify Consultant of any field conditions that conflict with di- rected work. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of these conditions, Contractor will be held responsible for all costs associated with system adjustments required due to the change in field conditions. 3.02 STATIC PRESSURE VERIFICATION-Contractor shall field verify the static pressure at the project site,prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, and submit findings, in writing,to Consultant. If Contractor fails to verify static water pressure prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, Contractor shall assume responsibility for all costs required to make system operational and the costs required to replace any damaged landscape material. Damage shall include all required material costs, design costs and plant replacement costs. 3.03 INSPECTION: - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be per- formed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Grading operations, with the exception of final rg ading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation ystem begins. B. Underground Utilities shall be installed prior to installation of irrigation system. If irriga- tion installation takes place prior to utility installation, Contractor shall notify Owner of this condition in writing prior to commencement of irrigation installation. 3.04 PREPARATION: A. Staking shall Occur as Follows: 1. Mark,with powdered lime,routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few zones. Contact Consultant 48 hours in advance and request review of stak- ing. Proposed locations of all trees shall be field staked by Contractor and ap- proved by Owner/Landscape Architect prior to Consultant review of irrigation staking. Consultant will advise installer as to the amount of staking to be pre- pared. Consultant will review staking and direct changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking. 2. Contractor shall contact Consultant if field spacing varies by+/- 10%of the spac- ing shown on the irrigation plans. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of vari- ances exceeding 10%, Contractor assumes full responsibility for the costs associ- ated with any required system modifications deemed necessary by the Consultant or Owner. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. If Project has significant topography, freeform planting beds, or other amenities, which could require alteration of irrigation equipment layout as deemed neces- sary by Consultant, do not install irrigation equipment in these areas until Con- sultant has reviewed equipment staking. B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D1557. C. Trenching - Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Draw- ing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. 1. Clearances: a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inch- es minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Mini- mum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 5 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench. b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches. C. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance between each line and not less than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades. 2. Pipe and Wire Depth: a. Pressure Supply Piping- 18 inches from top of pipe. b. PVC Sleeving- 18 inches from top of pipe. C. Non-pressure Piping(rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe. d. Non-pressure Piping(pop-up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. e. Control Wiring/Data Cable - Side of pressure main or at 18 inch depth if installed in a separate trench with no mainline piping.. f. Drip Tubing- 12 inches from top of pipe. g. Emitter Tubing(Micro-tubing) - 8 inches from top of pipe. 3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precau- tions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 4. Vibratory Plow—Not an acceptable method of installation for irrigation piping and/or wiring. 3.05 INSTALLATION - Locate other equipment as near as possible to locations designated. Con- sultant shall review deviations prior to installation. A. PVC Piping - Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and con- traction. Do not install pipe when air temperature is below 40—F. Place manual drain valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping to insure complete drainage of system. When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe -Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accor- dance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drip Tubing: 1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturers recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blow-out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. C. Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches. b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench. C. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using 3M DBY connectors or similar dry splice method. e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box. f. Install one control wire for each control valve. g. Run two spare #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one common wire from controller pedestal to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: a. Provide 120 volt power connection to automatic controller. b. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and authori- ties having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be per- formed by licensed electrician. D. Automatic Controller: 1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence. 3. Owner shall approve final location of controller prior to installation. 4. Each controller shall be a dedicated separate ground wire and grounding rod as detailed. 5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid galvanized with appropriate fittings. All below ground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. E. Electric Control Valves - Install cross-handle four inches below finished grade. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box sides. Install each remote control valve in a separate valve box. Install individual valve box flush with grade. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 10 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 F. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on swing joint assemblies plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 10 degrees. G. Drip Valve Assemblies-Install drip valve assembly as necessary. H. Drip Emitters- Stake all surface emitters and with acceptable tubing stakes. 1. Drain Valves - Install one manual drain valve on pressure supply line directly down- stream of backflow preventer. Provide a three cubic foot drainage sump for drain valve. J. Valve Boxes: 1. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed. Valve box extensions are not acceptable except for master valves and flow sensors. Install gravel sump af- ter compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box af- ter valve box is backfilled and compacted. 2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 1/8 inch into valve box lid. K. Gate Valves -to be determined if necessary. L. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkler heads where designated on Drawings or where staked. Set to finish as detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on Drawing unless re-staked as directed by Consultant. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer. Install heads on swing joints or riser assem- blies as detailed. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage. Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended sprinkler head coverage,piping, or other equipment. Consultant may request nozzle changes or ad- justments without additional cost to the Owner. M. Backflow Preventer-to be determined if necessary or re-use existing. N. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Backfill shall not be done in freezing weather except with review by Con- sultant. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement after backfilling is com- pleted. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk-through of system by Consultant. 1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes. Backfill material shall be free of rubbish,vegetable matter, frozen ma- terials, and stones larger than 1 inch in maximum dimension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable backfill if excavated material is unac- ceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade require- ments. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excava- tions shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 11 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within 20'-0" of building or foundation walls. O. Piping Under Paving: 1. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with sand(a layer 6"below pipe and 6" above pipe). 3. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in ac- cordance with ASTM D155-7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations. 5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, bor- ing, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permis- sion to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner. P. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Flushing-After piping,risers, and valves are in place and connected,but prior to installa- tion of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush pip- ing system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Consultant. Arrange for presence of Consultant 48 hours in advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI,whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident dur- ing the test period. 3. Leaks-Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. C. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through and addi- tionally, open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 12 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Consultant to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed, prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule separate walk-through if neces- sary. 7. Supply Consultant with prints of irrigation as-builts prior to scheduling substan- tial completion walk-through. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Consultant that Owner has received all accessories, charts, re- cord drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through to insure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Consultant shall be reworked to complete satis- faction of Consultant. 5. If after request to Consultant for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Consultant finds items during walk-through which have not been prop- erly adjusted,reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk- throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Con- tractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Consultant to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents. 3.07 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at pro-per and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for op- timum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure+/- 7%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water distribution as determined by Consultant, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise noted on Construction Plans or directed by Consultant. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 CLEANING-Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dispose of, off-site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 13 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 END OF SECTION PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 14 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 329200 -TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding. 2. Sodding. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying,repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers,moles, and mice),unwanted plants(weeds), fungi,bacteria, and viruses. F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. 1. Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments,the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Certification of grass seed. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. C. Product certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. 1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying, 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Turf. not applicable—no seeded turf is specied in this project. 2. Sodded Turf: 120 days from date of substantial completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established,continue maintenance during next planting season. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 -2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following Pawnee Buttes Seed Inc Dry Native Mountain Revegetation Mix: (10%) Fringed Bromegrass (10%)Nodding Brome (20%) Slender Wheatgrass (10%) Steambank Wheatgrass (2.5%) Canby Bluegrass (7.5%)Arizona Fescue (10%) Indian Ricegrass (5%) Thickspike Wheatgrass (5%) Bluebunch Wheatgrass (2.5%) Bottlebrush Squirreltail (2.5%) Sandburg Bluegrass (15%) Sheep Fescue Pawnee Buttes Seed Inc Low Grow Native Grass Mix: (10%) Big Bluegrass, Sherman (10%) Sandberg/Canby Bluegrass (10%) Indian Rice Grass (30%)Arizona Fescue, Redondo (40%) Sheep Fescue, Ovina 2.2 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects and complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows: 'ESF Kentucky Bluegrass Blend Sod' Cut to 2" minimum depth. Emerald Sod Farms, 31581 E. 128th Ave, Commerce City, 80022 (303) 654 0202. 2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade,unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve. G. Sand: Clean,washed,natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. 1. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch (19- mm)sieve; soluble salt content of 7 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture,with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. E. Manure: Well-rotted,unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil,weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 -4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.5 FERTILIZERS A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde,phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium,by weight. D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium,by weight. 2.6 PLANTING SOILS A. Stockpiled Native Topsoil: 1. Quantity: A substantial quantity of native topsoil will result from construction on site.Approximate quantity is unknown. 2. Stockpiling: Stripped topsoil will be stockpiled on the site under Civil work. 3. Composition: Fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of rocks, sticks, oils, chemicals,plaster, concrete and other deleterious materials. 4. Analysis: Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis of the proposed topsoil from an accepted, accredited Testing Agency at Contractor's cost. 5. Test Results: Request Testing Agency to send one (1) copy of test results directly to Landscape Architect and one(1) copy to Owner. B. Imported Topsoil: 1. Quantity: Import topsoil as soon as an insufficient quantity of native soil is veri- fied. Contractor shall calculate the quantity of topsoil needed to complete the work. 2. Cost: Paid for by Contractor on a unit price cost per cubic yard. Obtain authori- zation before ordering. 3. Stockpiling: Stockpile on site as directed by Owner. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 4. Composition: To match or exceed in quality of native stockpiled topsoil, as de- termined by analysis similar to that described above. Imported topsoil shall be amended as necessary per soils analysis report. 5. Samples: Landscape Architect reserves the right to take samples of the imported topsoil delivered to the site for conformance to the specifications. 6. Rejected Topsoil: Immediately remove rejected topsoil off the site at Contractor's expense. Cost of failed sample is responsibility of Contractor. 2.7 SOIL MIXES A. Native Planting Medium: To be used for all seeded areas, shrub beds and tree pits-Amount per Cubic Yard: 40%Topsoil 40% Subsoil 20%Compost B. Flower Bed Mix: Planting Beds for Perennials -Amount per Cubic Yard: 80%Topsoil 20%Compost Materials 2.8 MULCHES A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. B. Sphagnum Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, and with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 3 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks,roots,rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply fertilizer directly to sub-grade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface,and thoroughly blend planting soil. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen,muddy, or excessively wet. a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading,or surface-soil stripping operations,prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass,vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. E. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.2 SEEDING A. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow seed at rates specified and per the plant planting schedule and legend, if applicable. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil,roll lightly, and water with fine spray. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches thickness in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand,blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch and roll surface smooth. 3.3 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first THREE weeks after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod. 3.4 TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing,weeding,mowing,trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf for a period of establishment of 120 days. Roll, re-grade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. C. Apply pesticides and other biological control agents ONLY IF ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY, and if so in strict accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. 3.5 SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Landscape Architect: TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf. At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches. 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf. At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even- colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. END OF SECTION 329200 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 9 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 SECTION 329300-PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Planting soils. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying,repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers,moles, and mice),unwanted plants(weeds), fungi,bacteria, and viruses. G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. 1. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. PLANTS 329300- 1 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments,the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. B. Photos of each species of tree specified at source nursery, samples of mulch, amendments. C. Product certificates. D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil Analysis: For amphitheater soil underlying lawn seating, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. 1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying,wind burn, sweating,whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide PLANTS 329300-2 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. C. Handle planting stock by root ball. D. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials,workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion a. Trees, Shrubs,Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 24 months b. Ground Covers,Biennials,Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: 24 months from date of planting completion. 2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: 24 months from date of planting completion PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. PLANTS 329300 - 3 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. 2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 7 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. E. Manure: Well-rotted,unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil,weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.3 FERTILIZERS A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde,phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium,by weight. D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium,by weight. E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. PLANTS 329300-4 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1. Size: 10-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium,by weight plus micronutrients. 2.4 PLANTING SOILS A. A. Stockpiled Native Topsoil: 1. Quantity: An undetermined quantity of native topsoil will result from construc- tion on site. Approximate quantity is unknown. 2. Stockpiling: Stripped topsoil will be stockpiled on the site under Civil work. 3. Composition: Fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of rocks, sticks, oils, chemicals,plaster, concrete and other deleterious materials. 4. Analysis: Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis of the proposed topsoil from an accepted, accredited Testing Agency at Contractor's cost. 5. Test Results: Request Testing Agency to send one (1) copy of test results directly to Landscape Architect and one (1)copy to Owner's Representative. B. Imported Topsoil: 1. Quantity: Import topsoil as soon as an insufficient quantity of native soil is veri- fied. Contractor shall calculate the quantity of topsoil needed to complete the work. 2. Cost: Paid for by Contractor on a unit price cost per cubic yard. Obtain authori- zation before ordering. 3. Stockpiling: Stockpile on site as directed by Owner. 4. Composition: To match or exceed in quality of native stockpiled topsoil, as de- termined by analysis similar to that described above. Imported topsoil shall be amended as necessary per soils analysis report. 5. Samples: Landscape Architect reserves the right to take samples of the imported topsoil delivered to the site for conformance to the specifications. 6. Rejected Topsoil: Immediately remove rejected topsoil off the site at Contractor's expense. Cost of failed sample is responsibility of Contractor. 7. 2.6 SOIL MIXES PLANTS 329300- 5 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 A. Native Planting Medium: To be used for all seeded areas, shrub beds and tree pits-Amount per Cubic Yard: 40%Topsoil 40% Subsoil 20%Compost B. Flower Bed Mix: Planting Beds for Perennials -Amount per Cubic Yard: 80%Topsoil 20%Compost Materials 2.7 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Finely shredded hard wood bark. B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 3 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. 2.8 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A.Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum. B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric,4.8 oz./sq. yd. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches Remove stones larger than 4 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to sub-grade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. PLANTS 329300-6 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake,remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil per the mix ratios specified in section 2.7 above in this specification. 3.3 TREE, SHRUB,AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting,verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil specified in Section 2.4 for backfill. 2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Container Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 4. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 5. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. PLANTS 329300-7 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 6. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 7. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. Bare-Root Stock: Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch adjacent finish grade. 1. Use planting soil specified in Section 2.5 for backfill. 2. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. 3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside soil-covered roots about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.4 TREE, SHRUB,AND VINE PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying,or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. 3.5 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines per spacing on planting plan. B. Use planting soil specified in 2.4 for backfill. C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. E. Water thoroughly after planting,taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. PLANTS 329300 - 8 GERALD R FORD AMPHITHEATER PHASE 2 NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.6 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 4 inch average thickness, with 24 inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3.7 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. D. Apply pesticides and products and biological control agents only if absolutely necessary, and if so, in strict accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. END OF SECTION 329300 PLANTS 329300 - 9